2014 NEC Changes (Homestudy)

Transcription

1 2014 NEC Changes (Homestudy) Idaho Electrical License This course will review the most important National Electrical Code changes from the 2014 NEC. Changes in Articles Chapter 9 will be covered. Course# ID Code Credit Hours $ This course is currently approved by the Idaho Electrical Bureau under course number ID Completion of this continuing education course will satisfy 16.0 credit hours of course credit type 'Code' for Electrical license renewal in the state of Idaho. Course credit type 'Code'. Board issued approval date: 12/18/2013. Board issued expiration date: 6/30/2017. Page 1 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

2 2014 NEC Changes (Homestudy) - ID Chapter 1 Question 1: Code Wide. Use of the terms Adequate, Inadequate, and Sufficient. Question ID#: In a continuing effort to make the National Electrical Code more user-friendly and more enforceable, the words "adequate", "inadequate" and "sufficient" have been deleted or replaced in many areas of the code. The words, "adequate', "inadequate", and "sufficient" are vague and difficult to understand. An installation guide like the NEC needs precise language with easily understood words so that installers and inspectors have common ground when talking about electrical installations. In general the terms "adequate" and "sufficient" have been changed to "approved". For example, in Section the 2011 NEC said: Outlet and device boxes shall have sufficient depth to allow equipment installed within them to be mounted properly and without the likelihood of damage to conductors within the box. How deep must the box be to have sufficient depth? In the 2014 NEC, Outlet and device boxes shall have an approved depth to allow equipment installed within them to be mounted properly and without likelihood of damage to conductors within the box. Use of the words "adequate", "inadequate", and "sufficient" were used so that the AHJ could take further action in unusual circumstances. It was up to the AHJ to determine what was "adequate" or "sufficient." This is a well-established concept in the NEC, and in general "adequate" and "sufficient" have been changed to "approved." Other examples: 2011 NEC, 312.5(A): Openings through which conductors enter shall be adequately closed NEC: Openings through which conductors enter shall be closed in an approved manner NEC, : Pull and junction boxes shall provide adequate space and dimensions for the installation of conductors NEC: Pull and junction boxes shall provide approved space and dimensions for the installation of conductors. Question 1: Which of the following statements is from the 2014 NEC? A: The identification shall include an approved degree of detail. B: A door sill or curb that is of sufficient height to confine the oil. C: The framing members shall be adequately supported. D: Adequate enclosures, guarding, or both shall be provided. Page 2 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

3 Question 2: Code Wide. 600 Volts to 1000 Volts. Question ID#: The voltage levels in many sections of the 2014 National Electrical Code have been raised from 600 volts to 1000 volts. Solar Photovoltaic (PV) and Wind Generator Systems often operate at voltages greater than 600 volts, and this was the reason for the change. The breakpoint for nominal voltages is now "over 1000 Volts." Voltage levels will now be classified as "1000 volts or less" or "over 1000 volts." Not all the 600 volt levels have been raised to 1000 volts. The Code committee decided to leave the "over 600 volts" classification in place for those sections where a change would have had a big impact on the system installation. For example, in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical Installations, Part II is still "600 volts, Nominal, or Less." Part IV is still "Tunnel Installations Over 600 Volts, Nominal." Most voltage levels will now be classified as "1000 volts or less" or "over 1000 volts." In Article 400, there is apparently a typo which results in two different sections being labeled as part II. The title of the second Part II is the same as it was in the 2011 NEC, "Portable cables Over 600 Volts, Nominal." Code sections where the voltage levels have been changed include the following: - Article 240, Overcurrent Protection. Part IX Overcurrent Protection over 1000 Volts, Nominal. - Article 250, Grounding and Bonding. Part X Grounding of Systems and Circuits of over 1000 Volts. - Article 300, General Requirements for Wiring Methods and Materials. Part II, Requirements for over 1000 Volts, Nominal. - Article 430, Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers. Part XI, Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. - Article 490, Equipment Over 1000 Volts, Nominal. - Article 690, Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems. Part IX, Systems over 1000 Volts. - Article 692, Fuel Cell Systems. Part VIII, Outputs over 1000 Volts. - Article 694, Wind Electric Systems. Part VIII, Systems over 1000 Volts. Question 2: Which of the following is an actual quote from the 2014 NEC? A: Splices and Terminations. Terminations on portable cables rated over 1000 volts nominal, shall be accessible only to authorized and qualified personnel. B: , General. Fuel cell systems with a maximum output voltage over 600 volts ac shall comply with the requirements of other articles applicable to such installations. C: , General. Solar PV systems with a maximum system voltage over 1000 volts dc shall comply with Article 490 and other requirements applicable to installations rated over 1000 volts. D: , General. Wind electric systems with a maximum system voltage exceeding 600 volts ac or dc shall comply with Article 490 and other requirements applicable to installations rated over 600 volts. Page 3 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

4 Question 3: Article 100 Definitions. Battery System. Question ID#: A new definition for Battery Systems has been added to Article 100. Interconnected battery subsystems consisting of one or more storage batteries and battery chargers, and can include inverters, converters, and associated electrical equipment. The definition makes it clear that there must be at least one or more storage batteries and a charger present in order to fit the description of a "Battery System." A battery system includes one or more storage batteries and battery chargers as well as associated electrical equipment. A Stand-Alone Solar Photovoltaic (PV) System uses battery systems to store power; however, a battery system is not an integral component of a PV system. In addition to the PV modules, which convert solar power to DC electricity, a Stand-Alone PV system supplies power to storage batteries and battery chargers as well as either an inverter or a converter. PV systems which are not stand-alone feed AC power back to the utility grid. This new definition was added to the NEC in Article 480 of the 2011 Code cycle and is used in six different Code articles. Based on the scope of Article 100, the definitions for technical terms that appear in two or more Code articles are placed in Article 100. Placing the definition of a Battery System in Article 100 helps keep the NEC consistent and reduces repetitive Code language throughout different Code articles. Question 3: Which of the following is considered a battery system? A: A converter that turns alternating current into direct current. B: A wind generating system that includes storage batteries and a battery charging system. C: A utility-interactive PV inverter. D: A utility-interactive PV system that has no provisions for storing power. Question 4: Article 100 Definitions. Retrofit Kit. Question ID#: A new term, retrofit kit, has been added to Article 100, Definitions. A general term for a complete subassembly of parts and devices for field conversion of utilization equipment. This new definition recognizes that extensive upgrades are being made to luminaires, signs, and outline lighting. These field modifications are replacing conventional lighting with LEDs in order to achieve greater energy efficiency. Section requires retrofit kits used for luminaires to be listed. A retrofit kit which isn't listed can introduce hazards that are a threat to people or property. A listed retrofit kit has been tested by Underwriters Laboratories (ULÂ ) or other testing labs and meets their specifications for safety. A set of published standards for the retrofit kits for signs and luminaires will allow the manufacturers of these kits to manufacture them according to the standards. A listed retrofit kit is a complete unit that has been properly tested. Because the retrofit kits are listed, the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) will have a basis for accepting the new installations. Also, listed retrofit kits will give electrical installers the confidence to know that what they are installing is safe. These retrofit kits, as currently defined in Article 100, are not unique to luminaires, signs, and outline lighting. The new definition will apply to other types of equipment that may need to be upgraded in the interest of energy efficiency, safety, or for other reasons. Retrofit kits will be designed, manufactured and installed to a set of specifications that will give the equipment an extended life and will be safe for the Page 4 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

5 general public. Question 4: Why should retrofit kits, as defined in Article 100, be listed? A: Listed equipment is easier to install. B: Listed retrofit kits that are installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions will not introduce hazards in the field. C: It is more efficient to manufacture products that are uniform. D: Everyone benefits because listed equipment is more energy efficient. Question 5: Article 100 Definitions. Switchgear. Question ID#: Metal-enclosed power switchgear is now referred to as "switchgear." Switchgear includes "Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear," "Metal-Enclosed Switchgear," or "Metal-Clad Switchgear." The new term can be used in all locations where "switchgear" is already used. Switchgear is defined as: An assembly completely enclosed on all sides and top with sheet metal (except for ventilating openings and inspection windows) and containing primary power circuit switching, interrupting devices, or both, with buses and connections. The assembly may include control and auxiliary devices. Access to the interior of the enclosure is provided by doors, removable covers or both. The term switchgear is now used throughout the "Switchgear" is now used throughout the NEC instead of "Metal-Enclosed Power Switchgear." Examples of where "switchgear" is used in the NEC: National Electrical Code Switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards require an arc-flash hazard warning (A)(1)(a) Working space is not required in the back of switchboards, switchgear, or motor control centers Switchgear shall consist of a substantial metal structure and a sheet metal enclosure (B)(1) For feeder taps not over 10 ft. long, the taps cannot extend beyond the switchboard, switchgear, panelboard or disconnecting means. - Article 408 Switchboards, Switchgear, and Panelboards Switchgear Used as Service Equipment The wind turbine disconnecting means shall consist of a group of separate enclosures, or in or on a switchgear (B)(3) Disconnecting means shall not be located within the same enclosure, panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, that supplies loads other than the fire pump. Question 5: Which of the following statements about switchgear is true? A: Switchgear must be arc resistant. B: Switchgear can include power and control devices. C: Switchgear must be enclosed with sheet metal on all sides, including any inspection windows. D: Switchgear and panelboards are the same thing. Page 5 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

6 Question 6: Article 100 Definitions. Selective Coordination. Question ID#: Selective Coordination: Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished by the selection and installation of overcurrent protective devices and their ratings or settings for the full range of available overcurrents, from overload to the maximum available fault current, and for the full range of overcurrent protective device opening times associated with those overcurrents. The purpose of selective coordination is to minimize damage caused by the fault and to prevent a fault from affecting components of the The definition of Coordination (Selective) was clarified in the 2014 Code by replacing the word "choice" with the words "installation and selection." Obviously, in addition to "choosing" the correct type of overcurrent protective device (OCPD), it must be installed correctly. The new definition retains the previous requirement that a selectively coordinated system restricts or limits power outages to only those parts of the system directly affected by a fault. system on the line side of a fault. The definition was expanded to include a statement indicating that a selectively coordinated system must be able to handle all overcurrent conditions to which the system can be exposed - from a simple overload to the maximum available fault current. In a selectively coordinated system, the time/current characteristics of an OCPD are required to be selected and installed to both minimize damage caused by the fault and to prevent a fault from affecting components of the system on the line side of (up-stream of) the fault. For example, in a selectively coordinated system, a fault condition in a branch circuit that originates in a panelboard supplied by a feeder will open the branch circuit OCPD closest to the fault without opening the feeder OCPD that supplies the panel. However, a fault condition in the feeder will open the OCPD that supplies the feeder without opening the service OCPD. In all cases the OCPD is selected and installed to localize the power outage and to open fast enough to minimize damage caused by the fault. The NEC requires selective coordination of overcurrent protection for systems supplying elevators, emergency systems, legally required standby systems, and fire pumps. Some industrial processes may also require such systems. Question 6: Selectively coordinated systems are required to: A: Provide protection only for feeders affected by a fault condition. B: Both limit power outage to the parts of the system where a fault occurs, and to minimize damage to parts of the system affected by the fault. C: Provide protection for only branch circuits affected by a fault condition. D: Provide protection only for the service overcurrent protective device when a fault condition anywhere on the electrical system. Page 6 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

7 Question 7: Article 100 Definitions. Device. Question ID#: Device A unit of an electrical system, other than a conductor, that carries or controls electric energy as its principal function. The definition of "device" has been revised by adding "other than a conductor" to the previous definition. This change clarifies that the term "device" does not include any conductors. Conductors are not considered devices even though parts of a device such as terminals and other energized parts of a device serve the same function as a conductor. Although conductors carry electricity, this change makes it clear that conductors are not considered to be devices. A wire is not a device. Most devices control and carry electrical energy without consuming any electrical power. However, some devices such as occupancy sensors, dimmer switches, GFCI receptacles, AFCI receptacles, and switches with pilot lights do consume very small amounts of power. Other devices such as fuseholders, circuit breakers, receptacles, and snap switches control and carry electrical energy but do not consume any power. Some of the more common devices are circuit breakers, duplex and single receptacles, dimmer switches, fan speed controls, GFCI receptacles, AFCI receptacles, snap switches, and occupancy sensors. In each case, the primary function of all of these devices is to carry and/or control electricity to circuits and loads that they supply. Question 7: Which of the following is considered a device? A: An incandescent light bulb. B: A bathroom vent fan. C: A green equipment conductor. D: A circuit breaker. Question 8: Article 100 Definitions. Ground-Fault Current Path. Question ID#: The term "ground-fault current path" is now included in Article 100 of the 2014 NEC. In previous editions of the NEC, this term was defined in Article Because the term is used in two or more Articles, the definition and its accompanying Informational Note were relocated without change to Article 100. Ground-fault current paths include equipment grounding conductors, metallic equipment, and any other electrically conductive material. A "ground-fault current path" is defined as an electrically conductive path from the place where a ground fault occurs in an electrical system to the electrical source. A "ground-fault current path" is very different than an "effective ground-fault current path." An effective ground-fault current path is intentionally constructed and low impedance. Its purpose is to carry ground-fault current back to the source so the circuit breaker on the faulted circuit will trip. A "ground-fault current path" may not be intentionally created, but it is the path of least resistance. Current wants to go to back to the source, and it will get there along any path that leads back to the source but the majority of it will always flow along the path with the lowest resistance. Fault current will travel on building steel, raceways, or any metal surface. If lightning hits a tree, the ground-fault current path is through the tree to the earth. The human body can also become part of the ground-fault current path, sometimes with fatal results. Fault current may return to the source through conductive materials that are not part of the electrical system such as equipment enclosures, metal gutters, drain pipes, metal roofing, and metal siding. Page 7 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

8 Although grounded electrical systems include a path for ground-fault current such as equipment grounding conductors, the fault current will take any electrically conductive low resistance path back to a grounded source of electrical energy. Question 8: Ground-fault current will flow back to the source of electrical energy: A: Only on an ungrounded conductor. B: By any electrically conductive material that is connected to a grounded source of electrical energy. C: Only on a grounded neutral conductor. D: Only on an equipment grounding conductor. Question 9: Article 100 Definitions. Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC). Question ID#: There is a revised definition of the Equipment Grounding Conductor. The conductive path(s) that provides a ground-fault current path and connects normally non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment together and to the system grounded conductor or to the grounding electrode conductor, or both. The definition of "grounding conductor, equipment (EGC)" has changed in the 2014 NEC. The definition was changed to include the phrase that provides a ground-fault current path. The main purpose of the equipment grounding conductor is to provide a low impedance ground-fault current path. This is done so if an ungrounded conductor contacts a grounded surface, the fault current will travel on the equipment grounding conductor and return to the service or transformer. If the equipment grounding conductor does not provide a continuous path for fault current, the overcurrent device on the faulted circuit might not trip, and the metal parts of the equipment will remain energized causing a dangerous electrocution hazard. The equipment grounding conductor must accomplish the following: (1) Provide a ground-fault current path. (2) Bond together the non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment. (3) Connect the non-current-carrying parts of equipment to the system grounded conductor. Item (3) is done at the service equipment or the source of a separately derived system. Items (1) and (2) are generally done after the first disconnecting means. Question 9: Which of the following conductors is considered an equipment grounding conductor? A: Connects two grounding electrodes together. B: Connects non-current-carrying metal parts to the grounded conductor. C: Connects the grounded conductor to the grounding electrode conductor. D: Connects the grounding electrode to the grounded conductor. Page 8 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

9 Question 10: Article 100 Definitions. Intersystem Bonding Termination. Question ID#: The definition of "intersystem bonding termination" was revised by inserting the word "intersystem" in front of the words "bonding conductors". The definition now reads: A device that provides a means for connecting intersystem bonding conductors for communications systems to the grounding electrode system. The way the term was defined in previous Codes did not make it clear that only bonding conductors from communications systems were to be connected to the intersystem bonding termination. This change makes it clear that only intersystem bonding conductors are to be landed on an intersystem bonding termination. Although the intersystem bonding termination bar was not designed for general bonding and grounding purposes, because it was easily accessible, some individuals were using the intersystem bonding termination bar to bond gas piping and other metal pipes to the electrical system. Only intersystem bonding conductors are to be connected to an intersystem bonding terminal. This change makes it clear that the intersystem bonding termination is only to be used to bond intersystem bonding conductors for systems such as data, voice, cable, and satellite systems. Question 10: Which of the following is permitted to be terminated on an intersystem bonding termination? A: A bonding conductor from a window air-conditioner near the termination. B: A bonding conductor for a TV satellite dish. C: An equipment grounding conductor for a branch circuit. D: A bonding conductor for a propane gas line near the termination. Question 11: Article 100 Definitions. Premises Wiring (System). Informational Note. Question ID#: A new Informational Note was added to the definition of a premises wiring system: Power sources include, but are not limited to, interconnected or stand-alone batteries, solar photovoltaic systems, other distributed generation systems, or generators. These examples of alternate energy sources are getting increasingly common. A new informational note provides example power sources. By definition a premise wiring system includes: (a) wiring from the service point or power source to the outlets or (b) wiring from and including the power source to the outlets where there is no service point. The service point, according to Article 100, is the point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring. So by definition the service point is where the premise wiring connects to the utility wiring. When an alternate source of power is present, such as a solar photovoltaic system or a generator, the wiring from the alternate source is considered part of the premises wiring. If the alternate power source is a stand-alone system, and there is no service point because there is no utility wiring present, the wiring from the alternate power source is also considered part of the premises wiring. The scope of the NEC, from section 90.2, says the Code covers public and private premises, including buildings, structures, mobile homes, recreational vehicles, and floating buildings. At these premises, interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, Page 9 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

10 control, and signal circuit wiring together with all their associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently and temporarily installed is covered by the National Electrical Code. The internal wiring of appliances, luminaires, motors, or other equipment is not considered premise wiring. Question 11: Which of the following types of wiring is considered premises wiring? A: Wiring to the line side of a generator overcurrent device inside a generator. B: Wiring from a generator to a transfer switch. C: Underground utility wiring from a transformer to the utility meter. D: Supplemental heat strips in an electric furnace. Question 12: Article 100 Definitions. Separately Derived System. Question ID#: Separately Derived System The NEC defines a Seperately Derived System as: An electrical source, other than a service, having no direct connection(s) to circuit conductors of any other electrical source other than those established by grounding and bonding connections. The definition of a separately derived system is much simpler now. According to the revised definition, an electrical system is considered to be a separately derived system if its source of electrical power is something other than a service, and except for those conductors connected for grounding and bonding purposes, has no direct electrical connection to conductors of circuits from any other source. Grounding and bonding conductors of separately derived systems are permitted to be connected together as required for grounding and bonding the equipment. Under the previous definition, in some installations, the required bonding and grounding connections disqualified the system from being considered as a separately derived system. Under the revised definition, this is no longer the case. For example, it is now clear that having the bonding and grounding conductors of multiple separately derived systems connected together by a common grounding electrode conductor no longer prevents the separate systems from being considered as separately derived systems. Question 12: Which of the following is never considered a separately derived system? A: A transformer. B: An uninterruptible power supply. C: A service. D: A generator. Page 10 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

11 Question 13: Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Question ID#: An arc-flash is possible anytime there is a fault on energized electrical equipment. An arc-flash hazard warning label draws attention to this danger anytime qualified persons are close to the equipment. The arc-flash label is required to be clearly visible to qualified persons before they examine, adjust, service, or perform maintenance on energized equipment. This label contains more information than required by the NEC. A simple label stating: "WARNING, Arc Flash Hazard" applied by the manufacturer meets the 2014 NEC. The arc flash hazard label may be field or factory applied. The NEC does not provide specific requirements so a label stating WARNING- POTENTIAL ARC FLASH HAZARD is all that the NEC requires. Other standards such as NFPA 70E require more site specific information so as the Incident Energy, Limited approach distance and arc-flash boundary, but this information is not required by the 2014 NEC. The text in has been revised and now "switchgear" is included as one of the types of equipment that must be marked with an arc-flash hazard warning. Adding this new term correlates with the changes made to Article 408 modifying "switchboards and panelboards" to "switchboards, switchgear and panelboards". Other equipment that requires an arc-flash hazard warning are industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures and motor control centers. Electrical equipment for dwellings does not require an arc-flash warning label. In previous editions of the NEC, all arc-flash hazard warning labels were required to be field applied to the electrical equipment. Now, these labels are permitted to be either field or factory applied, but they must meet the following three labeling requirements found in section (B): The marking shall adequately warn of the hazard using effective words and/or colors and/or symbols. - The labeling shall be permanently affixed to the equipment or wiring method and shall not be hand written. - The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. Arc-flash warning labels must alert personnel to the danger of an arc-flash, but there is still not a requirement that the label include approach distances, incident energy, or the arc-flash boundary. Question 13: Which of the following is true regarding the marking required on electrical equipment when there is a potential arc-flash hazard? A: The marking must be at least 6 inches wide and 6 inches tall. B: The marking must warn of the incident energy level and specify appropriate personal protective equipment needed for the qualified person. C: The marking must be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination or servicing the equipment. D: The marking must be applied in the field. Page 11 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

12 Question 14: (B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. Question ID#: Section , Markings, now includes two sub-sections: (A) Manufacturer's Marking, which is a direct quotation of section in the 2011 NEC, and a new section (B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. There are many places in the NEC that require equipment markings to warn the general public or qualified persons working on the equipment about a possible electrical hazard, such as: DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT. Or, WARNING: ARC FLASH HAZARD. Section (B) will standardize these types of signs and provide guidelines about how the label should look and how it is displayed on the equipment. The Informational Note refers to an ANSI standard with more specific information about warning signs, such as the size of the label, font size, and color. Caution, Warning, and Danger signs or labels (B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. Where caution, warning or danger signs or labels are required by this code, the labels shall meet the following requirements. required by the Code must meet specific requirements. 1. The marking shall adequately warn of the hazard using effective words and/or colors and/or symbols. Informational Note: ANSI Z , Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for suitable font sizes, words, colors, symbols and location requirements for labels. 2. The label shall be permanently affixed to the equipment or wiring method and shall not be hand written. Exception to 2: Portions of labels or markings that are variable or could be subject to changes, shall be permitted to be hand written and shall be legible. 3. The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. Informational Note: ANSI Z , Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design and durability of safety signs and labels for application to electrical equipment. Effective words in (B)(1) refers to the words, DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, which must appear on the warning label. Question 14: Which of the following is an example of a sign that is permitted to include variable handwritten information? A: WARNING: ARC FLASH HAZARD. B: WARNING: PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER SOURCE. C: DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT. D: CAUTION - ENGINEERED SERIES COMBINATION SYSTEM RATED AMPERES. Page 12 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

13 Question 15: Available Fault Current. Question ID#: The available fault-current field markings that were first required in the 2011 NEC are meant to be used to determine the interrupting ratings of electrical equipment in non-dwelling locations. The purpose of posting the available fault current is to help select electrical equipment that can withstand a fault approaching the maximum available fault current. The available fault-current marking is related to required short-circuit current ratings of equipment. There has been confusion about this section. Some installers and inspectors were using the posted available fault current to determine arc-flash boundaries, safe work practices, and personal protective equipment required by qualified personnel while working on the equipment. This was not the intent. NFPA Standard 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, is used to determine personnel safety around energized electrical equipment, not the available fault-current label on the electrical equipment. A new Informational Note has been added to section : The available fault-current markings(s) addressed in is related to required short-circuit current ratings of equipment. NFPA 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, provides assistance in determining the severity of potential exposure, planning safe work practices, and selecting personal protective equipment. Question 15: Which of the following statements about marking the available fault current is true? A: An available fault current label is required on the service equipment at a single family dwelling. B: The available fault-current marking must be installed at the factory that manufactured the equipment. C: The arc-flash boundary is determined by the available fault current marked on the equipment. D: The short-circuit rating of the equipment must not be less than the available fault-current marking. Question 16: Lockable Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: A new Code section has been added to Article 110 which describes a lockable disconnecting means. Where a disconnecting means is required to be lockable open, elsewhere in this Code, it shall be capable of being locked in the open position. The provisions for locking shall remain in place with or without the lock installed. Exception: Cord-and-plug connection locking provisions shall not be required to remain in place without the lock installed. The new section provides a point of reference for a requirement that is seen many times throughout the NEC. Where a disconnecting means for equipment is required to be lockable, such as for motors or compressors, the Code requires: The provision for locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting means shall be installed on or at the switch or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting means and shall remain in place with or without the lock installed. A lockable disconnecting means must be capable of being locked in the open position. The new Code section places these general requirements in one central location that can be referred to by other Code sections. This will help reduce having the same Code language throughout a number of different Code articles. Some Code sections may still have additional requirements that modify this general rule but sections that require a lockable disconnecting means will require the disconnecting means to be lockable in accordance with section An exception permits clamshell type lockout type devices to be used with cord ends Page 13 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

14 so as to prevent the cord from being plugged in, even though the clamshell does not remain on the cord when the lock is removed. Question 16: Which of the following is a lockable disconnecting means? A: Circuit breakers installed in a panelboard that has a lockable door. B: A disconnect switch where only the enclosure of the switch is capable of being locked but the switch handle can be opened or closed while the lock is in place. C: A circuit breaker equipped with a lockable device capable of locking the breaker open, and that remains in place regardless of whether or not a padlock is installed in it. D: A disconnect switch that is only capable of being locked in the closed position. Question 17: (C)(3) Entrance to and Egress from Working Space. Personnel Doors. Question ID#: Additional hazards exist when large electrical equipment is located within an enclosed room rather than outside in an open area. In the event of an arc flash or fire, people within the room need to be able to get out quickly. In earlier editions of the Code, where equipment rated 1200 amps or more and containing overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control devices was located in an enclosed room, all personnel doors intended for entrance and exiting the room that were within 25 feet of the equipment's workspace were required to open out in the direction of egress. They were also required to be equipped with panic bars, pressure plates, or other devices that are normally latched but open under simple pressure. The requirement for panic hardware on personnel doors has been expanded to include In the new text for section (C)(3), the 1200 amp threshold has been reduced to 800 amps. Significant arc flash hazards and dangers can exist with electrical equipment regardless of the size or rating. Reducing the threshold to 800 amps will ensure that exit doors for rooms containing distribution panels and other equipment will open in the correct direction and under simple pressure rather than standard door hardware which can be confusing for someone who is disoriented after an arc flash. equipment rated 800 amperes or more. The last change to this section clarifies what type of door hardware may be used in rooms that meet the criteria above. The previous Code text allowed "pressure plates or other devices that are normally latched but open under simple pressure". This Code language left the door hardware requirements open to interpretation. The new Code change eliminates this sentence from the text and now only allows "listed panic hardware" to be used in these electrical rooms. Allowing only listed panic hardware in such electrical rooms ensures that the panic hardware has been evaluated and tested prior to being installed and can be easily opened by simple pressure delivered from any angle. Question 17: Which of the following electrical rooms requires listed panic hardware on the exit door? A: An electrical room enclosing a 600 amp switchboard where the door is located 5 feet from the equipment's required work space. B: An electrical room enclosing a 1000 amp switchboard where the door is located 22 feet from the equipment's required work space. C: An electrical room enclosing an 800 amp switchboard where the door is located 30 feet from the equipment's required work space. D: An electrical room enclosing a 1000 amp switchboard where the door is located 35 feet from the equipment's required work space. Page 14 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

15 Question 18: (E)(2) Dedicated Equipment Space. Outdoor. Question ID#: Dedicated equipment space is now clearly required for outdoor equipment as well as indoor equipment. The same basic language that described the requirements for dedicated equipment space indoors has been added for outdoor electrical equipment. For outdoor electrical equipment: The space equal to the width and depth of the equipment and extending from grade to a height of 6 ft. above the equipment shall be dedicated to the electrical installation. No piping or other equipment foreign to the electrical installation shall be located in this zone. Outdoor dedicated equipment space extends from grade to 6 ft. above the equipment. Designers and architects often want all the equipment in the same location. Gas piping, water piping, mechanical refrigeration lines, phone equipment, cable and satellite equipment and many other types of equipment are often found alongside the electrical service. All this equipment can interfere with the electrical installation and infringe on the dedicated space required for electrical enclosures, raceways, and conductors. It is clear now that there is a reserved space for electrical equipment that is equal to the width and depth of the equipment and extends from grade to a height of six feet above the equipment. Question 18: What is the minimum dedicated space around electrical equipment installed outdoors? A: The width and depth of the equipment and extending from grade to a height of 3 feet above the equipment. B: The width and depth of the equipment and extending from grade to a height of 4 feet above the equipment. C: The width and depth of the equipment and extending from grade to a height of 8 feet above the equipment. D: The width and depth of the equipment and extending from grade to a height of 6 feet above the equipment. Question 19: (A) Guarding of Live Parts. Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact. Question ID#: There are new elevation requirements for the guarding of live parts. The required height above the floor or working platform that will provide a safe buffer between the exposed parts and a person depends on the operating voltage of the equipment that has exposed parts. For equipment that operates between 50 and 300 volts, the minimum elevation is 8.0 ft. For equipment that operates between 301 volts and 600 volts, the minimum elevation is 8 1/2 ft. Eight feet is thought to be the average height of a man standing with his arms raised over his head. Guarding of live parts by elevation requires a minimum height of 8 ft. for 50 to 300 volts and 8.5 ft. for 301 to 600 volts. The idea that the elevation for exposed live parts should increase as the voltage increases is well established in the NEC. Section increases the vertical clearance for overhead service conductors from a minimum of 10 ft. for conductors not greater than 150 volts to ground to 12 ft. for conductors not greater than 300 volts to ground. Likewise, Table (E) requires 9 ft. of clearance for live parts between 601 volts and 7,500 volt, and 9 1/2 ft. clearance for live parts operating between 7,501 volts and 35,000 volts. The clearance requirements in section do not specify that the voltage is measured from phase-to-ground or from phase-to-phase. This means that the minimum clearance for a 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire system is 8 ft. The clearance for a 277/480 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire system is 8 1/2 ft. Page 15 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

16 Question 19: Which of the following options is an acceptable way to provide protection from accidental contact for a 480-volt exposed terminal knife switch that does not have an enclosure? A: Locating the switchâ 8.5 feetâ above the work surface. B: Locating the switch 5 feet above the floor in a room accessible to unqualified persons. C: Locating the switch in a location that is accessible to all occupants of the building. D: Locating the switch 8 feet above the work surface. Chapter 1 - Additional Questions Question 20: Article 100 Definitions. Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC). Question ID#: Question 20: What happens when there is a ground fault and the equipment grounding conductor is not continuous? A: The ground-fault current will travel through the neutral conductor. B: The equipment grounding conductor will carry twice the fault current. C: The faulted circuit will not be cleared by the overcurrent device protecting the circuit. D: The overcurrent device upstream of the fault will trip immediately. Question 21: Available Fault Current. Question ID#: Question 21: Which of the following statements is a reason the available fault current must be posted on electrical equipment? A: To help determine the required arc-flash boundaries. B: To provide better coordination between the National Electrical Code and NFPA 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. C: To help determine the personal protective equipment required to work on the equipment. D: To help determine the required short-circuit ratings of equipment. Question 22: Article 100 Definitions. Battery System. Question ID#: Question 22: Which of the following is NOT included in a battery system? A: A converter. B: A charge control system that regulates the charging of a storage battery. C: A solar photovoltaic (PV) module. D: An inverter. Question 23: Article 100 Definitions. Ground-Fault Current Path. Question ID#: Question 23: Which of the following can act as a ground-fault current path? A: Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC). B: Damp Earth. C: PVC Conduit. D: Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT). Page 16 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

17 Question 24: Article 100 Definitions. Premises Wiring (System). Informational Note. Question ID#: Question 24: Which of the following types of wiring is NOT considered premises wiring? A: Wiring from a solar photovoltaic array to a disconnect. B: Wiring in a panelboard rated for and used as service equipment. C: An underground feeder from a dwelling to a garage. D: Busbars in a motor control center. Question 25: (C)(3) Entrance to and Egress from Working Space. Personnel Doors. Question ID#: Question 25: Assuming all doors are located closer than 25 feet of the equipment work space, which of the following electrical room doors does NOT require panic hardware? A: An electrical room enclosing an 1200 amp cabinet containing switching devices. B: An electrical room enclosing an 800 amp cabinet containing overcurrent devices. C: An electrical room enclosing an 1000 amp cabinet containing control devices. D: An electrical room enclosing an 800 amp cabinet containing metering devices. Question 26: Code Wide. Use of the terms Adequate, Inadequate, and Sufficient. Question ID#: Question 26: Which of the following statements is the most precise? A: Conduit bodies shall be of an approved size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the conduit body. B: The walls and roof of vaults shall be constructed of materials that have adequate structural strength. C: Where adequate space is provided for feed-through conductors and for splices, additional barriers shall not be required. D: Cabinets and cutout boxes shall have sufficient space to accommodate all conductors installed in them without crowding. Question 27: Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Question ID#: Question 27: Which of the following is required to be marked with an arc-flash hazard warning label? A: A 277/480 volt step-down transformer located adjacent to the electric service at an office building. B: A meter socket enclosure on a commercial building. C: A meter socket enclosure at a single family dwelling. D: A panelboard located in a single family dwelling. Question 28: (A) Guarding of Live Parts. Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact. Question ID#: Question 28: What is the required clearance from ground for an overhead crane that operates at 240 volts and has exposed live parts? A: 8 1/2 ft. B: 8 ft. C: 12 ft. D: 10 ft. Page 17 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

18 Question 29: (E)(2) Dedicated Equipment Space. Outdoor. Question ID#: Question 29: Which of the following installations is NOT a code violation? A: Waterline installed 1 ft. above a MCC. B: Refrigerant lines run below a panelboard. C: A service panel and generator transfer switch installed next to each other. D: A service panel installed over a gas meter. Question 30: Lockable Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: Question 30: A lockable disconnecting means is one that is capable of being locked in which position? A: Safe. B: Closed. C: On. D: Open. Question 31: Article 100 Definitions. Retrofit Kit. Question ID#: Question 31: What is a retrofit kit? A: A device that monitors the temperature of installed outline lighting. B: A way to convert 4-lamp luminaires to 2-lamp luminaires without replacing the whole luminaire. C: A complete listed subassembly of parts and devices for field conversion of utilization equipment. D: A subassembly which allows a piece of equipment to be converted from AC to DC electricity. Question 32: Article 100 Definitions. Separately Derived System. Question ID#: Question 32: Which of the following is permitted in separately derived grounded electrical systems? A: Connection between ungrounded conductors of a stand-by generator and a service. B: Connection between grounding and bonding conductors of two different transformers used as separately derived systems. C: Connection between ungrounded phase conductors of two generators that are operated in parallel and that are connected to a common grounding electrode. D: Connection between ungrounded conductors of two separate transformers. Question 33: Article 100 Definitions. Intersystem Bonding Termination. Question ID#: Question 33: Which of the following is permitted to be terminated on an intersystem bonding termination bar? A: A bonding conductor for corrugated stainless steel tubing (CSST) gas line. B: An equipment grounding conductor for a heat-pump. C: A bonding conductor for the shield of a CATV cable. D: A bonding conductor for copper tubing gas line. Page 18 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

19 Question 34: (B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. Question ID#: Question 34: Which of the following labels would qualify as "permanently affixed to the equipment"? A: A metal sign within sight of the equipment. B: A sign placed in the document holder on the inside of a panelboard door. C: A nameplate attached to the equipment enclosure with rivets. D: A hand-written sign on a peel-and-stick label. Question 35: Article 100 Definitions. Selective Coordination. Question ID#: Question 35: In selectively coordinated system, if a phase-to-ground fault occurs in a circuit that supplies one elevator in a building that has two elevators, which of the following statements is true? A: The overcurrent device that supplies the elevator where the fault occurred and the overcurrent device that protects the switchboard that supplies both elevators will open. B: The overcurrent device that supplies the elevator where the fault occurred will open. C: The overcurrent device that supplies the feeder to a switchboard that supplies both elevators will open. D: Both the overcurrent device that protects the feeder to the switchboard and the main service overcurrent protective device will open. Question 36: Article 100 Definitions. Device. Question ID#: Question 36: Which of the following describes the purpose of a device? A: To carry or control electric energy. B: To use significant amounts of electrical energy for a useful purpose. C: To open a circuit in the event of an overload. D: To open a circuit in the event of arcing fault. Question 37: Article 100 Definitions. Switchgear. Question ID#: Question 37: Which of the following would not be found in switchgear? A: Buses. B: Switching devices. C: Motors. D: Fuses. Question 38: Code Wide. 600 Volts to 1000 Volts. Question ID#: Question 38: What of the following is correct regarding voltage classifications in the 2014 NEC? A: 1000 volts or more. B: 600 volts or more. C: 1000 volts or less. D: Less than 1000 volts. Page 19 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

20 Chapter 2 Question 39: Neutral Conductors. Question ID#: The new text in this section expands on the requirements in section that grounded conductors must be grouped with ungrounded conductors of the same circuit. The difference between and is that section requires the grounded conductor to be grouped with the ungrounded conductors of the same circuit in any enclosure, such as a wireway, gutter or junction box, and applies only to panelboards or where the circuit originates. With multiple circuits, grounded circuit This should be a big help for locating which grounded conductor is associated with which ungrounded conductors of the same circuit in an enclosure other than a panelboard. Wireways can have dozens of circuits, and finding the grounded conductor that is used with a set of ungrounded multi-wire branch circuit conductors was difficult without the grounded and ungrounded conductors being grouped together. conductors of each circuit shall be grouped with the ungrounded circuit conductor. Based on the new Code change to section 200.4, where more than one neutral conductor associated with different circuits is in an enclosure, the grounded circuit conductors of each circuit shall be identified or grouped to correspond with the ungrounded circuit conductor(s) by wire markers, cable ties, or similar means in at least one location within the enclosure. Two exceptions follow that allow for the grounded conductors to remain ungrouped: 1. The requirement for grouping shall not apply if the branch circuit or feeder conductors enter the enclosure from a cable or raceway unique to the circuit that makes the grouping obvious. 2. The requirement for grouping shall not apply if the branch circuit conductors pass through a box or conduit body without a loop as described in (B)(1) or without a splice or termination. Question 39: When must neutral conductors associated with ungrounded conductors be grouped or marked within a junction box? A: When there is more than one neutral conductor associated with different circuits and the correct grouping is not obvious. B: When the box contains only a single cable entry with one neutral conductor and two ungrounded circuit conductors. C: When the box contains only a single raceway entry with one neutral conductor associated with three ungrounded circuit conductors. D: When there are more than two neutral conductors associated with different circuits and the correct grouping is obvious. Page 20 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

21 Question 40: 210.4(D) Multiwire Branch Circuits. Grouping. Question ID#: The general requirement in 210.4(D) about the grouping of grounded and ungrounded conductors in a multiwire branch circuit inside a panelboard is the same in the 2014 NEC as it was in the 2011 NEC. Multiwire circuit conductors are required to be grouped unless the circuit enters the panelboard in a cable or through a raceway that makes grouping obvious. However, in the 2014 NEC, new language was added to the exception that permits the grounded and ungrounded conductors of a multiwire branch circuit to remain ungrouped provided all grounded and ungrounded multiwire circuit conductors are identified at their terminations with numbered wire markers corresponding to the circuit number. Multiwire branch circuits can be identified at their terminations with numbered wire markers. This provides some relief for the problem in crowded panelboards with several rows of raceway entries and finding these wire groupings among the other conductors entering the panelboard, especially following the grounded conductor to its termination at the grounded terminal bus. If the ungrounded and grounded conductors of a multiwire branch circuit all are identified where they are terminated with the same circuit number, it should be easier to identify the conductors of a single multiwire branch circuit. Question 40: Under the revised exception in the 2014 NEC, which of the following is true when using wire markers to identify the grounded or ungrounded conductors of a multiwire branch circuit in a panelboard? A: The wire markers must be placed where the conductors enter the enclosure and at the point of termination on the grounded bus. B: The multiwire branch circuit conductors are not required to be grouped if they are identified with wire-markers where the conductors are terminated. C: The wire marker must be placed at the equipment grounding conductor termination. D: The wire marker must be located nearest the point where the conductors enter the enclosure. Question 41: 210.5(C) Identification for Branch Circuits. Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Question ID#: Ungrounded DC branch circuit conductors over 50 volts must be identified by polarity. DC conductors which are grounded are identified like AC grounded conductors, per Ungrounded DC branch circuit conductors size 4 AWG and larger must be identified at all termination, connection, and splice points by marking tape, tagging, or other approved means. Ungrounded DC branch circuit conductors size 6 AWG and smaller must be identified at all termination, connection, and splice points according to the following requirements: Branch circuit DC ungrounded conductors of No. 6 AWG or smaller need to be identified by polarity. The conductor with positive polarity is identified by: (1) A continuous red outer finish. Page 21 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

22 (2) A continuous red stripe along the entire length of the conductor on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or black. (3) A plus sign (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS marked on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or black, repeated at least every 24 inches. The conductor with negative polarity is identified by: (1) A continuous black outer finish. (2) A continuous black stripe along the entire length of the conductor on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or red. (3) A minus sign (-) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG marked on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or red, repeated at least every 24 inches. The identification method must be documented in a manner that is readily accessible or be permanently posted at each branch circuit panelboard. Question 41: Which of the following types of identification for ungrounded DC circuit conductors operating at more than 50 VDC is a Code Violation? A: A No. 4 AWG conductor with black insulation re-identified with red marking tape used as a positive conductor. B: A No. 6 AWG conductor with black insulation re-identified with red marking tape and used as a positive conductor. C: A No. 6 AWG conductor with black insulation used as a negative conductor. D: A No. 10 AWG conductor with red insulation used as a positive conductor. Question 42: 210.8(A)(7) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Any 125-volt, single-phase, 15 or 20 amp receptacle installed within 6 ft. of the outside edge of a sink in a dwelling unit is now required to have GFCI protection, including in kitchens. For dwellings, the 2011 NEC required GFCI protection for receptacle outlets within 6 ft. of the outside edge of a sink, except in kitchens. The phrase, "located in areas other than kitchens" has been deleted, so now any receptacle outlet within 6 ft. of a sink in a dwelling unit kitchen must be GFCI protected. Under the new rules a receptacle outlet for a food disposer, a refrigerator, or above a range hood will all require GFCI protection if installed within 6 ft. of the outside edge of a sink. There is no mention of how the 6 ft. measurement is to be taken. Receptacle outlets that serve the kitchen countertop have been required to be GFCI protected for a number of years, so the measurement from the outside edge of the sink is not intended to be just horizontal. The intent is to measure the shortest possible route between the outside edge of a sink and a receptacle outlet in any direction, up, down, or sideways. The idea is to provide the added protection that a GFCI can provide if there is a chance a person could be in contact with a live circuit while being wet or having their hands in water. Receptacle outlets installed within 6 ft. of the sink require GFCI protection, even in kitchens. The requirement to have receptacle outlets be GFCI protected if installed within 6 ft. of the outside edge of a sink makes sense because these same type of outlets located in other than dwelling units have been required to be GFCI protected since If there is a shock hazard for receptacles installed within 6 ft. of a sink in a non-dwelling location, then the same hazard exists in dwellings. Page 22 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

23 Question 42: Which of the following dwelling unit receptacles is required to have GFCI protection? A: A 15-amp 125-volt single-phase receptacle located behind a refrigerator, within 6 feet from the outside edge of a wet bar sink. B: A 15-amp 125-volt single-phase receptacle located behind a refrigerator located 7 feet from a wet bar sink. C: A 20-amp 125-volt single-phase receptacle located behind a gas stove located 6.5 feet from the outside edge of a kitchen sink. D: A 50-amp 250-volt single-phase receptacle located behind an oven located 5 feet from a kitchen sink. Question 43: 210.8(A)(9) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Bathtubs or Shower Stalls. Question ID#: By the definition in Article 100, bathrooms are areas that include a basin and one or more toilets, a tub, a shower, a bidet, or similar fixtures. These areas are required to have all 125- volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets protected by a ground-fault circuit-interrupter type device. The problem was there are times when a bathtub or a shower stall may be in an area or separate room where no basin or sink is present and therefore by definition, these areas are not classified as bathrooms. Because they are not bathrooms, no GFCI protection was required for receptacle outlets installed in these areas. Section 210.8(A)(9), now requires that in dwelling units all bathtub and shower stall areas, even without a basin or sink being present, are required to have all 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20- ampere receptacle outlets installed within 6 feet of the outside edge of the bathtub or shower stall protected by a ground-fault circuit-interrupter. GFCI protection is required within 6 ft. of the outside edge of a bathtub or shower stall, even outside of bathrooms. Question 43: Which of the following 125-V, 15 & 20-A receptacle outlets would NOT require GFCI protection at a dwelling unit? A: A receptacle installed 4 feet from a shower stall or tub in a bathroom. B: A receptacle installed outside the bathroom and located in a bedroom 8 ft. away from the tub in the bathroom. C: A receptacle installed outdoors, in a wet location, 7 feet from an outdoor shower stall. D: A receptacle installed in a bathroom next to the sink. Question 44: 210.8(A)(10) Ground-Fault Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Laundry Areas. Question ID#: All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets in dwelling unit laundry areas will now require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection, including the outlet for the washing machine. This new requirement is similar to other requirements for GFCI protection in the NEC when water may be present where electricity is used. The risk of shock is increased when a person may be in contact with water while operating an electric appliance. New requirements in the 2014 NEC require washing machines and dishwashers to be protected by GFCIs. Existing sections that apply to laundry areas in dwelling units are: GFCI protection is now required for receptacle (B): 1500 VA is required to be added to a dwelling unit calculation for the laundry circuit (F): At least one receptacle outlet must be installed for the laundry (A)(7): GFCI protection is required for receptacles that are installed within 6 ft. of the outside edge of the sink. outlets in dwelling unit laundry areas. Page 23 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

24 GFCI receptacles in the laundry area must be readily accessible. Question 44: Which of the following is an area that is NOT required to have all 125-volt, 15- and 20- ampere receptacle outlets protected by a GFCI type device in a residential dwelling? A: Outdoors. B: Family rooms. C: Laundry areas. D: Bathrooms. Question 45: 210.8(B) GFCI Protection for Personnel. Other Than Dwelling Units. Exception No. 1 to (3). Rooftops. Question ID#: A new exception will allow GFCI receptacle outlets that are mounted on rooftops to be considered readily accessible if they are readily accessible while on the rooftop. These receptacles on rooftops shall not be required to be readily accessible except from the rooftop. This means that neither a permanent stairway nor a permanent ladder is required to access a rooftop where receptacles are installed. Once you are on the rooftop, (regardless of the means necessary to get on the rooftop) if no ladder is required to reach that GFCI protected receptacle installed on the rooftop, the installation complies with the requirements of the 2014 NEC. GFCI receptacles on rooftops are considered Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter(s) must be installed in a readily accessible location, whether in the form of a receptacle or a circuit-breaker. The definition of readily accessible includes a statement that equipment must be able to be reached quickly and must be installed so that portable ladders are not necessary. readily accessible if they are readily accessible while on the rooftop. If every rooftop had a permanent ladder installed for access, this Code would never have been in question, but many rooftops are accessible only by someone providing and setting up a portable ladder. This new exception now makes it clear that GFCI receptacle outlets installed on rooftops are to be considered readily accessible if they are readily accessible once you are on the rooftop. Question 45: Which of the following statements about rooftop receptacles on non-dwelling rooftops is true? A: GFCI receptacle outlets cannot be installed on rooftops unless the rooftop is accessible by permanent stairs or a permanent ladder. B: GFCI protection for rooftop receptacle outlets is only permitted to be provided by GFCI circuit breakers. C: A GFCI receptacle outlet can be installed on a rooftop that is accessible by a portable ladder. D: If rooftop receptacles are type WR, they are not required to be GFCI protected. Page 24 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

25 Question 46: 210.8(B)(8) GFCI Protection for Personnel. Other Than Dwelling Units. Garages. Question ID#: Since 1987, ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI) protection has been required in commercial repair garages for 15- and 20-amp single-phase 125-volt receptacles that serve areas where electrical diagnostic equipment, electrical hand tools, or portable lighting equipment are used. This requirement comes from Article 511 and was incorporated into section 210.8(B)(8) for the 2011 NEC. After careful consideration during the 2014 Code cycle, a clarification was made and section 210.8(B)(8) has been revised to require GFCI protection for all 15- and 20amp single-phase 125-volt receptacles located in "garages, service bays, and similar areas other than vehicle exhibition halls and showrooms". GFCI protection is required for all 15- and The previous Code requirements were specific to only certain receptacles in the garage area where diagnostic equipment, electric hand tools and portable lights were used and left other receptacles in a commercial repair garage without GFCI protection. Changing this section from only requiring GFCI protection where diagnostic equipment, electric hand tools or portable lights are used to a more general requirement that covers all 15- and 20-amp, single-phase, 125-volt receptacles located in a commercial garage will ensure that GFCI protection is provided regardless of where the receptacle is located or what it is used for in a commercial repair garage. 20-amp single-phase 125-volt receptacles in garages, service bays, and similar areas. Question 46: Which of the following receptacles does NOT require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection? A: A 20-amp, single-phase, 125-volt receptacle located next to an air compressor in a dwelling unit garage. B: A 20-amp, single-phase, 125-volt receptacle located on the ceiling in a commercial repair garage. C: A 15-amp, single-phase, 125-volt receptacle located next to an air compressor in a commercial repair garage. D: A 20-amp, single-phase, 125-volt receptacle located on the wall of an automobile showroom. Question 47: 210.8(D) GFCI Protection. Kitchen Dishwasher Branch Circuit. Question ID#: A new item (D) has been added to 210.8, Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel. The new section is (D) Kitchen Dishwasher Branch Circuit. In dwelling units, kitchen dishwasher outlets will now be required to have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection. The number of deaths from electrocution has dropped significantly since the introduction of GFCIs. For this reason, with each Code cycle, the types and number of outlets that require GFCI protection have increased. Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection will de-energize an outlet when a ground-fault current of 6mA or more is detected. Low levels of electrical current can be fatal in ranges well below 1 amp. For the dishwasher outlet in a dwelling unit, protection can be provided by a GFCI circuit breaker or a GFCI receptacle. If a GFCI receptacle is installed under the counter top adjacent to the dishwasher in the open space under a sink, it can be accessed without having to move the dishwasher or to use tools. GFCI devices must be readily accessible, per 210.8, and a GFCI receptacle for the dishwasher installed under the sink is considered readily accessible. GFCI protection is now required for outlets that supply dishwashers in dwelling units. GFCI protection for the dishwasher makes sense because when an appliance uses electricity and water, the shock hazard is increased. Also, the newer electronically controlled dishwashers pose a greater risk of shock as they age. Page 25 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

26 Question 47: Which of the following is a true statement? A: A 125-volt, 30 amp dishwasher in a drive-thru coffee stand is required to have GFCI protection. B: A 125-volt, 15 amp, dishwasher in an apartment is required to have GFCI protection. C: A 208-volt, 30 amp dishwasher in a restaurant is required to have GFCI protection. D: A 240-volt, 20 amp dishwasher in a hotel kitchen is required to have GFCI protection. Question 48: (A) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter protection is now required in the kitchen and laundry areas, in addition to family rooms, dining rooms, living rooms, parlors, libraries, dens, bedrooms, sunrooms, recreation rooms, closets, hallways or similar rooms or areas. Basically the only areas in a dwelling unit that do not require AFCI protection are the bathrooms, garage, crawl space, attic, and outdoors. AFCI protection is also now required for all 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits supplying outlets installed in dormitory unit bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets, and similar rooms. Both types of arc-fault circuit-interrupters, the circuit breaker type arc-fault circuitinterrupter and the outlet branch circuit receptacle type arc-fault circuit-interrupter must be readily accessible. That was not a problem when the circuit breaker type of AFCI was the only type of arc-fault protection available. The outlet branch circuit receptacle type of AFCI that is on the market now must be installed in a readily accessible location so the resident of the dwelling can test the outlet on a regular basis, as is required by the manufacturer's instructions. AFCI protection is now required in dwelling unit kitchen and laundry areas. In the rooms and areas that require AFCI protection, devices and outlets must be protected. A device is a part of an electrical system, like a light switch, that carries or controls electric energy. An outlet, like a receptacle, is used to supply utilization equipment. In the 2014 edition of the NEC, a light switch in a bedroom that controls an outside light will require AFCI protection. Question 48: Which statement about Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter protection is true? A: A receptacle type AFCI can be installed behind an appliance that is fastened in place. B: AFCI protection is required in dwelling unit garages. C: In a dwelling, a washing machine outlet installed in a laundry must have AFCI protection. D: AFCI protection is required in bathrooms. Page 26 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

27 Question 49: (A)(1)-(6) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: In the 2011 National Electrical Code, there were 3 ways to provide arc-fault circuit-interrupter protection: - Install a listed combination-type AFCI circuit breaker. - Install an outlet branch circuit type AFCI receptacle as the first outlet on the branch circuit. The wiring between the circuit breaker and the first outlet is required to be installed in RMC, IMC, EMT, Type MC, or steel armored Type AC cable, and the outlet and junction boxes have to be metal. - Install an outlet branch circuit type AFCI receptacle as the first outlet on the branch circuit with the conduit or tubing between the circuit breaker and the first outlet encased in not less than 2 inches of concrete. In the 2014 NEC, those 3 methods are still permitted, and there are 3 more new ways to provide arc-fault circuit-interrupter protection. There are 3 new ways to provide arc-fault circuit-interrupter protection in required areas such as bedrooms, living rooms family rooms, and dining rooms. - Install a listed branch/feeder type AFCI circuit breaker and a listed outlet type branch circuit AFCI receptacle as the first outlet on the circuit. The first outlet box must be marked to show it is the first outlet on the circuit. - Install a listed supplemental arc protection circuit breaker with a listed outlet branch circuit type AFCI receptacle as the first outlet on the circuit if all of the following conditions are met: - The branch circuit must be continuous from the circuit breaker to the outlet branch circuit arc-fault circuit interrupter. - The maximum length of the branch circuit wiring from the circuit breaker to the outlet branch circuit arc-fault receptacle is not greater than 50 ft. for a No. 14 AWG or 70 ft. for a No. 12 AWG conductor. - The first outlet box in the branch circuit shall be marked to indicate that it is the first outlet of the circuit. - Install a listed outlet branch circuit type arc-fault circuit interrupter as the first outlet on the branch circuit in combination with a listed branch-circuit overcurrent protective device if all the following conditions are met: - The branch circuit must be continuous from the circuit breaker to the outlet branch circuit arc-fault circuit interrupter. - The maximum length of the branch circuit wiring from the circuit breaker to the outlet branch circuit arc-fault receptacle is not greater than 50 ft. for a No. 14 AWG or 70 ft. for a No. 12 AWG conductor. - The first outlet box in the branch circuit shall be marked to indicate that it is the first outlet of the circuit. - The combination of the branch circuit overcurrent device and the outlet branch circuit AFCI is identified as meeting the requirements for a "System Combination" type AFCI and is listed as such. The outlet branch circuit type arc-fault circuit-interrupter receptacle is currently available on the market. The supplemental arc protection circuit breakers and a "System Combination" type AFCI are not yet available as of January 1, Question 49: A listed supplemental arc protection circuit breaker is installed at the origin of the branch circuit and a listed outlet branch-circuit type arc-fault circuit interrupter is installed at the first outlet box on the branch circuit. If No. 14 AWG conductors are used for the branch circuit, what is the maximum distance between the branch-circuit overcurrent device and the first outlet? A: 70 feet. Page 27 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

28 B: 60 feet. C: 50 feet. D: 40 feet. Question 50: (B) Exception. Branch Circuit Extensions or Modifications - Dwelling Units. Question ID#: In living rooms, bedrooms, family rooms, kitchens or any of the areas of a dwelling unit where AFCI protection is required, if the branch-circuit wiring is replaced, extended, or modified, the branch-circuit must be brought up to Code and arc-fault circuit-interrupter protection provided. A new exception says that if the branch-circuit is not extended more than 6 feet, and does not include any additional outlets or devices, AFCI protection is not required. In many cases when a dwelling branch-circuit is extended or modified, it is to add a new receptacle outlet. In these cases, AFCI protection is required to be provided because an additional outlet or device has been added. This exception was added to cover cases where the dwelling unit panelboard is replaced or upgraded, and the original branch-circuit wiring has to be extended to reach the new location. The Code panels felt 6 ft. was a long enough distance to cover this type of circuit modification. AFCI protection is not required for an extension not more than 6 ft. with no additional outlets or devices. Question 50: Which of the following installations will require AFCI protection? A: A 7 foot extension of an existing branch circuit located in a bathroom to add an additional receptacle in the bathroom. B: A 7 foot extension of an existing branch circuit serving an unfinished attic to add a new receptacle in the attic. C: A 5 foot extension of an existing branch circuit in order to terminate the circuit in a replacement panelboard that was re-located. D: A 7 foot extension of an existing branch circuit to add a new receptacle in a family room. Question 51: (C) Dormitory Units. Question ID#: Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter protection is now required for all 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits supplying outlets installed in dormitory unit bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets and similar rooms. Dormitories are considered dwelling units and this section extends the same requirements for AFCI protection in one- and two-family dwellings and multi-family dwellings to dormitories. A dwelling unit provides permanent provisions for living, sleeping, cooking and sanitation. However, even a dormitory unit that does not have permanent provisions for cooking will require AFCI protection for 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits in bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets, and similar rooms. Between 2007 and 2011 there was an annual average of 3,810 structure fires in dormitories, fraternities, sororities, and barracks. These fires caused several fatalities a year, multiple injuries and millions of dollars in property damage. Most of the fires were caused by cooking and heating equipment, but a significant percentage were caused by electrical distribution and lighting equipment. AFCI protection is now required in dormitory unit bedrooms, living rooms, hallways, closets, and similar rooms. Arc-fault circuit-interrupters provide protection for branch circuit wiring against series and parallel faults that may be caused by damage to the branch circuit wiring. Page 28 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

29 Question 51: In a college dormitory, which of the following locations requires AFCI protection? A: A common dining room where all the residents eat. B: A common reception room at the building entrance. C: A sleeping room in an individual dormitory unit. D: A common kitchen shared by residents that is not part of a specific dorm room. Question 52: Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Question ID#: For many years the Code has required a feeder or service disconnect rated 1000 amps or more and installed on solidly grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase, to be provided with ground-fault protection of equipment (GFPE). Until now this requirement has never been applied to branch circuits. The voltage to ground in a 277/480 volt wye connected three phase system is 277 volts. The voltage to ground in a 120/208 volt wye connected three phase system is 120 volts. GFPE is intended to provide protection of equipment and should not be confused with GFCI which is intended to provide protection for personnel. Disconnects equipped with GFPE have ground-fault relays that offer protection for equipment from the effects of low level ground faults. The size of ground-fault current depends on the method of system grounding. The NEC requires GFPE for solidly grounded systems since these systems are more prone to high levels of ground-fault currents. According to Article 100, ground-fault protection of equipment is provided at current levels less than the levels of fault current required to protect conductors from damage by the operation of a supply circuit overcurrent device. Branch-circuit disconnects rated 1000 amps or more and installed on solidly grounded wye electrical systems of more than 150 volts to ground require GFPE. Section is new in the 2014 Code and provides similar language to that found in and Although not common, it is possible that a 480 volt branch circuit could be protected by a 1000 amp or larger overcurrent device and supply power directly to a single piece of utilization equipment. This type of installation would meet the definition in Article 100 of a branch circuit, rather than a feeder, and therefore would not be subject to the requirements found in or Under the provisions of the 2011 NEC, this type of installation would not require Ground Fault Protection for Equipment. In the 2014 NEC this branch circuit would require GFPE. Along with the new Code section come two exceptions that are similar to the language found in the two exceptions that follow section Question 52: Which of the following installations will require ground-fault protection of equipment? A: A service disconnect rated 2000 amps installed on a 120/208-volt solidly grounded wye electrical system. B: A branch-circuit disconnect rated 1200 amps installed on a 120/208-volt solidly grounded wye electrical system. C: A branch-circuit disconnect rated 1000 amps installed on a 277/480-volt solidly grounded wye electrical system. D: A feeder disconnect rated 800 amps installed on a 277/480-volt solidly grounded wye electrical system. Page 29 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

30 Question 53: Electric Vehicle Charging Circuit. Question ID#: A new section , Electric Vehicle Branch Circuit, provides that outlet(s) installed for the purpose of charging electric vehicles shall be supplied by a separate branch circuit. This circuit shall have no other outlets. Section defines Electric Vehicle as an automotive-type vehicle for on-road use, such as passenger automobiles, buses, trucks, vans, neighborhood electric vehicles, electric motorcycles and the like, primarily powered by an electric motor that draws current from a rechargeable storage battery, fuel cell, photovoltaic array, or other source of electric current. Plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEV) are considered electric vehicles. For the purpose of this article, off-road, self-propelled electric vehicles, such as industrial trucks, hoists, lifts, transports, golf carts, airline ground support equipment, tractors, boats, and the like are not included. Outlets installed for charging electric vehicles shall be supplied by a separate electric vehicle branch circuit. The dedicated branch circuit is to be rated for the anticipated load. If additional loads are permitted on the circuit, the overcurrent device could trip in response to an overload or ground fault, leaving the electric vehicle battery uncharged. Level 1 electric vehicle chargers operate at 125 volts and can be connected to a 20 amp circuit. Level 1 electric vehicle chargers can take more than 14 hours to fully charge a car battery. Level 2 electric vehicle chargers operate at 240 volts and are connected to 30 or 40 amp circuits. A level 2 charger can charge a car battery in half the time of a Level 1 charger. In designing an electric vehicle charging outlet and branch circuit, it is important to determine whether the intended equipment falls within the definition of Electric Vehicle. For example, a golf cart is not considered an electric vehicle. Note that this new Code requirement is found in NEC Chapter Two, Wiring and Protection, not in Chapter Six, Special Equipment. Question 53: How many different types of loads, other than electric vehicle chargers, are permitted on the electric vehicle charging circuit? A: Two B: Three C: one D: zero Question 54: (A)(1) Conductors - Minimum Ampacity and Size. Branch Circuits Not More than 600 Volts. General. Question ID#: Question: What is the correct way to calculate the size of a conductor that carries a continuous load and is installed with more than 3 current-carrying conductors in conduit or in an ambient temperature hotter than 86Â F? Answer: Using Table (B)(16), compare the conductor size needed to serve the continuous load with the size of the conductor needed to allow for any adjustment or correction factors, and select the larger of the two conductors. The new code change in (A)(1) now makes it clear that when we select a conductor size to supply a load, we may "double derate" the ampacity of the conductor when there are more than 3 conductors in conduit, and the ambient temperature is other than 86Â F, but when the load is continuous and these conditions exist, we never "triple derate" and factor in another 125% for the continuous load on top of the other two correction factors. Page 30 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

31 We simply must choose a conductor based on the larger of: - 125% of the continuous load, OR - 100% of the maximum load (not 125% of it) multiplied by the correction factors based on conditions of use. For example: What size THWN cu. conductor is needed to supply a 100-amp continuous load when there are 7 current-carrying conductors in conduit? Step amp continuous load X 125% = 125 amps Conductor size = No. 1 THWN cu. (Good for 130 amps) Step 2 7 current-carrying conductors = 70% adjustment (from table (B)(3)(a)) 1/0 THWN cu. 150 amps x.70 = 105 amps (ok for the 100 amp load) Step 3 Select the larger of the two conductors. 1/0 THWN cu. It is not necessary to add both the continuous load (125 amps) and the adjustment factor for the 7 conductors in conduit (125 amps Ã.70 = 179 amps). Doing so would require a 3/0 THWN cu. conductor which is not code required. Question 54: What is the minimum size THWN cu. conductor required to supply a 50-amp continuous load with 7 current-carrying conductors in conduit (75Â C terminals)? A: No. 3 THWN cu. B: No. 6 THWN cu. C: No. 4 THWN cu. D: No. 8 THWN cu. Question 55: Required Outlets. General. Question ID#: A new informational note has been added to section that refers users to new Informative Annex J, ADA Standards for Accessible Design. ADA is the Americans with Disabilities Act. Informational notes contain explanatory information, are not written in mandatory language and do not contain requirements, interpretations, or recommendations. Annex J can be used as a reference by electrical installers when locating receptacle outlets in buildings that are required to be Accessible by the Standards for Accessible Design. A new Annex J contains information on ADA accessibility and recommendations. Obstructed High Forward Reach measurements shown Annex J provides illustrations and Code references that come directly from ANSI/ICC A Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. above. The information contained in Annex J is general in nature and helps the user to understand reach range limitations based on front or side approach from those using wheelchairs as well as possible obstructions and how they affect those with physical disabilities. This information is helpful when considering where to locate receptacles, switches, or panelboards, especially when obstructions are present. Some jurisdictions do not adopt the ANSI standard referenced in Annex J and may have their own provisions that outline any special height requirements for electrical receptacles and switches as well as location or height of electrical panelboards and operable parts installed for those that are physically impaired. Page 31 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

32 Question 55: Which of the following locations in the NEC provides information useful to those installing receptacles in a building where ADA accessibility needs to be taken into consideration? A: Annex C. B: Annex B. C: Annex D. D: Annex J. Question 56: (E)(1) Outdoor Dwelling Unit Receptacles. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC, the outdoor outlets that are required at the front and back of one-family dwellings, and each unit of a two-family dwelling that is at grade level, were required to be accessible while standing at grade level. The 2014 NEC has deleted the phrase "while standing at grade level" and now requires the outdoor receptacle to be readily accessible from grade. According to the definition of readily accessible in Article 100, if a person can access a receptacle located on a deck without removing obstacles or using a portable ladder the receptacle is considered to be readily accessible. Permanent stairs from grade level to deck provides ready access to a receptacle located anywhere on the deck. If the receptacle is not more than 6 1/2 feet above grade level it is permitted to be counted as one of the required outdoor receptacles required for dwellings. The required outdoor receptacle outlet must be The purpose of the change is to permit a receptacle on an outdoor deck, porch or balcony to serve as one of the required outdoor receptacles, even if the receptacle is not accessible from grade. For instance, a receptacle outlet installed in the middle of a deck that could not be reached while standing at grade level but is still readily accessible from grade by walking up onto the deck (and not more than 6.5 feet above grade level) is now permitted to be counted as one of the two required outdoor outlets at dwellings. installed at a readily accessible location not more than 6.5 feet above grade level. A receptacle outlet installed anywhere on a deck, so that the receptacle is located not more than 6 1/2 ft. above grade, will serve a double purpose. It can be counted as one of the required outdoor outlets at dwellings in (E)(1), and the required receptacle outlet for a balcony, deck or porch in (E)(3). Question 56: If a receptacle outlet is installed on an outdoor deck, when can it be counted as one of the required outdoor receptacle outlets at a one-family dwelling? A: Only when it is accessible while standing at grade level, 6.5 feet above grade level. B: When the receptacle is installed serving the deck, is not more than 6.5 feet above grade level, and the deck can be accessed by permanent stairs which extend from grade level to the deck. C: When it is installed at the edge of the deck, 7.5 feet above grade level. D: When it can be reached after climbing a ladder from grade level. Page 32 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

33 Question 57: (E)(3) Balconies, Decks, and Porches. Question ID#: There are two important changes to this section that require a receptacle outlet at a balcony, porch, or deck. (1) The balcony, deck, or porch must be attached to the dwelling, as well as accessible from inside the dwelling unit. In the 2011 NEC there was not a requirement that the balcony, deck, or porch be attached to the dwelling. (2) The required receptacle outlet no longer has to be "within the perimeter" of the balcony, deck, or porch. As long as the receptacle outlet is accessible from the balcony, deck, or porch it will count as the required receptacle outlet. The outlet must be located no more than 6 1/2 ft. above the balcony, deck, or porch walking surface. The fact that the receptacle outlet no longer has to be within the perimeter of the balcony, deck, or porch will make it easier to install the outlet. Especially for smaller spaces, often there is literally no place to locate the outlet. A sliding glass door can take up the entire opening into the dwelling, leaving no practical way to install an outlet within the perimeter of the balcony. The required receptacle outlet no longer has to be within the perimeter of the balcony, deck, or porch as long as it is accessible. Also, the added flexibility of being able to install the required outlet outside of the footprint of the balcony, deck, or porch, will make it easier to have a single outlet satisfy the requirement for an outdoor outlet at the front and back of one- and two-family dwelling units, as well as the requirement for a receptacle outlet at the balcony, deck, or porch. Question 57: Which of the following statements about the required receptacle outlet at a balcony, deck, or porch is true? A: A deck that is not attached to the dwelling is required to have at least one receptacle outlet. B: A receptacle outlet that is installed directly outside of a balcony railing is still counted as the required receptacle outlet. C: A receptacle outlet can be installed 7 ft. above the walking surface of a deck. D: A receptacle outlet must be installed within the perimeter of the porch. Question 58: (G) Receptacle Outlets. Basements, Garages, and Accessory Buildings. Question ID#: Two important changes have been made to this section on garages. In each attached garage and in each detached garage with electric power: (1) At least one receptacle outlet must be installed for each car space and (2) The branch circuit supplying the garage receptacle outlets cannot supply other outlets outside the garage. Some garages may have workshops or garage door openers that require additional outlets. The requirement for a receptacle outlet for each car space is in addition to any receptacles required for specific equipment that might be present in a garage. Also, with electric and hybrid electric vehicles becoming more popular, there is an increased need for electric charging units. Even though electrical vehicle charging units are covered in Article 625, there are smaller charging units with maximum continuous loads of 12 amperes that operate at 120 volts. With at least two receptacle outlets in a two car garage, there will be less need to use extension cords which can be damaged and pose a shock hazard. In one-family dwellings, a receptacle outlet is required for each car space. The requirement for dwelling unit garage branch circuit to have no other outlets outside the garage will add another required branch circuit. Outdoor outlets will no longer be able to be included on a garage branch circuit. This new garage branch circuit may require that the design and layout of dwelling unit circuits be changed (G)(2) and (3) still require accessory buildings with electric power and any portion of an unfinished basement area to have a minimum of one receptacle outlet installed. Receptacle outlets installed in these areas do not require any dedicated circuitry and can be installed on a branch circuit that serves other receptacle outlets. Page 33 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

34 Question 58: What is the MINIMUM number of receptacle outlets required for a three car garage in a one-family dwelling? A: 2. B: 4. C: 3. D: 1. Question 59: (I) Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets - Foyers. Question ID#: The change to this section should help to more clearly define the wall space in a foyer. There has been no change to the requirement that a receptacle outlet is required for wall spaces at least 3 ft. or more in width in a dwelling unit foyer that has an area greater than 60 ft.2. Doorways in a foyer are not counted as wall space. In the 2011 NEC, floor-to-ceiling windows were also not counted as wall space. The confusion was about door-side windows that are part of the door assembly but didn't extend all the way to the ceiling. Some inspectors said the door-side windows still had to be counted as wall space because they did not extend all the way to the ceiling. Many custom entry doors have sidelights that extend the vertical length of a door but not from floor-to-ceiling. If an inspector was to literally interpret the text of the article, and a window did not extend from the floor to the ceiling, then an outlet would be required above the window. This is not practical and creates a conflict with the fact that perimeter receptacle outlets must not be installed more than 5 1/2 feet above the floor. Doorways in foyers are not counted as wall space; neither are door-side windows and similar openings. The new language in section (I) says: Doorways, door-side windows that extend to the floor, and similar openings shall not be considered wall space. Question 59: How many receptacle outlets are required in a foyer that has an area greater than 60 sq. ft. and has a 4 foot wall space on each side of the front door and two 2 foot wall spaces opposite the door? A: 4 receptacle outlets. B: 1 receptacle outlet. C: 3 receptacle outlets. D: 2 receptacle outlets. Page 34 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

35 Question 60: Electrical Service Areas. Question ID#: A new section , Electrical Service Areas, now requires a 125-volt, single phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet to be installed within 50 ft. of the electrical service equipment. At least one 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be installed within 50 ft. of the electrical service equipment. An exception allows the receptacle outlet at the electrical service area to be omitted at one- and two-family dwellings. For the same reason that a receptacle outlet is required within 25 ft. of HVAC equipment, a receptacle outlet is now required within 50 ft. of the electrical service equipment. Technicians and maintenance personnel need a place to connect their testing and servicing equipment without running extension cords through door-ways or throughout the building. Other than in one- and two-family dwellings, a receptacle outlet shall be installed within 50 ft. of electrical service equipment. Power quality companies need to connect data acquisition equipment at the service equipment to monitor the performance of the electrical system and may have to leave their equipment connected for a day or longer. Using an extension cord for the monitoring equipment is even more dangerous if left unattended. The 15- or 20-ampere rated receptacle outlet must be installed in the "electrical service area," whether that is indoors or outdoors. If outdoors, the receptacle must be weather- resistant and the enclosure suitable for a wet location. Question 60: Which of the following receptacle outlets complies with the minimum requirements for receptacles installed in the electrical service area? A: A B: A C: A unit. D: A 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere outlet installed 40 ft. from the electrical service area in a multifamily dwelling. 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere outlet installed 55 ft. from the electrical service area in a multifamily dwelling. 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere outlet installed 45 ft. from the electrical service area in a two family dwelling 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere outlet installed 25 ft. from the electrical service area in a one-family dwelling. Question 61: 215.2(A)(1) Minimum Rating and Size. Feeders Not More Than 600 Volts. Question ID#: This Code change for feeders, like the one for branch circuits in (A)(1), clears up how to determine the correct size conductor when the load on the feeder is (1) continuous and (2) there are more than 3 current-carrying conductors in a raceway or the ambient temperature is above 86Â F. The conductor size for a feeder is determined by comparing the size needed to supply the continuous load with the size needed because of the "conditions of use" (more than 3 current carrying conductors or an ambient temperature above 86Â F), and selecting the larger of the two conductors. Conductors will be sized to carry not less than the larger of 215.2(A)(1)(a) or (b). For example: What size THWN cu. conductor is needed to supply a 200 amp continuous load when there are 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit? Step amp continuous load x 125% = 250 amps (125% from 215.2(A)(1)(a)) Conductor size = 250 kcmil cu. chosen from Table (B)(16). Step 2 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit = 80% adjustment (from Table (B)(3)(a)) 250 kcmil cu. = 255 amps. 255 amps x 80% = 204 amps. The 250 kcmil Page 35 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

36 conductor can carry the 200 amp load after being derated. Step 3 Select the larger of the two conductors Both calculations result in a 250 kcmil, THWN cu. conductor chosen from Table (B)(16) A calculation that added the continuous load (250 amps) and the adjustment factor for 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit (250 amps /.8 = amps) would require a 400 kcmil, THWN cu. conductor which is larger than necessary. Question 61: Assuming 75Â terminals are used, what minimum size THWN cu. conductor is needed to supply a 75 amp continuous load when there are 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit? A: No. 3 THWN cu. B: No. 2 THWN cu. C: No. 1 THWN cu. D: No. 4 THWN cu. Question 62: (C)(2) Identification for Feeders. Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Feeders Supplied from Direct-Current Systems. Question ID#: Ungrounded DC feeder conductors are identified in the same manner as DC branch circuit conductors. Ungrounded DC feeder conductors over 50 volts must be identified by polarity. DC conductors which are grounded are identified like AC grounded conductors, per Ungrounded DC feeder conductors size 4 AWG and larger must be identified at all termination, connection, and splice points by marking tape, tagging, or other approved means. Feeder DC ungrounded conductors of No. 6 AWG or smaller need to be identified by polarity. Ungrounded DC feeder conductors size 6 AWG and smaller must be identified at all termination, connection, and splice points according to the following requirements: The conductor with positive polarity is identified by: (1) A continuous red outer finish. (2) A continuous red stripe along the entire length of the conductor on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or black. (3) A plus sign (+) or the word POSITIVE or POS marked on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or black, repeated at least every 24 inches. The conductor with negative polarity is identified by: (1) A continuous black outer finish. (2) A continuous black stripe along the entire length of the conductor on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or red. (3) A minus sign (-) or the word NEGATIVE or NEG marked on insulation which is not green, white, gray, or red, repeated at least every 24 inches. The identification method must be documented in a manner that is readily available or be permanently posted at each feeder panelboard. Page 36 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

37 Question 62: If a feeder conductor with black insulation is used as a "positive" conductor to carry 80 volts DC, which of the following must apply so that it could be re-identified with red tape? A: It must be No. 4 AWG or larger. B: It must be larger than No. 4 AWG. C: It must not be larger than No. 4 AWG. D: It cannot be re-identified with red tape. Question 63: Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies. Exception. Question ID#: A new Exception to Section , Lighting Loads for Specified Occupancies, provides that: Where the building is designed and constructed to comply with an energy code adopted by the local authority, the lighting load shall be permitted to be calculated at the values specified in the energy code where the following conditions are met: - A power monitoring system is installed that will provide continuous information regarding the total general lighting load of the building. - The power monitoring system will be set with alarm values to alert the building owner or manager if the lighting load exceeds the values set by the energy code. - The demand factors specified in are not applied to the general lighting load. Where permitted and under specific conditions, the lighting load can be calculated at the values specified in the local energy code. Table lists the required unit load in volt-amperes per sq. ft. to be used to calculate the general lighting load by occupancy. From the Table, schools require the general lighting load to be calculated at 3 VA per sq. ft., office buildings at 3.5 VA per sq. ft., and auditoriums at 1 VA per sq. ft. Buildings that are designed and built to meet local energy codes are more energy efficient than buildings that do not meet energy codes. The new exception to takes into account that the unit loads per sq. ft. for general lighting may be too high if the building has been designed and built to meet energy codes. Using the new exception, the general lighting load for a new building can be calculated according to the local energy code, and not Table A power monitoring system must be installed to constantly monitor the electric usage in the building and sound an alarm if the power demand exceeds set points. Also, the demand factors found in Table cannot be used to calculate the general lighting load for the building. Question 63: When can the exception to Section be used? A: When the building has been built according to a local energy code. B: When it is requested by the local electrical inspector. C: When the facility is staffed with qualified persons. D: When the building is part of an educational campus. Page 37 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

38 Question 64: Wiring on Buildings (Or Other Structures). Question ID#: Many times wiring is installed on structures other than buildings, such as walls, poles, towers, or tanks that are not by definition "buildings". The phrase "or other structures" has been added in many locations in the NEC when "wiring on buildings" is discussed. Also, with DC system voltages such as those used with larger solar photovoltaic arrays and wind generation systems now having output voltages above 600 volts, the voltage threshold limit has been increased from 600 volts to 1,000 volts. As per , the approved outside wiring methods on buildings or other surfaces for circuits not over 1,000 volts are allowed to be installed as open wiring on insulators, multiconductor cable, MC cable, Type UF cable, MI cable, messenger-supported wiring, rigid metal conduit (RMC), intermediate metal conduit (IMC), rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC), cable trays, cablebus, wireways, auxiliary gutters, electrical metallic tubing (EMT), flexible metal conduit (FMC), liquidtight flexible metal conduit LFMC), liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC), and in busways. The abbreviations for wiring methods, RMC, IMC, EMT, FMC, LFMC and LFNC have been added requirements for wiring on buildings have been expanded to other structures including towers and poles. Question 64: Which of the following wiring methods is NOT approved for wiring on the outside of a building or other structure? A: Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable (NMC). B: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC). C: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). D: Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). Question 65: Buildings or Other Structures Supplied By a Feeder or Branch Circuit. Type. Question ID#: Two important changes have been made to this section about the disconnecting means for buildings supplied by an outside branch circuit or feeder. - 3-way and 4-way switches are no longer permitted as the disconnecting means for garages and outbuildings on residential property. - The disconnecting means is no longer required to be suitable for use as service equipment (except for older installations where a 3-wire feeder instead of a 4-wire feeder supplies an outbuilding). Three-way and four-way switches do not provide an actual way to disconnect power from a building, and the exception that permitted it was deleted in and The disconnecting means for a building supplied by an outside branch circuit or feeder is required to disconnect all the ungrounded conductors that feed or pass through the building, and can be one of the following: Appropriate disconnecting means include a circuit breaker, molded case switch, general-use - Circuit breaker - Molded case switch - General use switch - Snap switch - Other approved means switch, or snap switch. The disconnecting means is no longer required to be suitable for use as service equipment unless it is installed according to the first exception in section (B). Exception No. 1 to (B) provides for situations where previous Code editions Page 38 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

39 allowed the practice of supplying a building by a feeder or branch circuit that had no equipment ground. The grounded conductor run with the supply conductors would then be used as a ground-fault return path by connecting it to the grounded neutral bar. The grounded neutral bar is bonded to the remote building's disconnect enclosure. In this case, the disconnecting means must be suitable for use as service equipment. Under normal circumstances, when the exceptions in section (B) are not used, there is no need for a branch circuit or feeder disconnect to be suitable for use as service equipment. Equipment that is listed as "suitable for use as service equipment", undergoes different testing and has different construction characteristics than general use switches or other similar devices that are perfectly capable of disconnecting branch circuit or feeder conductors that are protected by an upstream overcurrent device. Question 65: Which of the following is NOT permitted to be used to disconnect a single phase, 120/240-volt, 20-amp branch circuit that supplies power to a new residential outbuilding? A: A circuit breaker. B: A molded case switch. C: A general use switch. D: A cord-and-plug connection. Question 66: (A) Disconnecting Means. Location. Question ID#: There are now three options for locating the disconnecting means for outside feeders and branch circuits rated over 1000 volts. The same options existed for services rated over 1000 volts in the 2011 NEC. The disconnecting means for outside feeders and branch circuits rated over 1000 volts can be installed: - Inside or outside of the building or structure served or where the conductors pass through the building or structure at a readily accessible location nearest the point of entrance of the conductors. - If not readily accessible, the disconnecting means can be operable by mechanical linkage from a readily accessible point. - For multibuilding industrial installations under single management, the disconnecting means can be electrically operated by a readily accessible, remote-control device in a separate building or structure. The disconnecting means can be operable by mechanical linkage from a readily accessible point. What is common to all three methods for disconnecting outside feeders and branch circuits rated over 1000 volts is that the disconnecting means must be readily accessible. Whether the disconnect is manually operated from a switch, is located out of reach but operated by a mechanical linkage, or located in an industrial location and operated by a remote-control device, the disconnecting means must be readily accessible. Readily accessible means the disconnect can be reached quickly without climbing over or removing obstacles, or using portable ladders or tools. With high voltage feeders and branch circuits rated over 1000 volts, it is critical to provide extra protection for energized circuits. Allowing the disconnecting means to be operated remotely or by a mechanical linkage keeps the physical disconnect out of reach but quickly accessible if the need arises. Page 39 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

40 Question 66: When can the disconnecting means for a 12,470-volt outside feeder be located 15 feet above grade on the wall of a building? A: When it is equipped with mechanical linkage to operate the disconnect switch that extends down to a readily accessible location. B: When it is located in an industrial building under single management. C: When it is equipped with mechanical linkage to operate the disconnect switch that is also located 15 feet above grade. D: When it is located in a commercial building and operable by remote control. Question 67: Inspections and Tests. Question ID#: Outside branch circuits and feeders that operate at voltages over 1000 volts must be performance tested before being put in service. For installations over 1000 volts, most electricians that are responsible for the initial equipment installation do not take part in adjusting circuit breaker settings in order to correlate with a protective device study or perform current injection tests as required by this section. These types of tests are usually conducted by a third party firm or the electrical equipment manufacturer in accordance with the coordination study based on the design of the system. The changes to this section provide clarifications that make it more general in nature and easier to apply. The revisions make it clear that the complete electrical system design, including settings for protective, switching, and control circuits, must be prepared in advance and made available on request to the authority having jurisdiction, and shall be performance tested when first installed on-site. Requiring the complete electrical system design to be prepared in advance and made available upon request from the authority having jurisdiction provides an opportunity for the AHJ to review the design and request corrections or revisions if so desired. Distribution systems over 1000 volts must be tested before being energized. Question 67: Which of the following items are required to undergo pre-energization tests after the initial installation is complete? A: A direct current photovoltaic system that has a maximum rating of 1000 volts. B: A 277/480-volt, 225-amp panelboard that has circuit breakers controlling normal area illumination in a hospital. C: An 800-amp, 480-volt switchboard that has a maximum voltage rating of 1000 volts. D: A 4160-volt, 2000-amp electrical switchboard that contains switching and control circuits. Question 68: Substations (Deleted). Question ID#: The section on substations operating at over 1000 volts has been moved from to Article 490, which deals with equipment over 1000 volts, is a more appropriate location for substations, since they can be located inside or outside, and Article 225 is relevant to branch circuits and feeders located outside only. Most electrical substations are owned and operated by the serving utility company. According to Section 90.2(B), installations under the exclusive control of an electric utility are not within the scope of the NEC. There are, however, many large industrial buildings and facilities that contain indoor or outdoor substations that are on private property and therefore do fall within the requirements of the NEC. The requirements for substations in have been moved to Many of the user-owned substations are installed to supply electric power within a certain voltage or frequency range, providing electrical energy at the lowest cost to large industrial facilities, contributing to an electrical design that creates the shortest possible fault duration, and providing for optimum energy usage and efficiency for a specific client. The NEC requires posting of permanent, legible signs warning of electrical hazards present at these user-owned substations. Page 40 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

41 NEC section requires documentation regarding substation design, to be available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Question 68: Which of the following statements about substations is true? A: In the 2014 NEC information about substations is located in Article 225. B: Requirements for substations installed outdoors are located in Article 225. Regulations for substations installed indoors are located in Article 490. C: The Authority Having Jurisdiction can request a set of substation design drawings. D: The National Electrical Code provides guidelines for the design of substations owned by the utility company. Question 69: Service Masts as Supports. Question ID#: This section has been reorganized and two new requirements have been added. (1) Hubs that are used with service masts must be identified for use with service-entrance equipment. (2) Overhead service conductors cannot be attached to the service mast between the weatherhead and a coupling in the conduit that is above the last point of support to the building. In the 2011 NEC, section required all raceway fittings used for a service mast to be identified for use with service masts. This language has been removed since rigid metal conduit and associated fittings are commonly used as service masts and provide adequate support but are not identified for use with service masts. Now, only hubs that are intended for use with a service mast are required to be identified for use with service-entrance equipment. Hubs intended for use with a conduit that serves as a service mast shall be identified for use with service-entrance equipment (B) is new and provides rules for the proper attachment of overhead service conductors. The new subsection requires that service-drop or overhead service conductors shall not be attached to a service mast between a weatherhead and a coupling in the service mast, where the coupling is located above the last point of support to the building, or is located above the building. Having a coupling between the raceway's last point of support on the building and the actual weatherhead places unneeded strain on the coupling. A far better installation would be a solid section of rigid metal conduit without joints or couplings, or if a coupling was absolutely necessary, locating the coupling below the last point of support to the building for the raceway mast. There is an identical requirement for using outside branch circuits and feeder masts as supports in Question 69: Which of the following statements about a rigid metal conduit service mast is true? A: Couplings in the service mast are not permitted. B: The service mast must be supported by braces or guys. C: All raceway fittings shall be identified for use as service masts. D: A hub used at the service enclosure must be identified for use with service-entrance equipment. Page 41 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

42 Question 70: Underground Service Conductors. Installation. Question ID#: Section now includes requirements about the installation of underground service conductors rather than only the conductor insulation requirements. The section has been reorganized to include subsections (A) and (B). The term "service lateral conductors" has been replaced with "underground service conductors" in section (A) but the remaining text within the section regarding underground service conductor insulation requirements as well as the 4 exceptions that follow remain unchanged (B) lists the specific wiring methods that are permitted to be used when installing underground service conductors and refers the user to the appropriate Code sections for the requirements based on the type of wiring method chosen. The following ten wiring methods are currently the only permitted wiring methods that can be used when installing underground service conductors: There are currently 10 permitted wiring methods for underground service conductors. - Type RMC conduit - Type IMC conduit - Type NUCC conduit - Type HDPE conduit - Type PVC conduit - Type RTRC conduit - Type IGS cable - Type USE conductors or cables - Type MV or type MC cable identified for direct burial applications - Type MI cable, where suitably protected against physical damage and corrosive conditions. It is important not to confuse the requirements in with similar Code language found in section which outlines 19 different wiring methods permitted to be used for service-entrance conductors of 1000 volts or less. Section is in part III of Article 230 which is titled Underground Service Conductors. Section is in part IV of Article 230 which is titled Service-Entrance Conductors. Service conductors and service-entrance conductors, underground or overhead, have different definitions in Article 100. Applying the appropriate code section can be tricky. For example, underground service conductors can enter a dwelling through a foundation wall into a basement where the service equipment is located. On the exterior of the dwelling, below grade, the conductors are considered underground service conductors and are subject to the requirements in As soon as the conductors pass through the wall and are no longer underground, they are considered service-entrance conductors and subject to the requirements in Question 70: Which of the following wiring methods is permitted to be used for underground service conductors? A: Type FMC conduit. B: EMT. C: Type RTRC conduit. D: Type LFNMC conduit. Page 42 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

43 Question 71: Cable Trays. Question ID#: A new labeling requirement has been added for cable trays that contain service-entrance conductors. Permanent labels must be installed on cable trays that contain service-entrance conductors that say, "Service-Entrance Conductors." The labels must be spaced no more than 10 ft. apart. The requirement that the labels be installed not more than 10 ft. apart is new to the 2014 NEC. The reason for the new requirement is that electrical system cable trays may be close to other mechanical or piping tray systems. Non-electrically qualified maintenance personnel may not be able to identify the cables in the cable tray as service-entrance cables and could mistake them for non-electrical components. Such a mistake could be fatal. Even though cable trays containing service-entrance cables can be hundreds of feet long, they must be labeled at intervals not exceeding 10 ft. to identify them as cable trays containing service-entrance conductors. The requirement applies to both commercial and industrial locations. There is no exception that would override this requirement for the labeling of cable tray that contain service-entrance conductors. For some electrical installation requirements in the NEC, there are exceptions for industrial locations with qualified engineering and maintenance support. There is no such exception for this rule. The "Service-Entrance Conductors" labels must be visible; maximum spacing between labels is 10 ft. Question 71: What is required when a cable tray is used to support 350 kcmil copper service-entrance conductors? A: The cable tray must have a barrier to separate service-entrance conductors from each other. B: The service-entrance conductors must be labeled at ten foot intervals with the words "service-entrance conductors". C: The cable tray must be labeled with the words "service- entrance conductors;" the maximum spacing between these labels is 10 feet. D: The cable tray must have a CT rating. Question 72: Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of Service Disconnect. Question ID#: The voltage threshold for meters, meter sockets, and meter disconnect switches in has been raised to 1000 volts and a new labeling requirement has been added for meter disconnecting switches. Section specifies what types of equipment are permitted to be connected on the supply side of the service disconnect. In the 2011 NEC, meters, meter sockets, and meter disconnect switches connected on the supply side of the service were to be rated not more than 600 volts. Now the meters, meter sockets, and meter disconnect switches can be rated up to 1000 volts. A new labeling requirement has been added to section (3) which requires a meter disconnect to be legibly field marked on its exterior in a manner suitable for the environment as follows: A meter disconnect switch must be marked: Meter Disconnect Not Service Equipment. METER DISCONNECT NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT Meter disconnect switches are usually installed in order to disconnect the load prior to pulling the meter from the meter socket during servicing or meter replacement. These types of switches are more common in 3-phase, 4-wire, 277/480 volt systems where a greater arc potential exists. The intent of the new labeling requirement is to make sure that these types of switches are not confused with any required service disconnecting switches and also to make sure that they are not labeled as a service disconnecting means by mistake. Page 43 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

44 An agreement between installers and inspectors about where exactly the service disconnecting means is located is very important. With meter disconnects located on the supply side of the service clearly labeled, there is less chance that the meter disconnect will be mistaken for the service disconnect. Question 72: Which of the following meter disconnect installations would be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction? A: A meter disconnect located on the supply side of the service disconnect and labeled "meter disconnect". B: A meter disconnect with no labeling located on the supply side of the service disconnect and rated 2,500 V. C: A meter disconnect located on the supply side of the service disconnect, labeled as a "METER DISCONNECT NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT", and rated 1000 volts. D: A meter disconnect located on the load side of the service disconnecting means. Question 73: (B)(1) Location in Circuit. Feeder Taps. Taps Not Over 3 m (10 ft.) Long. Question ID#: The ten foot tap rule found in section (B)(1) has been revised for clarity, and a new exception has been added about the conductor ampacity requirements for listed equipment such as surge protective devices (SPD). A feeder tap is when a smaller conductor receives its power from a larger conductor that is protected at a higher ampacity than the smaller conductor. In this type of installation, there is no overcurrent protection required at the tap connection (the point where the smaller conductor receives its supply) as long as all of the tap rules are followed. There are four provisions that must be met in order to comply with the ten foot tap rule requirements in (B)(1). Section (B)(1)(1)(b) previously required the ampacity of the tap conductors to be not less than the rating of the "device" supplied by the tap conductors or not less than the rating of the overcurrent protective device at the termination of the tap conductors. Listed equipment with specific instructions on conductor sizing can use the manufacturer's instructions to determine conductor ampacity for The revised text clarifies that the ampacity of the tap conductors shall not be less than the rating of the "equipment containing an overcurrent device(s)" supplied by the tap conductors or not less than the rating of the overcurrent protective device at the termination of the tap conductors. feeder taps not over 10 ft. long. For example, if 150 amp fuses are used in a 200 amp fusible disconnect, the tap conductors are required to be rated for 150 amps. A new exception has been added which allows listed equipment, such as surge protective devices (SPDs) that are provided with specific instructions on minimum conductor sizing, to have the ampacity of the tap conductors supplying such equipment to be determined based on the manufacturer's instructions. Question 73: A 125 amp main breaker is installed in a 150 amp rated panelboard. The panelboard is supplied by an 8 ft. feeder tap. What is the minimum required ampacity ratingâ of the 8 ft. tap conductors? A: 150 amps. B: At least the same ampacity as the feeder. C: 125 amps. D: 400 amps. Page 44 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

45 Question 74: Arc Energy Reduction. Question ID#: The new title, Arc Energy Reduction, better describes a section where the intent is to limit the power of an arc blast on systems with adjustable trip circuit breakers. The trip setting of adjustable trip circuit breakers can be increased as part of a coordinated system of overcurrent protection. The problem is that if there is a fault on the system, the higher trip levels will allow the fault current to be greater and an arc blast to be more dangerous. The five methods listed to reduce the clearing time of an adjustable trip circuit breaker now only apply to circuit breakers where the trip setting is 1200 amps or higher. Two of the methods used to reduce the clearing time are new: An energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system or an approved equivalent means. The purpose of all five methods to reduce the clearing time is to protect personnel who are working on or testing the energized equipment by reducing the possibilities of or the intensity of an arc blast. There are two new methods to reduce the clearing time of an adjustable trip circuit breaker. Documentation must be made available to those authorized to design, install, operate, or inspect the installation as to the location of the circuit breaker(s). Being made aware of all circuit breaker locations that are part of the selectively coordinated system is the first step in the process of setting breakers properly to reduce incident energy levels. Informational Note 2 is new to the 2014 Code and informs the user that an energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system helps in reducing the arcing duration in the electrical distribution system. It also says no change in the circuit breaker or the settings of other devices is required during maintenance when a worker is working within an arc flash boundary as defined in NFPA 70E-2012, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. Question 74: Which of the following installations will require that documentation about the location of the circuit breaker be made available to those authorized to inspect the installation? A: An adjustable circuit breaker with a 1000 amp trip unit. B: An adjustable circuit breaker with a 1200 amp trip unit. C: An adjustible trip circuit breaker rated at 800 amps. D: An instantaneous trip circuit breaker rated at 1000 amps. Page 45 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

46 Question 75: (A)(1) Grounding Service-Supplied Alternating-Current Systems. System Grounding Connections. General. Question ID#: The terms "overhead service conductor" and "underground service conductor" have been added to Section (A)(1) in order to include the definitions of these items that were new in the 2011 Code cycle. Section (A)(1) states that the grounding electrode conductor connection shall be made at any accessible point from the load end of the overhead service conductors, service drop, underground service conductors, or service lateral to, and including the terminal or bus to which the grounded service conductor is connected at the service disconnecting means. According to (A), every premises supplied by a grounded AC service is required to have a grounding electrode conductor connected to the grounded service conductor at each service location. In a typical overhead electrical service installation, there are 3 locations that are acceptable for proper termination of a grounding electrode conductor. A premises wiring system supplied by a - One is at the load end of the overhead service drop. This method is not commonly used because it not very practical and requires twice the amount of grounding electrode conductor to reach the grounded conductor at the overhead service drop. - The second method can be used whether the service is fed overhead or underground and is to terminate the grounding electrode conductor to the main service disconnect enclosure at the same point where the grounded conductor terminates - The third method can be used whether the service is fed overhead or underground and is to terminate the grounding electrode conductor to a terminal inside a separate meter enclosure ahead of the service disconnect if the enclosure is considered accessible. grounded AC service needs a grounding electrode conductor connected to the grounded service conductor at each service. Some utility companies lock out the meter enclosure at each service rendering it inaccessible in order to avoid power theft. It is always a good idea to check with the local Authority Having Jurisdiction to see if they consider the meter enclosure as an accessible place for terminating the grounding electrode conductor. Question 75: Which of the following is an acceptable location for proper termination of a grounding electrode conductor? A: To an equipment grounding terminal bar within the enclosure of a subpanel downstream of the main service disconnect. B: To an isolated grounding terminal inside the service disconnect enclosure that has no connection to the grounded conductor. C: To the grounded conductor inside a subpanel located downstream of the main service disconnect. D: To the grounded conductor at the overhead service drop. Page 46 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

47 Question 76: Grounding Separately Derived Alternating-Current Systems. Question ID#: A new sentence has been added which reminds installers that multiple separately derived systems that are connected in parallel must be installed according to In section (A) for grounded systems, a system bonding jumper or supply-side bonding jumper must be installed. A grounded conductor and grounding electrode are required. A grounding electrode conductor can be installed for a single separately derived system, or a common grounding electrode for multiple separately derived systems is permitted. Multiple separately derived systems connected If a common grounding electrode conductor is installed for multiple separately derived systems, the common grounding electrode conductor is used to connect the grounded conductor of the separately derived systems to the grounding electrode. The minimum size of the common grounding electrode conductor is 3/0 AWG copper or 250 kcmil aluminum. A grounding electrode conductor tap is installed from each separately derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor. Each tap conductor is sized in accordance with based on the derived ungrounded conductors of the separately derived system it serves. in parallel must comply with Often, large facilities choose to install multiple separately derived systems that operate in parallel with one another. It is much more efficient to install several smaller generators and connect them in parallel than to have one large generator carrying the total load. Other benefits of these parallel systems include the following: - Multiple transformers or generators operating in parallel increases power reliability since failure of any one of them does not cause a total loss of power. - Multiple transformers or generators operating in parallel allow one or more of them to be shut down during servicing without affecting the entire electrical system. Question 76: What is the minimum size grounding electrode conductor required if used as a common grounding electrode conductor to interconnect multiple separately derived systems connected in parallel? A: 250 kcmil copper. B: 250 kcmil aluminum. C: 3/0 aluminum. D: 2/0 copper. Page 47 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

48 Question 77: (B) Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage. Question ID#: When a supplemental ground rod is installed at a service because a single ground rod cannot provide 25 ohms or less resistance, the connection between the two ground rods is called a grounding electrode bonding jumper. The grounding electrode bonding jumper is connected to both ground rods and buried below grade. The revision to section (B) states that the burial depth of the grounding electrode bonding jumper, or the grounding electrode conductor, does not have to meet the burial depth requirements of Section provides burial depth and protection requirements for underground conductors rated 0 to 1000 volts. Prior to this Code change, it was unclear if the minimum burial depth requirements in section also applied to grounding electrode conductors and grounding electrode bonding jumpers. Some inspectors may have previously required that the GEC or grounding electrode bonding jumper installed between two ground rods, for example, meet the minimum burial depth requirements as specified in table This new Code change should help to eliminate the confusion. Table does not apply to buried grounding electrode bonding jumpers. According to Table 300.5, direct buried conductors on residential property are required to be buried 18 inches deep. In order to protect the grounding electrode conductor or grounding electrode bonding jumper from physical damage, it will not be necessary to bury the conductor this deep. Question 77: What is the minimum burial depth required for a No. 4 AWG copper grounding electrode bonding jumper that connects two ground rods spaced 6 feet apart and not subject to physical damage? A: There is no minimum burial depth requirement. B: 12 inches. C: 6 inches. D: 18 inches if enclosed in PVC conduit. Question 78: (D) Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. Building or Structure with Multiple Disconnecting Means in Separate Enclosures. Question ID#: A number of changes have been made to section (D). The title to the section has been changed from, "Service with Multiple Disconnecting Means Enclosures," to "Building or Structure with Multiple Disconnecting Means in Separate Enclosures." By eliminating the word "service" from the heading and adding the word "feeder" to the supporting text, the new Code language makes it clear that this section, which specifies how the grounding electrode connections must be made, not only applies to buildings supplied by a service, but also applies to buildings supplied by a feeder with multiple disconnecting means. In (D)(1) "Common Grounding Electrode Conductor and Taps" when covering the dimensions of a copper or aluminum busbar used for a common grounding electrode, the required minimum dimensions of the busbar are listed as 1/4 in. thick x 2 in. wide. A new requirement has been added that the busbar used as the common grounding electrode conductor be long enough to accommodate the number of terminations necessary for the installation. The minimum dimensions of a busbar used as a common GEC are 1/4 in. thick, 2 in. wide. It must be able to accommodate the terminations needed. When making connections from individual grounding electrode conductors, the connection can be made at: Page 48 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

49 (1) The grounded conductor in each service equipment disconnecting means enclosure. (2) The equipment grounding conductor installed with the feeder. (3) The supply-side bonding jumper. The size of the individual grounding electrode conductor is selected from Table based on the size of the ungrounded conductor supplying the individual disconnecting means. Question 78: A service location at a building consists of 3 individual service enclosures connected to a common wireway which contains service-entrance conductors. If a grounding electrode conductor tap is used for one of the individual service enclosures, how is the tap required to be sized? A: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving the individual enclosure. B: Using Table based on the circular mil area of the service-entrance conductors in the wireway that supply all 3 service enclosures. C: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving the individual enclosure. D: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving all three enclosures. Question 79: (E) Raceways and Enclosures for Grounding Electrode Conductors. Question ID#: Most of the changes to this section are editorial. A single long paragraph in the 2011 NEC has been broken into 4 parts. The title to the section also has been changed to include raceways as well as enclosures that contain a grounding electrode conductor. The main point of the section remains the same: ferrous metal raceways and enclosures that contain a grounding electrode conductor must be electrically continuous from the point of attachment to the cabinet or equipment all the way to the grounding electrode. The raceways or enclosures must be bonded at each end of the raceway or enclosure to the grounding electrode or the grounding electrode conductor. Ferrous metal raceways and enclosures shall be The method for bonding at each end of the raceway or enclosure can be done by any 1 of 3 ways, according to (B)(2)-(4): bonded at each end of the raceway or enclosure to the grounding electrode or grounding electrode conductor. - Connections utilizing threaded couplings or threaded hubs on enclosures if made up wrenchtight. - Threadless couplings and connectors if made up tight for metal raceways and metal-clad cables. - Other listed devices, such as bonding-type locknuts, bushings, or bushings with bonding jumpers. When a bonding jumper is used, it must be the same size or larger than the enclosed grounding electrode conductor. Question 79: Where must ferrous metal raceways containing grounding electrode conductors be bonded? A: To either end of the metal raceway enclosing the grounding electrode conductor. B: By exothermic welding only.â  C: At each end of the metal raceway enclosing the grounding electrode conductor. D: To an equipment grounding conductor. Page 49 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

50 Question 80: (A)&(B) Connections to a Rod, Pipe, or Plate and Concrete-Encased Electrode(s). Question ID#: Section (A) and (B) have been changed to make it clearer that the size of the grounding electrode conductor to more than one driven ground rod doesn't have to be larger than No. 6 AWG copper. The grounding electrode conductor to one or more concrete-encased electrodes doesn't have to be larger than No. 4 AWG copper. For example, if two ground rods are installed to meet the requirements of (A)(2), then the grounding electrode conductor from the ground rod to the grounded conductor in the service equipment, and the bonding jumper between the two ground rods is not required to be larger than No. 6 AWG. Before the rewrite of this section, some inspectors were interpreting (A) to mean that if a 400 ampere service is used with 500 kcmil copper conductors, the grounding electrode conductor to the first ground rod, pipe or plate is sized from Table , size 1/0 copper. Grounding electrode conductors connected to The changes to (A) and (B) should clear up any confusion about the fact that if there is a single ground rod, two ground rods, or more than two ground rods, the grounding electrode conductor never is required to be larger than No. 6 AWG. single or multiple rod, pipe, or plate electrodes are not required to be larger than No. 6 AWG copper. Question 80: If two ground rods are installed for a 400 amp service, what is the maximum required size for a copper grounding electrode conductor connected to a rod, pipe, or plate electrode? A: No. 8 AWG. B: 1/0 AWG. C: No. 4 AWG. D: No. 6 AWG. Question 81: (C) Grounding Electrode Connections. Question ID#: A concrete-encased electrode that has been extended from inside the concrete foundation to an accessible location is still considered an "extension" of the Grounding Electrode. This is similar to the understanding that the first 5 ft. of metal water piping inside a building is an extension of the water pipe as a Grounding Electrode. If the rebar has been turned up outside the foundation, it is still part of the concrete-encased Grounding Electrode and can be used as a place to connect a Grounding Electrode Conductor or Bonding Jumpers. Also, the metal structural frame of a building is permitted to be used as a conductor to interconnect electrodes that are part of the grounding electrode system. This is true even if the metal frame of the building is not considered a Grounding Electrode by having a structural member in contact with the ground for 10 ft. or more. In order for the metal building frame to be considered a Grounding Electrode, per (A)(2), at least one structural metal member must be in contact with the earth for 10 ft. or more, or the hold-down bolts of a steel column in the building must be connected to rebar in the foundation. But even if the metal frame of the building does not qualify as a Grounding Electrode, it still can be used as a Grounding Electrode Conductor, to connect other grounding electrodes together. A concrete-encased electrode that has been extended from inside the concrete foundation to an accessible location is an extension of the grounding electrode. Page 50 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

51 Question 81: Which of the following statements about a concrete-encased electrode is true? A: A grounding electrode conductor can be connected to a concrete-encased electrode at a point outside of the foundation. B: In order to be considered a grounding electrode, it must be inside the foundation for its entire length. C: Bonding jumpers to other grounding electrodes cannot be connected to a concrete-encased electrode. D: A concrete-encased electrode cannot be turned up outside the foundation. Question 82: Table (C)(1) Grounded Conductor, Main Bonding Jumper, System Bonding Jumper, and Supply Side Bonding Jumper for Alternating-Current Systems. Question ID#: A new Table has been added to Article 250 which will be used to select the size of the grounded conductor, the main bonding jumper, the system bonding jumper, and the supply side bonding jumper. In earlier editions of the NEC, Table was used to select these conductors. All of these grounding and bonding conductors are located at the service or at a separately derived system, ahead of any overcurrent devices. The new table should make Article 250 easier to apply, because the title to Table is "Grounding Electrode Conductor for Alternating-Current Systems". None of the conductors in the new table are Grounding Electrode Conductors, but Table was still used to select the correct size conductor. This was confusing to many users. The grounded conductor, main bonding jumper, system bonding jumper, and supply side bonding jumper are based on the size of the largest ungrounded conductor or equivalent area for parallel conductors. When the ungrounded conductors are over 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the grounded conductor and the bonding conductors are selected based on 12.5% of the area of the largest ungrounded supply conductor or equivalent area for parallel supply conductors. An informational note says Table 8 in Chapter 9 can be used to find the circular mill area of conductors. Table (C)(1) is new and will be used to size grounded conductors, main bonding jumpers, system bonding jumpers, and supply-side bonding jumpers. Question 82: What is the minimum size, (copper) main bonding-jumper that is required when the ungrounded conductor size is 500 kcmil copper? A: No. 2 cu. B: 2/0 cu. C: 1/0 cu. D: No. 4 cu. Page 51 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

52 Question 83: Identification of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Question ID#: The identification of equipment grounding conductors has always been understood to be either green in color, green with one or more yellow stripes, or a bare conductor. The exception has been for power-limited Class 2 or Class 3 cables used in fire alarm or communications systems that operate at less than 50 volts. These applications are allowed to have a current-carrying conductor green in color where the equipment served does not need to be grounded. A new exception has been added for flexible cords. The outer finish of a cord can be green in color if there is no equipment grounding conductor in the cord, and the insulation and jacket are integral to the cord. Without an equipment grounding conductor, the cord can only be used for connecting equipment which is not required to be grounded, and the cord with the green outer finish is not likely to be confused with an equipment grounding conductor. Another new exception has been added for traffic signal work. Signaling circuits for this industry have a standing practice of using a green conductor as a signaling circuit conductor for the green traffic signal light. Since traffic signal work is performed and maintained by qualified technicians, an exception for this application can now be applied. In traffic signals, wire-type equipment grounding conductors can be bare or green with one or more yellow stripes. Question 83: When can the outer finish of a cord be green? A: When the cord is connected to a grounded power source and does not contain an equipment grounding conductor. B: When the grounded conductor is green with a yellow stripe. C: When the cord is part of a listed assembly. D: When the cord has integral insulation and no equipment grounding conductor. Question 84: (B) Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Increased in Size. Question ID#: Equipment grounding conductors are selected from Table based on the size of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit. If the ungrounded conductors of the circuit are increased to allow for voltage drop, or because of manufacturer's instructions, the equipment grounding conductor must be increased in size by the same proportion that the ungrounded conductors have been increased. For example, if the size of the ungrounded conductors is increased by 25%, the size of the equipment grounding conductor must be increased by 25%. The language in the 2011 NEC was not clear about why the ungrounded conductors would be increased in size. Ungrounded conductors are often increased in size because when more than 3 current-carrying conductors are in conduit, or used in a hot ambient temperature, the conductor cannot perform at the same ampacity. The intent of this section was not to require an increase in the size of the equipment grounding conductor under these conditions of use for the ungrounded conductors. Wire-type grounding conductors only need to be increased in size when ungrounded conductors are increased in size from the minimum size that The 2014 NEC clears this up by saying the equipment grounding conductor needs to be increased in size only if the ungrounded conductors are increased in size beyond what is needed for the "sufficient ampacity for the intended installation." In other words, if the ungrounded conductors are increased in size because there are more than 3 current-carrying conductors in conduit, or the ambient temperature is above 86Â F, the equipment grounding conductor is not required to be increased in size. has sufficient ampacity. In the 2011 NEC there was also confusion about what to do if the equipment grounding conductor was a metallic raceway. Was it necessary to increase the size of the raceway if the ungrounded conductors were increased in size? This was never intended, and the 2014 refers to "wire-type" equipment grounding conductors as the Page 52 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

53 only type of equipment grounding conductor that needs to be increased in size. Question 84: If the copper ungrounded conductors for a circuit are increased in size by 25% because there are 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit, which of the following statements about the equipment grounding conductor is true? A: The equipment grounding conductor is required to be the same size as the ungrounded conductors in the circuit. B: The equipment grounding conductor does not need to be increased in size. C: The equipment grounding conductor is required to be increased in size by 25%. D: The size of the equipment grounding conductor must be increased to match the size of the grounding electrode conductor. Question 85: (C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch Circuit Extensions. Question ID#: When a nongrounding type receptacle needs to be replaced, the most common way to do it is to install a GFCI receptacle outlet, as is permitted in 406.4(D). Section (C) allows a grounding-type receptacle to be used as a replacement, instead of a GFCI protected outlet, if the equipment grounding terminal of the receptacle is connected to an acceptable grounding means. In the 2011 NEC, the grounding terminal of a replacement receptacle used in a two wire system could be connected to the grounding electrode system, the grounding electrode conductor, or the equipment grounding terminal bar in the same enclosure where the branch circuit for the receptacle originates. A new option for connecting the grounding terminal of a replacement receptacle has been added in Now an equipment grounding conductor that is part of another branch circuit that originates in the same panelboard as the branch circuit for the receptacle can be used to provide a grounding means for the replacement receptacle. An equipment grounding conductor that is part of another branch circuit that originates in the same panelboard as the branch circuit for the receptacle can be used to provide a grounding The new option is similar to the permission to connect the replacement receptacle grounding screw to the equipment grounding terminal bar in the enclosure where the branch circuit for the receptacle originates. However, it could be much easier to connect to an equipment grounding conductor from another branch circuit than to install a new equipment grounding conductor all the way back to the panelboard. means for the replacement receptacle. Question 85: Which of the following is NOT an acceptable method to properly ground a grounding-type receptacle installed to replace a non-grounding receptacle in an existing branch-circuit which does not include an equipment grounding conductor? A: By connecting an equipment grounding conductor to the closest metallic water piping which may be insulated from the grounding electrode system. B: By connecting the grounding terminal of the receptacle to an equipment grounding conductor of a different circuit when both circuits originate from the same panelboard enclosure. C: By connecting an equipment grounding conductor from the receptacle grounding screw to the grounding terminal bar where the branch circuit originates. D: By connecting an equipment grounding conductor to any accessible point on the grounding electrode system. Page 53 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

54 Question 86: Size of the Direct-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor. Question ID#: The method to properly size a grounding electrode conductor for DC systems is different than the method used for AC systems. When sizing the grounding electrode conductor for DC systems, the provisions of must be used. As written in the 2011 NEC, section set no maximum size limitations for the grounding electrode conductor with the exceptions of: - When connected to the rod, pipe, or plate electrodes listed in (A)(5) and (7), the grounding electrode conductor was not required to be larger than No. 6 AWG copper or No. 4 aluminum. - When connected to a concrete-encased electrode, the maximum size was not required to be greater than No. 4 AWG copper. - When connected to a ground ring, the grounding electrode conductor that was the sole connection to the grounding electrode was not required to be larger than the conductor used for the ground ring. DC system grounding electrode conductors are not required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil aluminum. In the 2011 NEC, section (B) stated that, for other than the above, the grounding electrode conductor could not be smaller than the largest conductor supplied by the system. As written, if three 500 kcmil parallel conductors were supplying a large DC system, the grounding electrode conductor would be required to be 1500 kcmil at minimum. This was determined to be more restrictive than necessary. So, in the 2014 NEC, the revision now reads that the grounding electrode conductor shall meet the sizing requirements in the section but shall not be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250 kcmil aluminum. Question 86: What is the required size for a copper grounding electrode conductor connected to building steel in a DC system with two, 250 kcmil ungrounded conductors connected in parallel per phase? A: No. 3/0 cu. B: 350 kcmil cu. C: 400 kcmil cu. D: 500 kcmil cu. Question 87: Direct-Current Ground-Fault Detection. Question ID#: With new technology advancements associated with solar photovoltaic systems, battery systems, and other DC systems, the NEC is updating articles relating to these systems. The 2011 NEC did not address ground-fault detection for DC systems. Some DC systems don't utilize a grounded system, and a method of sensing ground faults is especially necessary to prevent fires and shock hazards. New Section requires that ungrounded DC systems have ground-fault detection, and grounded systems shall be permitted to have ground fault detection. Section (C) spells out how the marking for direct-current systems must be done. DC systems must be legibly marked to indicate the grounding type at the DC source or at the first disconnecting means. The type of marking used must be suitable for the environment involved. Ungrounded DC systems now require ground-fault detection systems. Page 54 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

55 Question 87: Which type of DC system is required to have ground-fault sensing equipment? A: A grounded system without a neutral conductor. B: A grounded system with a neutral conductor. C: An ungrounded system. D: A grounded system. Question 88: Ground-Fault Circuit Conductor Brought to Service Equipment. Question ID#: Section is in Part X of Article 250, Grounding of Systems and Circuits of over 1kV. This is the first time in the NEC that the requirements for a ground-fault circuit conductor at the service equipment have been spelled out. Similar requirements for ac systems operating at 1000 volts or less are found in (C). There are two parts to Section (A) is for when a grounded conductor is brought to the service equipment. Section (B) is for systems without a grounded conductor at the service point. The purpose of both sections is to provide a ground-fault circuit path for fault current that will open an overcurrent device if there is a ground-fault on the system. The purpose of is to provide a If a grounded conductor is brought to the service equipment, (A), then a grounded conductor must be installed and routed with the ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting means and connected to the grounded conductor terminal or bus. A main bonding jumper is required to connect the grounded conductor to the service disconnecting means enclosure. ground-fault circuit path for fault current that will open an overcurrent device if there is a ground-fault on the system. If a grounded conductor is not brought to the service point, (B), a supply-side bonding jumper must be installed and routed with the ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting means, and connected to each disconnecting means equipment grounding terminal or bus. The requirements for sizing the grounded conductor or the supply-side bonding jumper are similar to the requirements for systems of 1000 volts or less. The grounded conductor or supply-side bonding jumper cannot be smaller in size than the grounding electrode conductor from Table For parallel raceways, the size of the grounded conductor or supply side bonding jumper is based on the size of the ungrounded conductors in the raceway. Question 88: If a grounded conductor is provided at the service point for a 12,470-volt alternating- current electrical service, which of the following is required? A: An insulated busbar must connect the equipment grounding conductor to each service disconnecting means enclosure. B: A main bonding jumper must connect the grounded conductor to each service disconnecting means enclosure. C: An aluminum busbar must connect the grounded conductor to each service disconnecting means enclosure. D: A system bonding jumper must connect the grounded conductor to each service disconnecting means enclosure. Page 55 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

56 Question 89: Grounding and Bonding of Fences and Other Metal Structures. Question ID#: Section is new in the 2014 NEC and was added to address the grounding of metal fences and structures around substations. These requirements are located in Part X of Article 250, Grounding of Systems and Circuits of over 1 kv. The new section requires that metal fences and other metal structures in or surrounding a substation with exposed electrical conductors and equipment shall be grounded and bonded to limit step, touch, and transfer voltages. The intent of the new section is to provide protection to the general public that may come in contact with the enclosures that are put in place to guard the energized equipment from unauthorized personnel (A) requires that when metal fences are located within 5 m (16 ft.) of the exposed electrical conductors or equipment, the fence shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system with wire-type bonding jumpers as follows: Metallic fences around substations are now required to be grounded and bonded. - Bonding jumpers shall be installed at each fence corner and at maximum 50m (160 ft.) intervals along the fence. - Where bare overhead conductors cross the fence, bonding jumpers shall be installed on each side of the crossing. - Gates and gate support posts shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system. - Any gate or other opening in the fence shall be bonded across the opening by a buried bonding jumper. - The grounding grid or grounding electrode systems shall be extended to cover the swing of all gates. - The barbed wire strands above the fence shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system. Alternate designs performed under engineering supervision shall also be permitted for grounding or bonding of metal fences. Section (B) specifies that all exposed conductive metal structures, including guy wires within 2.5 m (8 ft.) vertically or 5 m (16 ft.) horizontally of exposed conductors or equipment and subject to contact by persons, shall be bonded to the grounding electrode systems in the area. Question 89: Which of the following items is required to be bonded at a 15,000-volt substation? A: A wooden gate located 10 feet from exposed electrical conductors. B: A metal gate located 16.5 feet from exposed electrical conductors. C: A metal fence located 25 feet from exposed electrical conductors. D: A metal gate post located 15 feet from exposed electrical conductors. Chapter 2 - Additional Questions Question 90: 210.8(A)(9) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Bathtubs or Shower Stalls. Question ID#: Page 56 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

57 Question 90: Which of the following receptacle outlets in dwelling units require GFCI protection? A: A 125-volt, 20-ampere outlet installed directly outside a bathroom door, 7 ft. away from a shower stall. B: A 125-volt, 20-ampere outlet installed outside the bathroom, 8 ft. away from a bathtub. C: A 240-volt, 20-amp outlet installed for a space heater in a bathroom. D: A 125-volt, 20-ampere outlet installed 5 ft. away from a shower stall. Question 91: (C) Dormitory Units. Question ID#: Question 91: In a college dormitory, which of the following locations requires AFCI protection? A: A common dining room where all the residents eat. B: A common reception room at the building entrance. C: A kitchen shared by residents of two adjoining suites. D: A sleeping room in an individual dormitory unit. Question 92: (B) Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors. Increased in Size. Question ID#: Question 92: The size of the ungrounded conductors of a circuit protected at 100 amps are increased by 20% to allow for voltage drop. Which of the following statements about the equipment grounding conductor is true? A: The equipment grounding conductor is not required to be increased in size. B: The minimum size of the equipment grounding conductor is No. 4 AWG. C: The equipment grounding conductor is required to be increased in size by 20%. D: The minimum size of the equipment grounding conductor is No. 6 AWG. Question 93: Neutral Conductors. Question ID#: Question 93: Three multi-wire branch circuits, each with its own separate grounded neutral conductor, pass straight through a junction box without a loop. Which of the following statements is true? A: The grounded conductors of all the multi-wire branch circuits must be grouped together. B: The grounded and ungrounded conductors of each multi-wire branch circuit are not required to be grouped. C: The grounded and ungrounded conductors of each multi-wire branch circuit must be grouped together separately. D: All the grounded and ungrounded conductors of each multi-wire branch circuit must be grouped together. Question 94: (A)(1)-(6) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Question 94: Which of the following methods satisfies all the requirements for installing AFCI protection in a dwelling unit? A: Install AFCI protected outlets in metal boxes. B: Install a combination-type arc-fault circuit-interrupter circuit breaker. C: Install an outlet branch circuit AFCI as the first outlet on the circuit. D: Install outlet branch circuit AFCI type receptacles in all outlets on a branch circuit. Question 95: 210.8(A)(10) Ground-Fault Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Laundry Areas. Question ID#: Page 57 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

58 Question 95: Which outlet in a dwelling unit laundry requires GFCI protection? A: The 125-volt outlet for the washing machine. B: The 240-volt outlet for a space heater. C: The 125-volt outlet for the light/ceiling fan. D: The 240-volt, 30-ampere dryer outlet. Question 96: 210.8(B)(8) GFCI Protection for Personnel. Other Than Dwelling Units. Garages. Question ID#: Question 96: If installed in an automobile service bay, which of the following items require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection? A: A 125-volt single-phase light fixture above the work area in a commercial garage. B: A 125-volt 20-amp single-phase dedicated receptacle that provides power to a cord-and-plug connected air compressor. C: A 250-volt 20-amp single-phase receptacle that provides power to a cord- and-plug connected air compressor. D: A 250-volt 20-amp single-phase receptacle that provides power to a cord-and-plug connected welder. Question 97: Cable Trays. Question ID#: Question 97: How many labels are required in a 210 ft. run of cable tray that contains service-entrance conductors? A: 12. B: 15. C: 10. D: 21. Question 98: (C)(2) Identification for Feeders. Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Feeders Supplied from Direct-Current Systems. Question ID#: Question 98: How is each feeder conductor in a two wire ungrounded DC circuit identified when the conductors are No. 8 AWG operating at 600 volts? A: The positive conductor is identified with red tape. B: The positive conductor has a continuous black outer finish. C: The negative conductor is identified with black tape. D: The positive conductor has a continuous red outer finish. Question 99: 210.8(D) GFCI Protection. Kitchen Dishwasher Branch Circuit. Question ID#: Question 99: Where is GFCI protection required for a dishwasher? A: When a new dishwasher is installed in an existing dwelling unit. B: When the dishwasher is located next to the sink in a recreational center activity room. C: In a wet-bar located in a dwelling unit family room. D: In a dwelling unit kitchen. Question 100: (E)(1) Outdoor Dwelling Unit Receptacles. Question ID#: Page 58 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

59 Question 100: Which of the following installed receptacle outlets can serve as one of the required outdoor outlets at the back of a dwelling? A: A receptacle outlet installed on a second floor balcony. B: A receptacle outlet readily accessible from grade and installed 7 ft. from grade level. C: A receptacle outlet installed indoors next to a door leading to an outdoor deck. D: A receptacle outlet readily accessible from grade and installed 4 ft. from grade level. Question 101: (D) Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. Building or Structure with Multiple Disconnecting Means in Separate Enclosures. Question ID#: Question 101: A service location at a building consists of 3 individual service enclosures connected to a common wireway which contains service-entrance conductors. If a grounding electrode conductor tap is used for one of the individual service enclosures, how is it required to be sized? A: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving the individual enclosure. B: Using Table based on the circular mil area of the service-entrance conductors in the wireway that supply all 3 service enclosures. C: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving all three enclosures. D: Using Table based on the largest service-entrance conductor serving the individual enclosure. Question 102: Size of the Direct-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor. Question ID#: Question 102: What is the required size for a copper grounding electrode conductor connected to a metal underground water pipe in a DC system with one 4/0 copper ungrounded conductor per phase? A: No. 2 AWG cu. B: 4/0 AWG cu. C: 3/0 AWG cu. D: No. 1 AWG cu. Question 103: (B) Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation. Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage. Question ID#: Question 103: Which of the following statements about a grounding electrode conductor or grounding electrode bonding jumper is true? A: It must be buried at various depths depending on the type of occupancy. B: It must be encased in 2 inches of concrete. C: It must be protected from physical damage. D: It must be protected by a raceway if buried. Question 104: Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies. Exception. Question ID#: Page 59 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

60 Question 104: When a building has been designed and constructed according to a local energy code, which of the following is a true statement? A: Table is required to be used to calculate the general lighting load. B: The power monitoring system must begin shedding load if the general lighting load goes over the setpoint. C: The power monitoring system must set an alarm if the general lighting load climbs above the setpoint. D: The general lighting loads used in the service calculation will be higher than in a building that is built without an energy code. Question 105: Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of Service Disconnect. Question ID#: Question 105: If a meter disconnect switch is installed on the supply side of an electric meter, how must it be labeled? A: METER/SERVICE DISCONNECT. UTILITY USE ONLY. B: METER DISCONNECT - NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT. C: METER DISCONNECT SWITCH. DO NOT OPERATE. D: No labeling is required if the switch will be used by the utility company. Question 106: Ground-Fault Circuit Conductor Brought to Service Equipment. Question ID#: Question 106: What is the minimum size supply-side bonding jumper required for 7,200 volt ungrounded service-entrance conductors when the ungrounded conductors are 4/0 AWG cu.? A: 2/0 AWG cu. B: 1/0 AWG cu. C: No. 4 AWG cu. D: No. 2 AWG cu. Question 107: (A)(1) Grounding Service-Supplied Alternating-Current Systems. System Grounding Connections. General. Question ID#: Question 107: If a building is supplied by four services in accordance with the provisions in 230.2(C)(2), and they are each located on a different corner of the building, which of the services are required to be connected to the grounding electrode system by a grounding electrode conductor? A: Three of the services. B: Two of the services. C: One of the services. D: All four of the services. Question 108: (A) Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Question 108: Which of the following statements about Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupter protection is FALSE? A: The countertop receptacles in a dwelling unit kitchen require AFCI protection. B: Receptacle type AFCIs must be installed in such a way that they can be tested. C: The living room devices and outlets in a college dormitory bedroom require AFCI protection. D: AFCI protection is required in bathrooms. Page 60 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

61 Question 109: Service Masts as Supports. Question ID#: Question 109: Overhead service conductors shall not be attached to a service mast between a weatherhead and a coupling under what condition? A: Where the coupling is located under the last place where the service mast is secured to the building. B: Where the coupling is located above the last point of support to the building. C: Where the coupling is located below the last point of support to the building. D: Where the coupling is located above the service enclosure but below the last point of securement to the building. Question 110: (E)(3) Balconies, Decks, and Porches. Question ID#: Question 110: A deck is installed 8 ft. above the ground. Which of the following statements about the location of a receptacle outlet for the deck is true? A: The receptacle outlet can be mounted 80 inches above the deck walking surface. B: The receptacle outlet can be mounted 6 ft. outside the perimeter of the deck. C: A receptacle outlet mounted 12 inches above the deck walking surface can be counted as one of the required outdoor outlets serving the front or rear of the dwelling. D: The receptacle outlet can be mounted 18 inches above the deck walking surface. Question 111: (A)&(B) Connections to a Rod, Pipe, or Plate and Concrete-Encased Electrode(s). Question ID#: Question 111: An 800 amp service uses 2 paralleled 600 kcmil conductors for the ungrounded conductors. What is the maximum required size for a copper grounding electrode conductor connected to a concrete-encased electrode? A: No. 6 AWG. B: No. 4 AWG. C: No. 8 AWG. D: 1/0 AWG. Question 112: (C) Grounding Electrode Connections. Question ID#: Question 112: Which of the following statements about the metal structural frame of a building is true? A: The metal frame of the building can be used as a conductor to connect grounding electrodes if it is insulated from ground. B: In order to be used as a conductor to connect other grounding electrodes the metal frame of the building must be in contact with the earth for 10 ft. C: The first story of the metal frame of a building can be used as a conductor to connect grounding electrodes. D: The metal frame of the building can be used as a conductor to connect grounding electrodes. Question 113: (I) Dwelling Unit Receptacle Outlets- Foyers. Question ID#: Page 61 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

62 Question 113: A foyer that is not part of a hallway has a total floor area 80 square feet. A door and two door-side-windows are centered in the foyer wall that is 10 feet long. The total width of the door and door-side-windows is 5 feet; and, the door-side-windows extend to the floor. How many receptacles are required for the foyer wall that has the door and windows with a total width of 10 ft, including the door and windows? A: 3 receptacle outlets. B: 2 receptacle outlets. C: 1 receptacle outlet. D: 0 receptacle outlets. Question 114: (B) Exception. Branch Circuit Extensions or Modifications- Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Question 114: Which of the following installations would NOT require AFCI protection in a dwelling? A: When the branch-circuit wiring is extended 5 ft. to reach a new panelboard location. B: When wiring in a bedroom is replaced. C: When wiring in a kitchen is modified. D: When branch-circuit wiring is extended to reach a new bedroom receptacle outlet. Question 115: 210.4(D) Multiwire Branch Circuits. Grouping. Question ID#: Question 115: Which of the following options is NOT permitted to be used to identify the grounded conductor as part of a grouped multi-wire branch circuit within a panelboard? A: A wire tie placed around a group of ungrounded conductors and their associated grounded conductor every 3 inches after the group of wires enters the enclosure. B: Placing a wire marker at the grounded conductor termination with a number on it that corresponds with its associated circuit number. C: Using white tape to identify the grounded conductor at the termination point. D: A wire tie placed around a group of ungrounded conductors and their associated grounded conductor 1 inch after the group of wires enters the enclosure. Question 116: Electrical Service Areas. Question ID#: Question 116: Which of the following locations does NOT require a 125-volt, single-phase receptacle outlet to be installed in the electrical service area? A: A 208-volt three-phase service at a commercial office building. B: A 120/240-volt single-phase service at a one-family dwelling. C: A 120/240-volt single-phase service at a restaurant. D: A 480-volt three-phase service at an industrial manufacturing plant. Question 117: (G) Receptacle Outlets. Basements, Garages, and Accessory Buildings. Question ID#: Page 62 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

63 Question 117: What is the minimum number of receptacle outlets required in the three car garage of a one-family dwelling with one piece of specific equipment that requires an individual branch circuit? A: 3. B: 1. C: 2. D: 4. Question 118: Direct-Current Ground-Fault Detection. Question ID#: Question 118: Which of the following signs and sign locations is acceptable for a DC system? A: "Grounded DC System." Placed at the point where the DC to AC conversion takes place. B: "DC System." Placed next to the DC load. C: "Ungrounded DC System." Placed at the source of the system. D: "AC/DC System" Placed nearest the point where the conductors enter the structure. Question 119: Buildings or Other Structures Supplied By a Feeder or Branch Circuit. Type. Question ID#: Question 119: Which of the following applies if a 120/208-volt 60-amp switch is used to disconnect a feeder to an outbuilding and the feeder does not contain an equipment grounding conductor? A: The switch must be suitable for use as service equipment. B: The switch must be installed inside the building. C: The switch must be installed outside the building. D: The switch must be a molded case circuit breaker. Question 120: Electric Vehicle Charging Circuit. Question ID#: Question 120: Which of the following is an electric vehicle? A: A Plug-in hybrid electric automobile. B: A golf cart. C: An off-road all-terrain vehicle. D: An electric fork truck. Question 121: (A)(1) Conductors - Minimum Ampacity and Size. Branch Circuits Not More than 600 Volts. General. Question ID#: Question 121: What is the minimum size THWN cu. conductor required to supply a 150-amp continuous load with 4 current-carrying conductors in conduit? A: 3/0 THWN cu. B: 4/0 THWN cu. C: 2/0 THWN cu. D: 1/0 THWN cu. Question 122: (C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch Circuit Extensions. Question ID#: Page 63 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

64 Question 122: Which of the following statements about nongrounding receptacle replacement or branch circuit extensions is true? A: The grounding screw on the replacement receptacle can be connected to any equipment grounding conductor on the system. B: The grounding screw on the replacement receptacle can be connected to any branch circuit that is GFCI protected. C: The grounding screw on the replacement receptacle can be connected to the equipment grounding terminal on any panelboard in the system. D: The grounding screw on the replacement receptacle can be connected to an equipment grounding conductor on the branch circuit in the same panelboard as the receptacle branch circuit. Question 123: 210.8(A)(7) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Personnel. Dwelling Units. Question ID#: Question 123: Which of the following single-phase 15- and 20-amp 125-volt receptacles is required to have GFCI protection? A: One installed 5 feet from the outside edge of the kitchen sink. B: One installed 6.25 feet from the outside edge of the kitchen sink. C: One installed 6 meters from the outside edge of the kitchen sink. D: One installed 6.1 feet from the outside edge of the kitchen sink. Question 124: Arc Energy Reduction. Question ID#: Question 124: Which of the following statements about arc energy reduction is true? A: Documentation is not required for adjustable trip circuit breakers with a rating above 1200 amps. B: Arc energy reduction is intended to protect personnel working on energized equipment. C: A method to reduce the clearing time of adjustable trip circuit breakers rated 1000 amps or less is required. D: An energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system is required for all adjustable trip circuit breakers rated 1200 amps or higher. Question 125: 210.5(C) Identification for Branch Circuits. Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Question ID#: Question 125: How is each conductor in a two-wire ungrounded DC circuit identified when the conductors are No. 8 AWG operating at 600 volts? A: The negative conductor is identified with black tape. B: The positive conductor has a continuous black outer finish. C: The positive conductor has a continuous red outer finish. D: The positive conductor is identified with red tape. Question 126: Table (C)(1) Grounded Conductor, Main Bonding Jumper, System Bonding Jumper, and Supply Side Bonding Jumper for Alternating-Current Systems. Question ID#: Page 64 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

65 Question 126: What is the minimum size copper supply side bonding jumper used with a separately derived system where the ungrounded conductors are 4/0 copper? A: 1/0 cu. B: 3/0 cu. C: No. 2 cu. D: 2/0 cu. Question 127: Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Question ID#: Question 127: Which 1200 amp branch-circuit disconnect requires GFPE? A: One that is solidly grounded, fed from a wye electrical system and exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase. B: One that is solidly grounded, fed from a wye electrical system and more than 150 volts to ground. C: One that is solidly grounded, fed from a wye electrical system and 120 volts to ground. D: One that is solidly grounded, fed from a wye electrical system and 150 volts to ground. Question 128: Inspections and Tests. Question ID#: Question 128: An outside feeder is supplying power to an electrical switchboard operating at 12,470 volts. What is required for each control circuit? A: The circuit must be adjusted as directed by the authority having jurisdiction. B: There are no special requirements for control circuits. C: The circuit must be tested prior to being installed on site. D: The circuit must be tested when first installed on site. Question 129: 210.8(B) GFCI Protection for Personnel. Other Than Dwelling Units. Exception No. 1 to (3). Rooftops. Question ID#: Question 129: When is a rooftop receptacle considered readily accessible? A: If it is GFCI protected by a GFCI circuit breaker in the panelboard. B: If it is GFCI protected. C: If it is readily accessible from the rooftop. D: If it is mounted on HVAC equipment. Chapter 3 Page 65 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

66 Question 130: (B)(1) Securing and Supporting. Raceways Used as Means of Support. Question ID#: Raceways that are used as a means of support for other raceways, cables, or nonelectrical equipment must be identified as a means of support. In the 2011 NEC, raceways could be used as a means of support if they were "identified for the purpose." The Code writers thought the phrase "identified for the purpose" is too vague and it was better to say that if the raceway was going to be used as a means of support, it should be identified as a means of support. In Article 100, "identified" is defined as meaning: Raceways that are used as a means of support must be identified as such. Recognizable as suitable for the specific purpose, function, use, environment, application, and so forth, where described in a particular Code requirement. An informational note after the definition of identified in Article 100 says that the way to determine the suitability of equipment for a specific purpose, environment, or application is to have it listed and labeled by a qualified 3rd party testing laboratory, an inspection agency, or other organization that does product evaluation. In other words, just because the manufacturer says a raceway can be used as a means of support for another raceway does not mean that the Authority Having Jurisdiction will take their word for it. The 3 conditions where a raceway can be used as a means of support for other raceways, cables, or nonelectrical equipment are: - Where the raceway or means of support is identified as a means of support. - Where the raceway contains power supply conductors for electrically controlled equipment and is used to support Class 2 circuit conductors or cables that are solely for the purpose of connection to the equipment control circuits. - Where the raceway is used to support boxes or conduit bodies in accordance with or to support luminaires in accordance with (E). Question 130: Which of the following is required for raceways to support luminaires? A: The manufacturer says that the raceway is permitted to be used to support a luminaire. B: The installation instructions indicate that the luminaire is permitted to be supported by a raceway. C: The raceway is installed correctly with fittings that can support a luminaire installed in accordance with (E). D: The raceway is installed correctly. Page 66 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

67 Question 131: (C)(1) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). Wiring Methods. Question ID#: Section (C)(1), which provides the requirements for wiring methods installed within a plenum, has been slightly modified for clarity, and new provisions have been added about nonmetallic cable ties that are installed to secure cables within a plenum. The space above a dropped ceiling is "other space used for environmental air." A plenum is considered to be an area that has not specifically been fabricated for air handling purposes, such as a duct, but does in fact handle or convey environmental air. The most common type of plenum is the area above a suspended grid-type ceiling when designed so that return air is pulled through the above-ceiling space and recirculated into the supply air system. Metallic raceways or wiring methods are required to be used if installed within a plenum in order to reduce the possibility that the melting of a nonmetallic wiring method could release smoke or flames into the environmental air system. Mineral insulated cable (type MI) was previously allowed to be used within a plenum, but now MI cable used within a plenum must have a metal jacket. The code says that the MI cable shall be of the type without an overall nonmetallic covering. In addition, new requirements to this section now specify that if nonmetallic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories are used to secure and support cables within a plenum, they shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties. The new informational note after this section refers to ANSI/UL , Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces which is a publication commonly used to determine flame spread and smoke density levels of products used in air-handling spaces. Question 131: Which of the following wiring methods is permitted to be installed in a plenum? A: Nonmetallic sheathed cable. B: Integrated gas spacer cable (type IGS). C: Mineral insulated cable (type MI) with a metal jacket. D: Flat conductor cable (type FCC). Question 132: Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade. Question ID#: New Section , Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade, states that where raceways are installed in wet locations above grade, the interior of these raceways shall be considered to be a wet location. Insulated conductors and cables installed in raceways in wet locations shall comply with (C). The purpose of adding this new section is to make above ground installation requirements over 1000 volts consistent with the requirements in Section for 1000 volts and less. The interior of above ground raceways that are in wet locations require conductors that are listed for use in wet locations. It is possible that these raceways will gather moisture and in fact become filled with water at times. The interiors of raceways installed in wet locations above grade are considered wet locations. Wet location conductors exposed to sunlight need to be sunlight resistant. Wet locations are defined in Article 100 as: Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact with the earth; in locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as vehicle washing areas, and in unprotected locations exposed to weather. Conductors and cables for circuits over 1000 volts are required to be listed for wet locations, have a moisture-impervious metal sheath, or have an outer insulation Page 67 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

68 which is type MTW, RHW, RHW-2, TW, THW, THW-2, THHW, THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW. Question 132: Which of the following conductor insulation types could be used for an outdoor 480 volt feeder installed in a raceway? A: FEP. B: THHN. C: THWN. D: XHH. Question 133: Table (B)(3)(a) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors. Question ID#: Table (B)(3)(a) was revised to make provisions for spare conductors and allowances for those conductors that cannot be energized at the same time. Section (B)(3)(a) provides requirements for adjusting the final allowable ampacity of conductors where more than 3 conductors are considered to be current-carrying and installed within a raceway, cable, or bundled in lengths exceeding 24 inches without maintaining spacing. A change to Section (B)(3)(a) removed the phrase "in a raceway or cable" from the heading. Spare conductors now must be included in the total number of current-carrying conductors in the raceway or cable. An important change was made to Note 1 under Table (B)(3)(a). The revised text in Note 1 states that the number of conductors is the total number of conductors in the raceway or cable, including spare conductors. The count for current-carrying conductors does not include equipment grounding conductors, and if the neutral carries only the unbalanced load, does not include the neutral. The count shall not include conductors that are connected to electrical components that cannot be energized at the same time. Based on the old Code language, spare conductors installed in a raceway for future use would not technically be considered "current-carrying". This type of a situation could create an issue in the future if the spare conductors are connected to an energized component. Conductors that carry current will generate heat and the existing conductors in the raceway were sized without taking the then spare conductors into account. The last sentence in Note 1 allows conductors that cannot be energized simultaneously to be excluded from the ampacity adjustment requirements. As an example, it would be pointless to apply an 80% correction factor to four conductors in a raceway that are connected to a 4-way switch if there was never a possibility that more than two of them could be energized at the same time. Question 133: According to Table (B)(3)(a), what percentage is required to be used when applying correction factors to 12 current-carrying conductors and 9 spare conductors within the same 10 foot length of electrical metallic tubing? A: 50%. B: 45%. C: 80%. D: 70%. Page 68 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

69 Question 134: (B)(3)(c) Exception And Table. Raceways and Cables Exposed to Sunlight on Rooftops. Question ID#: The title of Table (B)(3)(c) was changed to Ambient Temperature Adjustment for Raceways or Cables Exposed to Sunlight on or Above Rooftops. The change eliminated the word â œcircular,â recognizing the fact that some raceways installed on rooftops are not circular, and added the word â œcables.â Conductors in cables and raceways installed on rooftops in direct sunlight get much hotter than conductors installed inside cables or raceways in other locations.â It is a fact that conduit installed on a rooftop is hot to the touch, and conductors installed inside raceways can be damaged by high temperatures. A new exception exempts Type XHHW-2 insulated conductors from the ampacity adjustment for installations on rooftops. Table (B)(3)(c) requires a temperature rise to be added to the ambient temperature for raceways and cables installed on rooftops.â The closer the raceway or cable is to the roof, the greater the temperature adder is.â For example, if the ambient temperature is 86 F, and a raceway is installed 4 inches above a roof, an additional 30 F must be added to the ambient temperature, making it 116 F. The ampacity adjustment to the conductors inside the conduit would be based on 116 F. A study of XHHW-2 conductors installed in raceways on rooftops found they were not damaged by extreme heat.â A new exception allows XHHW-2 conductors to be used in raceways on rooftops without adding the increased temperatures of Table (B)(3)(c). NFPA has issued corrections to Table (B)(3)(c) in an errata sheet â œtable (B)(3)(c). Revise second entry in the first column to read â œabove roof 13 mm (1â 2 in.)â 90 mm (3 1â 2 in.).â Question 134: What is the total ambient temperature that must be used for conductors (that are NOT type XHHW-2) in a raceway that is mounted 6 inches above a rooftop and the ambient temperature is 80 F? A: 120 F. B: 80 F. C: 140 F. D: 110 F. Page 69 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

70 Question 135: (B)(7) 120/240-Volt, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders. Question ID#: Table (B)(7) has been deleted. One of the most frequently used tables in the NEC, the table was used to select the conductor sizes for 120/240-Volt, 3-Wire, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders for services and feeders rated 100 through 400 amperes. In its place, a calculation must be done that determines the service and feeder conductors at an ampacity not less than 83% of the service or feeder rating. For example, the service conductors for a 100 amp service are required to carry not less than 83 amps. Table (B)(7) had been deleted, and now the sizes are calculated to be not less than 83% of the service or feeder rating. Doing a calculation to determine the ampacity of service and feeder conductors at 83% of the service or feeder rating, rather than using the old Table (B)(7), does not make a difference in the size of the conductor. The wire sizes for both copper and aluminum, from Table (B)(16), when calculated at 83% of the service or feeder rating, are identical to the sizes in old Table (B)(7). The conditions when the 83% calculation can be used are also the same as in It can be used for: - Dwelling services and feeders that supply the entire load of the dwelling /240-voltage rating. - 3-wire. - Single-phase. Because using the 83% calculation is limited to service conductors and feeders that supply the entire load, the service conductors that feed a one-family dwelling can be selected based on 83% of the rating of the service, but the feeder conductors that supply a subpanel that does not carry the total load of the dwelling must carry 100% of the load. Question 135: What are the minimum size copper, THWN service conductors for a 200-amp service, 120/240 volt, 3-wire, single-phase, where the conductors carry the entire load of the dwelling? Assume 75 degree C terminals. A: 1/0. B: 2/0. C: 3/0. D: No. 1. Page 70 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

71 Question 136: (B)(7) and Informative Annex D. Example D7. Sizing of Service Conductors for Dwellings(s). Question ID#: A new example, D7 in Annex D, refers to (B)(7). Section (B)(7) has replaced Table (B)(7) and is used to select a service or feeder conductor for dwellings that are supplied by a 120/240 volt, 3-wire, single-phase system rated between 100 and 400 amps.â Service and feeder conductors can be selected that have an ampacity of 83% of the service or feeder rating if the conductors carry the entire load associated with the dwelling unit.â Example D7 is based on a 175-ampere rated dwelling service where the conductors are supplied by a 120/240 volt, 3-wire, single-phase system. Section (B)(7) has replaced Table (B)(7). Service and feeder conductors can be selected that have an ampacity of 83% of the service or feeder rating if the conductors carry the entire load amperes x 0.83 = amperes per (B)(7). - If no other adjustments or corrections are required for the installation, then, in accordance with Table (B)(16), a 1/0 AWG Cu or a 3/0 AWG Al meets this rating at 75 C. Conductors for circuits rated over 100 amps are selected from the 75 C column of Table (B)(16), unless the equipment terminals are rated 60 C. Question 136: What are the minimum size copper service conductors for a 150-amp service, 120/240 volt, 3-wire, single-phase, where the conductors carry the entire load of the dwelling and are connected to terminals rated for 75 C? A: No. 1. B: 2/0. C: 1/0. D: 3/0. Question 137: Damp or Wet Locations. Question ID#: Section is about installing boxes, conduit bodies, and fittings in damp or wet locations. A Code change will now allow weep holes to be installed in the field to provide drainage for condensation that can form inside the box. Drilling weep holes in weatherproof boxes has been a common practice among electricians for many years. Anyone performing service work that has opened a die-cast aluminum weatherproof junction box years after the initial installation has first-hand knowledge of what kind of damage and corrosion can occur when moisture is allowed to build up within the enclosure with no provisions for drainage. Drainage openings not larger than 1/4 inch can Inspectors have been placed in a unique situation when asked to inspect a listed weatherproof box or conduit body that someone has modified by drilling holes in it to provide proper drainage. Do the holes void the listing of the product? Does the manufacturer approve the idea of drilling drain holes in the box? The new text added to will now clearly permit drain holes to be drilled in boxes or conduit bodies in damp and wet locations. be installed in boxes or conduit bodies listed for use in damp or wet locations. Section now states that: approved drainage openings not larger than 6 mm (1â 4 in.) shall be permitted to be installed in the field in boxes or conduit bodies listed for use in damp or wet locations. For installation of listed drain fittings, larger openings are permitted to be installed in the field in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Page 71 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

72 Question 137: Which of the following installations meets the intent of section ? A: A 1/2 inch hole drilled into the bottom of a weatherproof junction box. B: A 1/4 inch hole drilled into the top of a weatherproof junction box. C: A 1/4 inch hole drilled into the bottom of a weatherproof junction box. D: A 1/2 inch hole drilled into the bottom of a weatherproof junction box for an unlisted drain fitting. Question 138: Covers and Canopies. Question ID#: New Code language in section addresses a common Code violation regarding the use of incorrect screws to fasten canopies, covers, or lampholders to junction boxes. Section states that in completed installations, each box shall have a cover, faceplate, lampholder, or luminaire canopy, except where the installation complies with (B). Section (B) is for installations where a surface mounted fixture is installed and covers the junction box but the fixture is not physically attached to the box. Screws used for attaching covers to the box The new text in requires that screws used for the purpose of attaching covers or other equipment to the box shall be either machine screws matching the thread gauge or size that is integral to the box or shall be according to the manufacturer's instructions. must be machine screws matching the thread gauge or whatever is required by the manufacturer's instructions. It is all too common for an installer to use drywall screws or other screws that may be convenient when fastening a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy to a junction box rather than using the correct machine screw for the application. Boxes that have had a drywall screw used for this purpose instead of the correct machine screw can be damaged by the screw threads. When this happens the correct machine screw can never be used in those boxes again. Question 138: If a junction box is equipped with threaded holes with an 8-32 thread pitch for the purpose of securing the cover, what can be used to secure the cover to the box? A: Machine screws that match the threads in the box. B: Standard drywall screws. C: A self-threading sheet metal screw. D: A larger machine screw with an thread pitch. Page 72 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

73 Question 139: (A)(1) Vertical Surface Outlets. Question ID#: The title and text of (A)(1) were changed to include a vertical surface that is not necessarily a wall. This is to recognize that luminaires or lampholders may be mounted on interior posts or columns that are not necessarily walls. The basic provisions of the section have not changed. The section now reads: Boxes used at luminaire or lampholder outlets in or on a vertical surface shall be identified and marked on the interior of the box to indicate the maximum weight of the luminaire that is permitted to be supported by the box, if other than 50 pounds. Basically, the box requires the weight marking if it is unable to hold up a 50 pound luminaire. If it can support up to 50 pounds, then no weight marking is required. The requirements for wall outlets have now been expanded to include all vertical surfaces. The exception has been reworded to say, a vertically mounted luminaire or lampholder weighing not more than 6 pounds shall be permitted to be supported on other boxes or plaster rings that are secured to other boxes, provided the luminaire or its supporting yoke, or the lampholder, is secured to the box with no fewer than two number 6 or larger screws. This editorial change means that the same rules for mounting outlet boxes in a wall now apply to any vertical surface, such as panels, posts, or columns. Question 139: Which of the following installations is a Code violation? A: A 5 lb. luminaire secured with No. 4 screws to a device box mounted on a vertical column. B: A round metal box that is identified and marked on the interior of the box for support of a 20 pound luminaire mounted in the wall and used for a luminaire weighing 8 lbs. that is secured to the box with No. 8 screws. C: A round metal box that is identified and marked on the interior of the box for support of a 20 pound luminaire mounted in the wall and used for a luminaire weighing 12 lbs. that is secured to the box with No. 10 screws. D: A 5 lb. luminaire secured with No. 6 screws to a device box mounted on a vertical column. Question 140: (C) Boxes at Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fan Outlets. Question ID#: The term "two-family" has been added to the second paragraph in section (C) which describes ceiling boxes that contain spare, separately switched, ungrounded conductors. New provisions in the 2011 Code required that if spare, separately switched, ungrounded conductors were provided to a ceiling mounted outlet box, in a location acceptable for a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan in single or multi-family dwellings, the outlet box or outlet box system had to be listed for the sole support of a ceiling suspended (paddle) fan. This requirement applied only to single- or multi-family dwellings and failed to mention two-family dwellings. The requirement for a box listed for support of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan now also applies to two-family dwellings. It has become a common practice during new home construction for a homebuilder to offer prewiring for future ceiling fans as part of an upgrade package to new homeowners. Prior to the 2011 Code, it was also commonplace to find that an electrician had provided spare separately switched ungrounded conductors to an unused ceiling box and placed a blank plate on it for future use. The requirement to install a listed ceiling fan box when spare, separately switched conductors were provided in the box was to prevent homeowners from installing ceiling fans at existing plastic ceiling boxes. Page 73 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

74 Question 140: Which of the following ceiling boxes are required to be fan rated? A: A box installed for future use in a two-family dwelling 6 inches from a wall. B: A box installed in a two-family dwelling in the middle of a room and supplied with a spare, separately switched ungrounded conductor. C: A box installed for future use in a single-family dwelling 7 feet above a bathtub. D: A box installed in a single-family dwelling over a doorway and supplied with a separately switched ungrounded conductor. Question 141: (A)(3) Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Minimum Size. Smaller Dimensions. Question ID#: Conduit bodies that have smaller dimensions than those required for angle pulls made in pull and junction boxes are now permitted if the conduit body is shaped in such a way that the radius of the curve of the conduit body matches the sweep of a conduit bent with a one-shot or full-shoe bender, per Table 2 of Chapter 9. If the dimensions of the conduit body are less than what is required for angle pulls in boxes, then the conduit bodies must be marked to show they have been evaluated accordingly. Smaller dimension conduit bodies will have to be marked to either show they have been evaluated or show the maximum number and size of conductors permitted. If the permitted combinations of conductors is less than the maximum raceway fill from Table 1 in Chapter 9, the conduit body must be permanently marked with the maximum number and maximum size of conductors permitted. For example, if considering using an angle pull with 2 inch conduit and a pull box, and the rule in (A)(2) requires the distance from the entering raceway and the opposite wall of the box to be at least 12 inches (2 inch raceway X 6 = 12 inches to opposite wall). A smaller conduit body would be permitted to be used as long as it met the minimum dimensions for a one shot or full shoe bend listed in Table 2 of Chapter 9. This bending radius is no different than the minimum bending radius allowed for field bends made in IMC, RMC, or EMT. In some cases, it may be necessary to use a smaller conduit body where limited space prohibits making an angle pull with a large pull box. Question 141: What is required of a 2 inch conduit body with dimensions less than those required for an angle pull in a pull box that is being used to enclose an angle pull with No. 4 AWG aluminum conductors? A: Since there are no splices in the conduit body, no marking is required. B: The conduit body must have an area of 2.3 sq. in. C: It must have a radius of curve to centerline not less than that indicated in Table 2 of Chapter 9 for one-shot and full-shoe benders. D: The conduit body must be marked to show that it has been specifically evaluated for at least a 8 1/4 inch bend per Chapter 9, Table 2. Page 74 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

75 Question 142: Floor Coverings. Question ID#: Section spells out requirements for carpet squares installed over flat conductor cables (FCC) and has been revised to be more consistent with common sizes of carpet squares based on the metric system. The previous Code language required flat conductor cables to be covered with carpet squares not larger than 914 mm or 36 inches square. The revised text states that floor-mounted Type FCC cable, cable connectors, and insulating ends shall be covered with carpet squares not larger than 1.0 meters (39.37 inches) square. Carpet squares that are adhered to the floor shall be attached with release-type adhesives. Floor-mounted FCC cable cannot be covered with carpet squares larger than 1.0 m square. In the NEC, the International System of Units (SI) is used for metric units of measurement. The SI units appear first, and the English System units immediately follow in parentheses. Example: 1.0 m (39.37 in.) square. The previous carpet square size requirements in section were based on 36 inches square which had a metric equivalent of 914 mm. These measurements conflicted with commonly sized carpet squares that are manufactured according to the SI system. Outside of the United States, the metric system is the most widely used system of measurement. Changing to allow carpet squares no larger than 1.0 meters or inches square permits a greater number of manufacturers that produce modular carpet products to make common sizes of carpet squares based on metric measurements that will comply with section without having to produce special size carpet squares measured in inches square that are likely to be used only in the United States. Question 142: Which of the following carpet squares can be used to cover a section of flat conductor cable? A: One that is 1.1 meters square. B: One that is 40 inches X 40 inches. C: One that is 1600 square inches. D: One that is 1 meter x 1 meter. Question 143: (B) Securing and Supporting. Securing. Question ID#: The requirements for securing vertical installations of Type MC Cable have been modified by changing the spacing requirement for supports for cables that contain ungrounded conductors 250 kcmil and larger. The 2014 NEC now permits a maximum interval of 10 feet between supports securing vertical installations of Type MC cable that contain ungrounded conductors that are 250 kcmil or larger. In previous editions of the NEC, the maximum interval between supports for Type MC cable was 6 feet regardless of the size of conductors. For large cables, vertical installations of MC cable can be secured at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Type MC cable is being used extensively in high rise construction projects primarily because of the lower installation costs compared to the cost of installing metal raceways and then pulling conductors into the raceways. Because of special manufacturing techniques used for MC cable that contains larger conductors, securing the MC cable every 10 ft. would still support the cable, would be adequate to limit movement of the cable during fault conditions, and would meet the requirements of for mechanical execution of work. The requirements for supporting and securing horizontal runs of Type MC cable through metal or wood framing members have not changed. The cable is considered as supported and secured provided the interval between such supports does not exceed 6 feet. Type MC cable with fewer than 5 conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller are still required to be secured within 12 inches of boxes, cabinets, fittings, Page 75 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

76 and other cable terminations. Question 143: What is the maximum interval between supports used to secure vertical runs of Type MC cable that contain 3 ungrounded 400 kcmil conductors? A: 3 feet. B: 12 inches. C: 10 feet. D: 6 feet. Question 144: (D)(3) Securing and Supporting. Unsupported cables. Question ID#: Section (D)(3) was added in the 2014 NEC and now allows metal clad cable (type MC) to be installed without support where flexibility is necessary. For many Code cycles, type MC cable has been permitted to remain unsupported under the following two conditions: There are now three conditions where type MC cable can be unsupported. - Where the cable is fished between access points through concealed spaces in finished buildings if supporting is impractical. - Where the cable is not more than 1.8 m (6 ft.) in length from the last point of cable support to the point of connection to luminaires or other electrical equipment within an accessible ceiling. An additional allowance has now been made in (D)(3) for the installation of MC cable where flexibility is important. The new Code change states that MC cable can remain unsupported if it is of the interlocked armor type in lengths not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft.). The 3 ft. is measured from the last point where it is securely fastened to the equipment where flexibility is necessary. MC cable can be in the form of a smooth metal sheath, corrugated metal sheath, or interlocking metal tape armor. Interlocking metal armor type MC cable has a similar sheath to that of flexible metal conduit and stands up well to movement or vibration. Question 144: A section of interlocked type MC cable, used to supply an air compressor, can be unsupported from the last fastening point for what maximum distance? A: 2 feet. B: 6 feet. C: 3 feet. D: 4 feet. Page 76 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

77 Question 145: Installation. Uses Permitted. Question ID#: A revision has been made in Section regarding the permitted use of nonmetallic sheathed cable in order to help clarify the limitations of these types of cables. Type NM, type NMC, and type NMS cables are permitted to be used in five conditions, except as prohibited in Section provides 5 locations where nonmetallic sheathed cable is permitted to be used. In previous Code editions, the phrase "except as prohibited in " was only seen after subsections 2 and 3, leading the user to believe that the references to , Uses Not Permitted, were only valid if the installation was a multi-family dwelling or "other structure of types III, IV or V construction". A description of construction types is in Informative Annex E, Table E.1, E. 2, & E3 on pages of the 2014 NEC. Now the Code states that type NM, type NMC, and type NMS cables are permitted to be used in the following, except as prohibited in : - One- and two-family dwellings and their attached or detached garages, and their storage buildings. - Multi-family dwellings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V construction. - Other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V construction. Cables shall be concealed within walls, floors, or ceilings that provide a thermal barrier of material that has at least a 15-minute finish rating as identified in listings of fire-rated assemblies. - Cable trays in structures permitted to be Types III, IV, or V where the cables are identified for the use. - Types I and II construction where installed within raceways permitted to be installed in Types I and II construction. Changing the location of the phrase "except as prohibited in " to the introductory sentence in makes it clear that these types of cables can be installed in any of the above 5 locations as long as none of the 5 locations conflict with the rules in for uses not permitted. For example, type NM cable is permitted to be used as the wiring method for a storage building at a dwelling unit, but if the building contains corrosive products, then according to (B), this type of cable cannot be used. Prior to this Code change, this practice was not specifically prohibited. Question 145: When is type NMC cable permitted to be used in a cable tray, installed in an office building of type IV construction? A: When it is installed above a suspended ceiling. B: When it does not conflict with the requirements in C: When it has a 15-minute finish rating. D: When it is identified for the use. Page 77 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

78 Question 146: (B) Boxes and Fittings. Devices of Insulating Material. Question ID#: For many years the NEC has allowed nonmetallic-sheathed cable to be joined by splicing-type devices without boxes and concealed within walls of existing buildings. Although not a very widespread practice, and most commonly seen in repair wiring for mobile homes, section (B) permits the use of these types of splicing devices but only under certain conditions. The new changes in section (B) specify (1) what types of splicing devices are permitted to be used, (2) add a listing requirement, and (3) clarify that the concealed wiring repaired by these splicing devices is not limited to only those cables that have been fished. Listed self-contained switches, self-contained receptacles, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable interconnector devices can be used without boxes in exposed cable wiring. The revised text states that self-contained switches, self-contained receptacles, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable interconnector devices made of insulating material that are listed shall be permitted to be used without boxes in exposed cable wiring and for repair wiring in existing buildings where the cable is concealed. Openings in such devices shall form a close fit around the outer covering of the cable, and the device shall fully enclose the part of the cable from which any part of the covering has been removed. Where connections to conductors are by binding-screw terminals, there must be at least one available terminal for each conductor. Question 146: Which of the following devices are NOT allowed to be used to repair nonmetallic-sheathed cables if concealed within a wall of an existing building without a junction box? A: Listed self-contained receptacles. B: Listed self-contained switches. C: Listed nonmetallic sheathed cable interconnector devices. D: Listed electrical wire nuts. Question 147: Definition. Rigid Metal Conduit. Construction. Question ID#: This minor revision took the 4 types of RMC out of the definition of rigid metal conduit at and created a new section at which is in Part III, Construction Specifications. The 4 types of rigid metal conduit (RMC) are: - Steel (ferrous) with or without a protective coating. - Aluminum (nonferrous). - Red brass. - Stainless-steel. RMC can be threaded and used for grounding equipment as well as routing and protecting According to , galvanized steel and stainless steel RMC can be used under all atmospheric conditions and occupancies. Red brass RMC is permitted for direct burial and swimming pool applications. Aluminum RMC is permitted where judged suitable for the environment. When encased in concrete or in direct contact with the earth, aluminum RMC must be provided with supplementary corrosion protection. cable and conductors. The revised definition of RMC in Section defines it as a metal raceway that has a circular cross-section that can be threaded. Rigid metal conduit is permitted to be used for routing and protecting both cables and conductors. When installed according to Article 250, rigid metal conduit can also be used as an equipment grounding conductor. Page 78 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

79 Question 147: Which of the following statements about rigid metal conduit (RMC) is correct? A: The NEC does not permit RMC to be used as an equipment grounding conductor. B: RMC is manufactured to have both a rectangular and a circular cross-section. C: RMC is threadable. D: The NEC does not permit cables to be installed in RMC. Question 148: (A) Exception No. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit. Securing and Supporting. Securely Fastened. Question ID#: Section (A) specifies the requirements for installing and securing Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). The change to Exception No. 4 clarifies how FMC can be connected to lay-in type luminaires and other equipment above a suspended ceiling. The general requirements for installing FMC are that it be secured within 12 inches of where it connects to cabinets, boxes, conduit bodies, or other equipment and that it be secured and supported at least every 4 1/2 feet. There are four exceptions to these general requirements. According to Exception 4, listed flexible metal conduit fittings can be used as a means of Exceptions 1-3 are unchanged: support for 6 ft. lengths of FMC. - Ex. No. 1 permits FMC to be unsupported where it is "fished" and supports are impracticable. - Ex. No. 2 permits different sizes of FMC to be unsupported for various lengths where flexibility is required after it is installed ( 3 ft. for 1/2 to 1-1/4 in. trade size, 4 ft. for 1-1/2 to 2 in. trade size, 5 ft. for trade size 2-1/2 in. and larger). - Ex. No. 3 permits lengths of up to 6 feet to be unsupported from where it is connected to a luminaire to where conductors are tapped. Exception No. 4 allows lengths of FMC, commonly called "fixture whips," to be installed in lengths of up to 6 feet and be unsupported between the last point where the flex is secured and the luminaire itself. The last sentence in Exception No. 4 mentions that listed FMC ï ttings, used to secure the FMC to a box or luminaire, are considered as a means of support. This change brings the requirements for installing FMC in line with the requirements for installing Type AC and Type MC cable. Question 148: When installed above an accessible suspended ceiling, and listed fittings are used, what is the maximum length of a piece of unsupported FMC between a junction box and a luminaire? A: 6 feet. B: 3 feet. C: 12 inches. D: 4 1/2 feet. Page 79 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

80 Question 149: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Couplings and Connectors. Question ID#: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) is approved for direct burial where it is listed and marked for the purpose. Now straight LFMC fittings are approved for direct burial where marked. Only fittings which are listed for use with LFMC can be used. Angle connectors for LFMC conduit cannot be concealed. Since burying an LFMC angle connector would be concealing it, angle connectors are not permitted to be buried. Section Couplings and Connectors now reads: Straight LFMC fittings are approved for direct burial where marked; angle fittings are not permitted. Only fittings listed for use with LFMC shall be used. Angle connectors shall not be concealed. Straight LFMC fittings shall be permitted for direct burial where marked. Straight, non-angle fittings can be buried only where marked, meaning that the manufacturer has used "suitable for direct burial" or equivalent wording on the fitting or on the packaging. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC) fittings are not to be used with LFMC. The two wiring methods have a similar outward appearance, but LFNC does not have a metal sheathing under the outer liquid-tight jacket. LFMC and LFNC are permitted for direct burial. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) and flexible metal tubing (FMT) are not permitted for direct burial, and misapplication of these wiring methods could require extensive rework or create a hazardous condition. Question 149: Which of the following is permitted for direct burial? A: Flexible Metal Conduit. B: Angle fittings listed for use with LFMC. C: Flexible Metal Tubing. D: Straight LFMC fittings where marked for direct burial. Question 150: Article 370 Cablebus. Question ID#: Article 370, Cablebus, has been reorganized to follow the format used for other wiring methods in Chapter 3. There are not technical changes to the Article, but now Article 370, Cablebus, is similar to Article 392, Cable Trays, (the other cable support system) and the rest of Chapter 3, Wiring Methods and Materials. Article 370 has been reorganized to a more user-friendly format. A common standard format for Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials makes the NEC much more user-friendly. If similar information is located in the same place, no matter what type of wiring method is being used, the information becomes a lot easier to find. For example, a question about how Cablebus or Cable Tray should be secured or supported can be answered in for Cablebus and for Cable Tray. Like many Articles in Chapter 3, Uses Permitted for Cablebus is located in and Uses Not Permitted is in The new format for Article 370 is: Part I General.1 Scope.2 Definition Part II Installation Page 80 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

81 .10 Uses Permitted.12 Uses Not Permitted.18 Installation.20 Conductor Size and Termination.22 Number of Conductors.23 Overcurrent Protection.30 Securing and Supporting.42 Fittings.60 Grounding.80 Ampacity of Conductors Part III Construction Specifications.120 Marking Question 150: Where is the following statement located? "Cablebus framework, where bonded, shall be permitted to be used as the equipment grounding conductor for branch circuits and feeders." A: B: C: D: Question 151: (B) Number of Conductors and Ampacity. Adjustment Factors. Question ID#: The ampacity of conductors inside a metal wireway will need to be adjusted if the number of current-carrying conductors inside the metal wireway exceeds 30 at any cross section of the wireway. Conductors for signaling circuits, conductors used only for starting a motor, and neutral conductors that carry only the unbalanced load are not considered current carrying conductors. The 2011 NEC required the ampacity of conductors inside of a metal wireway to be adjusted if the total number of conductors inside the wireway was greater than 30. By adding "at any cross section of the wireway" the 2014 NEC will limit when ampacity adjustment factors will be required to be applied for metal wireways. For example, if in a wireway there are a total of 50 wires, but no more than 25 wires at any cross section, no ampacity adjustment is necessary. This is important because the ampacity adjustment factors in Table (B)(3)(a) for conductors is 40% and for 41 conductors and above the adjustment factor is 35%. Ampacity of conductors inside a metal wireway will be adjusted if there are more than 30 current-carrying conductors at any cross section of the wireway. If for instance there are 38, No. 3 conductors, rated at 100 amps each from Table (B)(16), but no more than 12 conductors at any cross section, in the 2011 Code each conductor could only carry 40 amps (100 amps x 40%), but in the 2014 each conductor could carry the full 100 amps because no ampacity adjustment is required. Another example: if there are 42 conductors at any cross section of a wireway, and each conductor is rated at 130 amps, the maximum amount of current each conductor can carry is 45.5 amps (130 amps x 0.35). Question 151: How much current can a conductor which is rated for 65 amps carry if it is installed in a metal wireway with 35 other conductors, but there are never more than 20 conductors at any cross section of the wireway? A: 35 amps. B: 65 amps. C: 26 amps. D: 52 amps. Page 81 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

82 Question 152: (B)(5) Power Distribution Blocks. Conductors. Question ID#: Section (B)(5) now states: Conductors. Conductors shall be arranged so the power distribution block terminals are unobstructed following installation. At times it becomes necessary to service or test the terminals on a power distribution block that is installed in a metal wireway. If wires that don't terminate in the wireway obstruct the power distribution block terminals, the individual performing the servicing or testing process would have to move the wires, which can cause an arc-flash or shock hazard. Power distribution blocks on the line side of service equipment need to be listed for the purpose. In the initial installation, if the wires are arranged so as to not block the terminals, servicing and testing can be done safely. A good preventive maintenance program will include torqueing the terminals. If the terminals are partially blocked by conductors passing through the wireway, it's possible for the electrician's wrench to slip and ground out the live terminals. The language in Section (B)(5) is intended to reduce the possibility of this safety hazard. Power distribution blocks with setscrews are an improvement over the older method of connecting conductors by means of split-bolt connectors wrapped in electrical tape. However, as this new wording suggests, a proper installation can prevent trouble later on when the equipment must be serviced. Power distribution blocks that are listed for the location and purpose for which they are used are permitted to be installed in wireways on the line or on the load side of service equipment. Whether or not the wireway covers are installed, power distribution blocks are not permitted to have uninsulated live(energized) parts exposed. Question 152: Which of the following statements about installing conductors in metal wireways is correct? A: A 3 inch clearance above and below terminal blocks must be maintained. B: When terminal blocks are installed in a wireway, conductors which pass through the wireway are not permitted. C: All conductors in a metal wireway must terminate at terminal blocks. D: Conductors which pass through a wireway cannot interfere with servicing the terminal blocks. Question 153: Surface Metal Raceways. Marking. Question ID#: Section was revised to require that surface metal raceways be marked to indicate the name of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's trademark, or other markings to identify the company that manufactured the raceway. Prior to this change no marking was required for surface metal raceway. Now the requirements for surface metal raceway are in line with the requirements for other electrical equipment; Section requires that electrical products be marked to identify the manufacturer in some way. Surface metal raceway needs to be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name. Unlike clothing manufacturers, who have turned putting their names and logos on shoes, jackets, and t-shirts into a fashion statement, manufacturers of surface metal raceway have never put identifying markings on their product. This is probably because surface metal raceway such as Wiremold is commonly installed without being painted; it comes in colors that blend well with existing wall surfaces. It is impossible for installers and inspectors to know whether a product is listed for use in a particular installation if they cannot identify the product. Requiring surface metal raceway to be marked to identify its manufacturer makes it easier for both installers and inspectors to avoid accepting imitation products that are being imported and sold without having been evaluated by a recognized testing Page 82 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

83 organization such as ETLÂ, or ULÂ. Question 153: Surface metal raceway is required to be marked with: A: The manufacturer's trademark only. B: The manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking that identifies the manufacturer. C: The manufacturer's logo only. D: The manufacturer's name only. Question 154: (H) Cable Tray Installation. Marking. Question ID#: Cable trays containing conductors rated over 600 volts that are installed in industrial establishments where only qualified persons service the installation, and where the cable trays are not accessible, are not required to have high voltage warnings posted every 10 ft. This is a new exception to the requirement that warning signs that read, DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP AWAY, are to be posted at least every 10 ft. on cable trays that contain conductors rated over 600 volts. The exception is for industrial locations where qualified persons service the installation. In these facilities, the warning signs shall be located where necessary for the installation to ensure safe maintenance and operation. An exception to the marking requirements for cable trays has been added for industrial establishments. If the cable tray is not accessible (as applied to equipment), the warning signs are not required at least every 10 ft. As applied to equipment, accessible means the equipment is not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means. Most cable trays are mounted high enough that a ladder or lift would be required to inspect the cable tray. At such an elevation the cable tray would not be considered accessible, and the high voltage warning signs are not necessary within every 10 ft. Industrial establishments that have professional engineering and maintenance personnel are allowed exceptions to certain standard Code installation standards. For example, industrial manufacturing plants are permitted to use a wider range of installation practices for high voltage and hazardous location equipment than would be allowed in non-industrial locations. Question 154: Which of the following installations complies with Section (H)? A: A cable tray installation in an industrial establishment that is not accessible and contains conductors rated over 600 volts and the warning notices are adequate for the site to ensure safe maintenance and operation. B: A cable tray installation containing conductors rated over 600 volts in an industrial facility where there are no warning notices. C: A cable tray installation containing conductors rated over 600 volts in a commercial establishment with warning notices spaced 15 ft. apart. D: A cable tray installation containing conductors rated over 600 volts in a commercial establishment with warning notices spaced 12 ft. apart. Page 83 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

84 Question 155: (A)&(B) Multiconductor Cables Operating at 600 Volts or Less. Cables Operating at Over 600 Volts. Question ID#: Cables in cable tray or raceway are often operated at voltages less than the voltage rating of the cable. A cable that is rated for 600 volts might be operated at 480 volts. A cable that is rated for 5000 volts might be operated at 2000 volts. There is a big difference between the voltage rating of a cable and the voltage at which the cable operates. The revisions to this section changed the yardstick that is used to determine how multiconductor cable is installed in cable tray from the voltage rating of the cable to the circuit operating voltage. Cables operating at 600 volts or less are permitted to be installed with those operating at over 600 volts if they are separated with a barrier. Conductors that operate at over 600 volts must be separated from conductors operating at 600 volts or less if installed in the same cable tray. Either the cables operating at over 600 volts must be installed in MC cable, or a permanent barrier must be installed between the cables operating at 600 volts or less and the cables operating at over 600 volts. These requirements add cost and complexity to a job. Under the 2011 NEC, if some cables were rated for over 600 volts, even if the circuit voltage for all the cables in the cable tray was 480 volts, the cables that were rated for over 600 volts had to be separated from the cables with a 600 volt rating. Now, even if some of the cables in the cable tray have a voltage rating of more than 600 volts, and some of the cables have a voltage rating of 600 volts or below, if the operating voltage for all cables in the tray is 600 volts or below, the cables are not required to be separated. Question 155: The OPERATING VOLTAGE for all cables in a cable tray is 480 volts. One cable in the tray is RATED for 2000 volts and the other is RATED at 600 volts. Which of the following statements is correct? A: Cables with different voltage ratings cannot be installed in the same cable tray. B: The cable with the higher voltage rating must be installed in MC cable. C: The cables may be installed in the cable tray without a fixed barrier. D: The cables with different voltage ratings must be separated by a fixed barrier. Question 156: Article 393 Low Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power Distribution Systems. Question ID#: Low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution systems use special ceiling grid rails as a bus to distribute low voltage power throughout a suspended ceiling. Luminaires and other low voltage equipment and sensors are electrically connected to the grid with special connectors. This system is well suited for LED luminaires. Low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution systems are permitted to supply With a low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution system in place, luminaires can be easily repositioned when a building tenant wants to change the layout of a room. Without changing the grid, the luminaires can be moved around by simply connecting the luminaire to a different point on the grid. Operating voltages of 30 VAC or 60 VDC mean the risk of electric shock will be much less than with standard 120 or 277 AC voltages. Qualified electricians will install the low voltage bus that attaches to the ceiling grid. Other trades will install the ceiling grid. listed utilization equipment in indoor dry locations, for residential, commercial, or industrial installations. A standard branch circuit will supply the listed Class 2 power supply for the ceiling grid bus. A power distribution cable or connector will connect the power supply to the busbar. Low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution systems are permitted to supply listed utilization equipment in indoor dry locations, for residential, commercial, or industrial installations, and in other spaces used for environmental air. The systems are NOT permitted in damp or wet locations, where subject to corrosive fumes or Page 84 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

85 physical damage, in concealed or classified locations, for lighting in critical or general care areas of a health care facility, or as part of a fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly. Question 156: Where can low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution systems be installed? A: In a Class I, Division 2 location. B: In a wet or damp location. C: In a battery room with corrosive fumes. D: Inside an office building. Chapter 3 - Additional Questions Question 157: (D)(3) Securing and Supporting. Unsupported cables. Question ID#: Question 157: Which type of cable is permitted to be unsupported for the last 3 feet before it connects to equipment that requires movement after installation? A: MC cable with an interlocking metal sheath. B: Any type of listed MC cable. C: Type NM cable. D: Type MC cable with a smooth metal sheath. Question 158: (B) Number of Conductors and Ampacity. Adjustment Factors. Question ID#: Question 158: How much current can a conductor which is rated for 85 amps carry if it is installed in a metal wireway and there are 42 conductors at a cross section of the wireway? A: amps. B: 68.5 amps. C: amps. D: 85 amps. Question 159: (B)(3)(c) Exception And Table. Raceways and Cables Exposed to Sunlight on Rooftops. Question ID#: Question 159: What is the total ambient temperature that must be used for Type XHHW-2 conductors in a raceway that is mounted 1 inch above a rooftop and the ambient temperature is 85Â F? A: 115Â F. B: 125Â F. C: 85Â F. D: 145Â F. Question 160: (A)&(B) Multiconductor Cables Operating at 600 Volts or Less. Cables Operating at Over 600 Volts. Question ID#: Page 85 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

86 Question 160: If a cable tray contains some multiconductor cables operating at 480 volts and some cables operating in excess of 600 volts, which of the following statements is correct? A: The installation complies with the NEC requirements only if all of the cables are Type MC cables. B: All cables have to have to be rated for the highest voltage on any cable in the cable tray. C: The installation complies with NEC requirements if cables operating in excess of 600 volts are separated from the cables operating at 600 volts or below by a fixed barrier. D: The installation complies with NEC requirements as long as each cable is operated at or below its voltage rating. Question 161: (C) Boxes at Ceiling-Suspended (Paddle) Fan Outlets. Question ID#: Question 161: If placed in a location acceptable for a ceiling fan, what is required of a junction box installed in the ceiling of a single-family dwelling where spare, separately switched, ungrounded conductors occupy the box? A: The box must be listed if it supports more than 35 lb. B: The outlet box must be listed for sole support of a ceiling fan. C: If the box is supporting a 35 lb. ceiling fan, the marking on the box shall include the maximum weight to be supported. D: The outlet box must be rated to handle at least 70 lb. Question 162: (B)(7) 120/240-Volt, Single-Phase Dwelling Services and Feeders. Question ID#: Question 162: What are the minimum size aluminum service conductors for a 400-amp service, 120/240 volt, 3-wire, single-phase, where the conductors carry the entire load of the dwelling? A: 600 kcmil. B: 500 kcmil. C: 300 kcmil. D: 4/0. Question 163: Table (B)(3)(a) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors. Question ID#: Question 163: According to Section (B)(3)(a), what percentage is required to be used when applying correction factors to 10 current-carrying conductors installed in electrical metallic tubing if only 8 of them can be energized at the same time? A: 70%. B: 50%. C: 45%. D: No correction factors are needed. Question 164: (B)(1) Securing and Supporting. Raceways Used as Means of Support. Question ID#: Question 164: EMT is permitted to be used to support MC cables under what condition? A: It must be identified as a means of support. B: It must be approved for the intended use. C: It must be listed. D: It must be identified for the purpose. Page 86 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

87 Question 165: (A)(3) Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Minimum Size. Smaller Dimensions. Question ID#: Question 165: What is required of a 3 inch conduit body with smaller dimensions than required for a standard angle pull being used to make a right angle bend for a set of 3/0 THWN conductors? A: The conduit body must be marked to show the maximum number and maximum size of the conductors which are permitted. B: The conduit body must have a radius of at least 15 inches. C: The conduit body must have 18 inches from raceway entry to opposite wall. D: The conduit body must have a radius of at least 16 inches. Question 166: Covers and Canopies. Question ID#: Question 166: When can machine screws be used to secure a luminaire canopy to a junction box? A: When it matches the thread gauge of the box it is being used on. B: When the screw has a green finish and is listed for use with electrical applications. C: Only when the box is made of plastic. D: Never. Question 167: (A)(1) Vertical Surface Outlets. Question ID#: Question 167: Which of the following statements is true? A: An identified box that supports a luminaire weighing 35 lbs. must be marked with the maximum weight permitted. B: Identified luminaire boxes can be mounted on walls or columns. C: All boxes mounted on vertical surfaces and used for luminaires must be identified as luminaire boxes. D: Plaster rings are not permitted on boxes used to support luminaires that weigh 6 lbs. or less and are mounted on a vertical surface. Question 168: (C)(1) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). Wiring Methods. Question ID#: Question 168: Which of the following statements about plastic cable ties that are used to support cables within a plenum is true? A: They must be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties. B: The Authority Having Jurisdiction determines if the cable ties produce too much smoke. C: They must have a flame spread level of less than 50. D: They must have a smoke density level of less than 15. Question 169: Article 393 Low Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power Distribution Systems. Question ID#: Page 87 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

88 Question 169: Where are low-voltage suspended ceiling power distribution systems NOT permitted to be installed? A: In a business office. B: In a restaurant dining room. C: In a school auditorium. D: In a storage area classified as a Class 3, Division 2 location. Question 170: Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade. Question ID#: Question 170: Which of the following statements about an underground feeder to a 4160 volt transformer is true? A: When installed in PVC conduit, the conductors are required to be listed for a wet location. B: The conductors must be listed for a wet location only if the conduit is buried less than 24 in. deep. C: If installed in cable, the conductors are not required to be listed for a wet location. D: If installed in liquidtight flexible metal conduit, the conductors are not required to be listed for a wet location. Question 171: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Couplings and Connectors. Question ID#: Question 171: Which of the following is NOT permitted for direct burial? A: LFNC. B: LFMC straight fittings where marked for direct burial. C: LFMC angle fittings. D: LFMC. Question 172: Damp or Wet Locations. Question ID#: Question 172: Which of the following is permitted to have drainage openings field installed? A: A 4 inch square junction box, listed for dry locations. B: A junction box or conduit body that is listed for wet or damp locations. C: A section of EMT conduit that is listed for wet locations and installed outside. D: A 1 inch raceway fitting that is listed only for dry locations. Question 173: Installation. Uses Permitted. Question ID#: Question 173: When is type NMS cable permitted to be used as a wiring method in a 3 story commercial occupancy of type V construction? A: When installed above a suspended ceiling. B: When identified as a fire-rated cable. C: When concealed within a wall that provides a 15-minute finish rating D: Never. Chapter 4 Page 88 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

89 Question 174: Flexible Cords and Cables. Types. Question ID#: Section and Table are easier to understand in the 2014 NEC. In the 2011 NEC, section read: Flexible cords and flexible cables shall conform to the description in Table Types of flexible cords and flexible cables other than those listed in the table shall be the subject of special investigation. In the 2014 NEC section reads: The use of flexible cords and flexible cables other than those in Table shall require permission by the authority having jurisdiction. Special use of flexible cords and cables needs to be approved by the AHJ. The 2014 version is better because the use of the term "listed" was confusing. Also, "the subject of special investigation" was very unclear. Who was going to do the investigation? The FBI? The Authority Having Jurisdiction is clearly the agency that should determine if a special type of cord or cable can be used. Table has been changed to include No. 15 AWG conductors. For each type of cord or cable, the size in AWG or kcmil did not include 15 AWG. The size of the conductors inside the cord were listed in ranges that did not include 15 AWG. For example, the sizes of cable were listed as and AWG. The ampacity of a 15 AWG conductor inside a flexible cord or cable is given in Table 400.5(A)(1), so it makes sense that a 15 AWG conductor size is included in Table Question 174: Which of the following statements about flexible cords and cables is true? A: If a type of cord or cable is in Table 400.4, it can be used without special permission. B: 15 AWG conductors are not permitted in flexible cords and cables. C: Flexible cords and cables that are in Table require special permission. D: The insulation thickness for conductors inside flexible cords and cables is the same for all conductor sizes. Question 175: 400.7(A)(11) Flexible Cords and Cables. Uses Permitted. Question ID#: New text added in Section 400.7(A)(11) states that: 400.7(A)(11) Between an existing receptacle outlet and an inlet, where the inlet provides power to an additional single receptacle outlet. The wiring interconnecting the inlet to the single receptacle outlet shall be a Chapter 3 wiring method. The inlet, receptacle outlet, and Chapter 3 wiring method, including the flexible cord and fittings, shall be a listed assembly specific for this application. There are listed products, like Legrand's Flat Screen TV Cord and Cable Power Kit, that are available to connect wall-mounted flat screen TVs without wires showing on the outside of the wall. Do-it-yourself homeowners were using extension cords installed inside a wall to connect a wall-mounted flat screen TV to an existing receptacle outlet, so that cords did not show outside the wall. This is a clear violation of section 400.8, Uses Not Permitted for flexible cords and cables. The inlet, receptacle outlet, and wiring method need to be a listed assembly specific for the application. A listed power and cable kit, consisting of a cable installed inside the wall that connects a flanged inlet to an existing receptacle, will now be one of the uses permitted for flexible cords and cables. Page 89 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

90 Question 175: When connecting a wall-mounted flat screen TV to a receptacle outlet which of the following methods is not permitted? A: Installing a standard extension cord inside the wall between the TV and an existing outlet. B: Plugging the TV cord into an existing outlet with the cords on the outside of the wall. C: Installing a new receptacle outlet directly behind the flat screen TV. D: Installing a listed cord and cable power kit assembly. Question 176: 404.2(C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC, a grounded circuit conductor was first required at the switch location for a switch controlling lighting loads that are supplied by a grounded general-purpose branch circuit. The reason for the requirement is to provide a grounded conductor for an electronic control device, like an occupancy sensor, that needs a grounded conductor for the device to operate. Two conditions where the grounded circuit conductor is not required to be provided at the switch location have been carried over from the 2011 NEC. Five new conditions have been added that would make a grounded conductor at the switch location unnecessary. A grounded circuit conductor is not required at the switch location for lighting loads: There are now seven situations where a grounded circuit conductor is not required at the (1) Where the conductors enter the switch box through a raceway. switch location. (2) Where the switch box is accessible for additional cable without removing finish materials. (3) Where the switch has an integral enclosure, such as those used for doorjamb switches. (4) Where a switch does not serve a habitable room or bathroom, such as in an attic. (5) Where there is more than one switch location, such as for 3-way or 4-way switches, and the entire floor area of the room is visible from a single or combined switch locations. (6) Where the lighting in the area is controlled by automatic means, such as a ceiling mounted occupancy sensor. (7) Where a switch controls a receptacle load. One reason for requiring a grounded neutral conductor at a switch location is to provide for occupancy sensors. Therefore, it makes sense to omit a grounded conductor if there is already an occupancy sensor installed in the ceiling, if only travelers run between switch locations, such as when using a 4-way switch, and if the room with the switch is not habitable, like a closet or attic. Question 176: Assume the switches are wired with NM-Cable not installed in a raceway and that the switch boxes will be enclosed in a finished wall. When is a grounded conductor required at a switch location for a lighting load? A: When a ceiling mounted occupancy sensor automatically controls the lighting in the room. B: When the switch is installed in the living room in a dwelling. C: When the switch controls lighting in a storage closet. D: When the switch controls switched receptacles in a motel. Page 90 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

91 Chapter 4 Question 177: 404.8(C) Accessibility and Grouping. Multipole Snap Switches. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC a general use multipole snap switch could be used to control more than a single circuit if it was listed and marked as a two-circuit or three-circuit switch. A general use multipole switch could also be used to control multiple circuits if the voltage rating of the switch was not less than the line-to-line voltage of the system supplying the circuits. The 2014 NEC has deleted the permission to use a multipole switch to control more than a single circuit if the voltage rating of the switch is not less than the line-to-line voltage of the system supplying the circuits. Now the only time a general use multipole switch can be used to control multiple circuits is if the switch is listed and marked as a two-circuit or three-circuit switch. When UL and other testing agencies list a general use multipole switch as suitable for controlling more than a single circuit, they have tested the switch in many different configurations. The switch is tested on multiple or multi-phase branch circuits that control multiple or multi-phase loads of no more than 120 volts to ground and 240 volts line-to-line, 240 volts total per circuit. The switches are tested simultaneously with multiple supply and loads present to represent actual service conditions. Tests include a high current overload test and 30,000 cycles at full load for endurance. A multipole snap switch can only be fed from multiple branch circuits if it is listed and marked as a two-circuit or three-circuit switch. A general use multipole switch that is listed and marked for two- or three-circuit use has been manufactured to standards based on rigorous testing under conditions that ensure the multipole switch is suitable for the application. Question 177: Which of the following general use multipole switches could be used to control two circuits? A: A switch that was listed for 240 volts, line-to-line. B: A switch that was listed for commercial grade. C: A switch that was listed for 480 volts, line-to-line. D: A switch that was listed for two- or three-circuit operation. Question 178: (B) Mounting of Snap Switches. Box Mounted. Question ID#: Dry-wall screws are not permitted to fasten a snap switch to a box. In fact, according to this section, the screws that attach a snap switch to a box must be of the type provided with the switch, or they must be machine screws with 32 threads per inch. Screws that are provided with a switch/enclosure that is part of a listed assembly or system are also permitted. Dry-wall screws or screws with coarse threads can damage a box that is made to accept machine threads. If the box is damaged the switch will not be securely mounted to the box. Snap switches that are loose in the box or can pull out of the box are a shock hazard. A similar requirement was added to for receptacle mounting. Using dry-wall screws to attach a receptacle to a box can damage the box and cause the receptacle to separate from the box. To attach a snap switch to a box, you must use the screws provided or machine screws with 32 threads per inch. Machine screws are also required in for connecting grounding and bonding conductors to enclosures, where at least two threads are required to be engaged. Section requires machine screws to be used to attach covers and canopies to boxes. Page 91 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

92 Question 178: Which type of screw is NOT permitted to attach a snap switch to the box? A: A screw that is part of a listed switch assembly. B: A sheet metal screw. C: A machine screw. D: A screw with 32 threads per inch. Question 179: 406.3(E) Receptacle Rating and Type. Controlled Receptacle Marking. Question ID#: Nonlocking receptacles rated 125-volts, 15- and 20-amperes, that are controlled by an automatic control device like an energy management system, a timer, or an occupancy sensor, must be marked with the symbol shown below. Switched receptacles that are controlled by a wall switch and provide one of the required room lighting outlets permitted by are not required to have the marking. Energy management codes, like ASHRAE 90.1, require that up to 50% of 125-volt 15- and 20-ampere receptacles are automatically controlled. If a receptacle is being turned off or turned on automatically, the user needs to be able to identify which receptacles are being controlled. Nonlocking-type 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles that are controlled by an automatic Automatic control of lighting and HVAC loads is common. Most people know and understand that an automatic system can turn the lights off in a building and control the heating and cooling systems. control device must be marked with the new symbol. Automatically controlling a receptacle is less certain because a number of different type loads can be connected to a receptacle outlet. Table lamps are plugged into receptacle outlets and can be controlled automatically. Some types of electronic equipment, like computers, will still consume power in sleep mode and will save energy if completely turned off. Marking receptacle outlets that are controlled by an energy management system will be a convenience for users who may see luminaires or appliances unexpectedly turn on or turn off. Question 179: Which receptacles are required to have the controlled receptacle marking? A: Receptacles that are controlled by an energy management system. B: Receptacles that provide power to air conditioning units. C: Receptacles that are in common areas of buildings. D: Receptacles in dwellings that are controlled by a wall switch. Page 92 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

93 Question 180: 406.4(D) General Installation Requirements. Replacements. Question ID#: Replacement receptacles for arc-fault and ground-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacles must now be installed in a readily accessible location. From the 2011 NEC, when a receptacle outlet is located in an area that requires GFCI protection, the replacement receptacle must be GFCI protected. When a receptacle outlet is located in an area that requires AFCI protection, the replacement receptacle must be AFCI protected. In the 2014 NEC, those replacement receptacles must be readily accessible. The reason for the new rule is to give the occupant a way to test the devices, as required by the manufacturer, and to reset them if they have tripped. In the long run, this requirement will cut down on service calls to reset a tripped device. AFCI and GFCI replacement receptacles need to be readily accessible. Readily accessible means the device can be reached quickly without removing obstacles or using ladders. An example of a GFCI type receptacle that must be readily accessible is the garage door opener at a dwelling. Outlets in garages are required to be GFCI protected, but a GFCI type receptacle cannot be mounted in the ceiling because that is not readily accessible. Question 180: Which of the following locations may be considered readily accessible? A: Behind a large appliance fixed in place. B: Behind a wall-mounted electric drinking fountain. C: Some walk-in clothes closets. D: Eight feet above the floor. Question 181: 406.5(E) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar Work Surfaces. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC, receptacles were not allowed to be installed in the face-up position in dwelling units. "Dwelling units" was deleted in the 2014 NEC for this section, and now receptacles cannot be installed in the face-up position in any location, unless they are listed as receptacle assemblies for countertop applications. The same problems of having liquids, food, or other scraps fall into a receptacle that is mounted face-up exist in any location, not just in dwelling units. There are listed assemblies for countertop applications where the receptacle pops up out of the counter, then can be pushed back down when not in use. In the down position the hole for the receptacle assembly is sealed against liquids and debris. In the up position, the receptacle face is perpendicular to the countertop surface. Receptacles on a kitchen countertop and within 6 ft. of a sink are required to be GFCI protected. When a receptacle assembly listed for countertop applications is required to provide GFCI protection, the receptacle assembly is permitted to be listed as a GFCI receptacle assembly for countertop applications. Only listed receptacle assemblies can be installed for countertop applications. Listed receptacle assemblies for countertops solve an installation problem when there is not a backsplash on the counter and mounting a receptacle below the countertop is not practical. Question 181: Which of the following statements about receptacles in countertops is true? A: Listed receptacle assemblies for dwelling unit kitchen countertops are not required to be GFCI protected. B: If the countertop has a backsplash, using a listed receptacle assembly is prohibited. C: If the countertop does not have a backsplash, the receptacle can be mounted in the face-up position. D: A listed receptacle assembly for countertop applications can be installed in a countertop. Page 93 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

94 Question 182: 406.5(F) Receptacles in seating Areas and Other Similar Surfaces. Question ID#: In seating areas or similar surfaces, receptacles shall not be installed in a face-up position unless the receptacle is any of the following: (1) Part of an assembly listed as a furniture power distribution unit, if cord-and plug-connected (2) Part of an assembly listed either as household furnishings or as commercial furnishings (3) Listed either as a receptacle assembly for countertop applications or as a GFCI receptacle assembly for countertop applications (4) Installed in a listed floor box. Receptacles in seating areas and other similar surfaces cannot be mounted in the face-up position, unless part of a listed assembly. Seating areas in public locations, like in airports or similar waiting areas, sometimes have receptacles installed in the furniture as a convenience to people using laptop computers or charging cell phones. Similar installations can be found in some conference rooms. The danger from liquids spilling into receptacles in a waiting area is similar to the danger of spillage into receptacles mounted face-up in kitchen countertops. In seating areas and similar surfaces, receptacles shall not be installed face-up unless the receptacle meets specific requirements. If the receptacle is part of a listed assembly, it has been subjected to a dielectric voltage withstand test after 1/2 gallon of liquid has been spilled into the assembly. If the receptacle has a self-closing cover, the cover has been tested for leakage with the cord plugged in. Question 182: If a receptacle is mounted in the face-up position in a seating area or a conference room table, which of the following statements is true? A: The receptacle must have an extra-duty cover. B: The receptacle can be installed face up if part of a listed assembly for countertop applications. C: The receptacle must be part of the branch circuit wiring that serves the lighting in the area. D: The receptacle can only be installed in a list floor box. Question 183: 406.9(B)(1) Receptacles of 15 and 20 Amperes in a Wet Location. Question ID#: "Extra duty" covers are now required for 15- and 20-ampere receptacles in wet locations at dwelling and non-dwelling locations. In earlier Codes the extra duty covers were only required at non-dwelling locations if the receptacle was supported from grade. In the 2014 NEC the extra duty covers are required at dwellings and non-dwelling locations if the receptacle is installed in a wet location, whether it is mounted directly to the building or supported from grade by another structure. In an independent study, the "in use" covers used in residential applications had a 90% failure rate. With the slightest contact the "in use" cover broke off and left the receptacle exposed to the weather. The requirement for the extra duty cover only applies to 15 and 20 ampere rated receptacles in a wet location. In addition, 15 and 20 amp, 125 volt through 250 volt receptacles in a wet location must be of the listed weather-resistant (WR) type. WR type receptacles will hold up better in a wet location, but without a cover that protects the receptacle, the receptacle will be exposed to rain, sleet, or snow, which will shorten the life of the receptacle. "Extra duty" covers are now required for 15- and 20-ampere outlets in wet locations at dwelling units. According to Article 100, a wet location is an unprotected location exposed to the weather. A damp location is protected from the weather and not subject to saturation with water or other liquids but subject to moderate degrees of moisture. The extra duty covers required in residential, commercial, and industrial locations will protect the receptacle from the elements whether or not the attachment plug cap is Page 94 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

95 inserted. Question 183: Which of the following types of receptacles when installed in a wet location require an extra duty cover? A: 250-volt, nonlocking-type, 15 amp. B: 125-volt, nonlocking-type, 30 amp. C: 125-volt, locking-type, 30 amp. D: 250-volt, nonlocking-type, 30 amp. Question 184: Tamper-Resistant Receptacles. Question ID#: Tamper-resistant receptacles are required for nonlocking type 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles in dwellings, guest rooms and guest suites of hotels and motels, and child care facilities. There are four exceptions where tamper-resistant receptacles are not required: - Receptacles located more than 5 ½ ft. above the floor. - Receptacles that are part of a luminaire or appliance. - A single receptacle or a duplex receptacle for two appliances located within dedicated space and not easily moved. - Nongrounding receptacles used for replacements. Receptacles in dwelling units, hotel guest rooms, The exceptions cover locations where children cannot reach the receptacle, and there was no reason why these receptacles would be more accessible to children in hotels or motels or child care facilities than in dwellings. It should be noted that for hotels and motels, the requirement for tamper resistant receptacles only applies within the guest rooms or guest suites. Receptacles located in the hotel/motel office, lobby, breakfast area or other common areas outside of a guest room or guest suite are not required to be tamper resistant. and child care facilities must be tamper-resistant unless covered by one of the 4 exceptions. Exceptions 1 and 2 cover receptacles that are out of reach of a child.â Exception No. 3 recognizes that a child could not move an appliance that was large enough to be in a dedicated space.â Exception No. 4 acknowledges that nongrounding type receptacles are not available as tamper-resistant. Question 184: Which location does NOT require tamper-resistant receptacles? A: The kitchen in a dwelling. B: The reception area of a day care facility for children. C: The lobby of a motel. D: The sleeping area in a hotel guest room. Page 95 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

96 Question 185: Dimmer-Controlled Receptacles. Question ID#: New section requires dimmer-controlled receptacles that control lighting loads to have a nonstandard configuration that will only accept plugs that match the receptacle. A receptacle supplying lighting loads shall not be connected to a dimmer unless the plug/receptacle combination is a nonstandard configuration type that is specifically listed and identified for each such unique combination. Under-cabinet lighting and rope lights are sometimes plugged into a receptacle that is controlled by a dimmer. The problem with controlling a receptacle with a dimmer switch is that other loads besides incandescent lighting loads can be plugged into a standard receptacle. It is a Code violation to control a receptacle with a dimmer switch unless the receptacle and plug are a nonstandard combination. Dimmer-controlled receptacles are only allowed if of a nonstandard configuration type that is Many loads do not respond well to reduced voltages. As the voltage goes down, the current goes up, and an increase of current can damage the appliance or equipment. The increased current can damage the internal insulation on the appliance and cause it to overheat or burn out. Some appliances will not work at all at lower voltages. specifically listed and identified. Section (E), Dimmer Switches, says that general-use dimmer switches can be used only to control permanently installed incandescent luminaires unless listed for the control of other loads. Question 185: Which of the following statements about dimmer-controlled receptacles is true? A: Incandescent luminaires can be plugged into a standard receptacle controlled by a dimmer. B: A receptacle controlled by a dimmer must be listed for the plug/receptacle combination. C: Dimmer switches can control any receptacle load. D: A dimmer switch can control a receptacle if lighting loads will be plugged into the receptacle. Question 186: Support and Arrangement of Busbars and Conductors. Question ID#: The busbar arrangement on DC switchboards, switchgear, or panelboards can be in any order. The arrangement of busbars must be field marked as to polarity, grounding system, and nominal voltage. Without any order required for the DC bus arrangement, the field marking becomes critical. These requirements can be found in 408.3(E)(2) DC Bus Arrangement, which has been added as a separate section to the familiar section on AC phase arrangement, where the order for busbars is A, B, C, from front to back, top to bottom, or left to right. In addition to the busbar arrangement being field marked, the switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard itself must be identified. Several new switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard types now require identification. Arrangement of DC buses must be field marked - An ungrounded DC system must be field marked to say: CAUTION: UNGROUNDED DC SYSTEM OPERATING VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS. - A resistively grounded DC system must be field marked to say: CAUTION: DC SYSTEM OPERATING VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND MAY OPERATE VOLTS TO GROUND FOR INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS. - A high-impedance grounded neutral AC system must be field marked to say: CAUTION: HIGH-IMPEDANCE GROUNDED NEUTRAL AC SYSTEM OPERATING as to polarity, grounding system, and nominal voltage. Page 96 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

97 VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND MAY OPERATE VOLTS TO GROUND FOR INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS. A resistively grounded DC system and a high-impedance grounded neutral AC system have something in common. In order to keep equipment running, even under single fault conditions, the fault current is kept at low levels so the overcurrent devices will not trip. A ground fault monitoring system is connected which warns the operators of a fault condition but will not shut down the equipment. Question 186: Which of the following statements about the support and arrangement of busbars is true? A: The arrangement of DC busbars must be marked at the factory. B: The DC busbars must be marked in the field to describe how they are connected. C: The DC busbars are field marked, positive, negative, ground, left to right in order. D: Only AC busbars are required to be marked. Question 187: 408.4(B) Field Identification Required. Source of Supply. Question ID#: All switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards supplied by a feeder(s) in other than one- or two-family dwellings shall be marked to indicate each device or equipment where the power originates. The change is that now each device or equipment where the power originates must be marked on a switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard. Optional standby systems and legally required or emergency systems are very common in commercial and industrial systems. They are a second source of power for electrical distribution systems. Also, storage batteries, a second utility service, or alternate energy systems, like solar PV or wind generators, can be connected to switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards. When there is more than one source of power to a distribution network, every source must be marked to indicate not only where the normal source originates, but any additional sources. Switchboards, switchgear, and panelboards must be marked to indicate where the power originates, in other than one- or two-family dwellings. The more detail that is included on the sign, the more helpful it will be. The requirement says "each device or equipment" must be identified, so a general description of where the source is located is not good enough. A sign that says, "Circuit 3A fed from Standby Generator," is not as good as a sign that says, "Circuit 3A fed from Standby Generator Located in Basement Electrical Room." Likewise, a sign that says, "Circuit 4B fed from PV Disconnect Switch Located East End Building 1" is better than a sign saying "Circuit 4B fed from PV System." Question 187: Which of the following is the best example of a sign which is located at a switchboard that is supplied by a service disconnect and an optional standby system? A: Switchboard supplied from panelboard in electric room. B: Service disconnect located in electrical room on ground floor. C: Switchboard supplied from service disconnect located west wall in electrical room. Switchboard also supplied by generator located next to loading dock. D: Standby generator located rear of building on the first floor. Page 97 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

98 Question 188: Wire-Bending Space Within an Enclosure Containing a Panelboard. Question ID#: Having enough wire-bending space in a panelboard enclosure prevents the wire insulation from getting damaged when the wire is bent to terminate it inside the panelboard. In the 2011 NEC the minimum distances for the top and bottom wire bending spaces in a panelboard enclosure were sized from Table 312.6(B) for one wire per terminal. The side wiring bending space was sized from Table 312.6(A) for one wire per terminal. There was no requirement for wire-bending space for conductors that entered the panelboard from the back. The 2014 NEC requires wire-bending space equal to the distances in Table 312.6(A) for one wire per terminal for conductors that enter from the side of the panelboard. There also is a new requirement for wire-bending space for conductors that enter from the rear of a panelboard. The 2014 NEC specifies wire-bending space for conductors that enter from the back of the The distance between the center of the rear entry and the nearest termination for the entering conductors shall not be less than the distance given in Table 312.6(B). panelboard. This means that conduit entries into the back of a panelboard must allow for the greater distances required in Table 312.6(B) between the center of the conduit and the nearest termination. For example, the minimum wiring-bending space for a 1/0 conductor from Table 312.6(A) is 3 1/2 in. The wiring-bending space for a 1/0 conductor from Table 312.6(B) is 5 1/2 in. If a conduit with 1/0 conductors entered a panelboard from the back wall of the panelboard, the minimum wire-bending space from the center of the conduit to the nearest termination is 5 1/2 in. Conduit entries into the back of panelboards will have to be arranged so the minimum wire bending space of Table 312.6(B) can be met. Question 188: Based on one wire per terminal, what is the minimum wiring bending space for 2/0 copper conductors that enter a panelboard in conduit from the back of the panelboard? A: 6 1/2 inches. B: 7 inches. C: 6 inches. D: 5 1/2 inches. Page 98 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

99 Question 189: Industrial Control Panels. Conductor - Minimum Size and Ampacity. Question ID#: Conductors that supply industrial control panels must have an ampacity not less than the sum of: - 125% of the full-load current rating of all heating loads % of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor % of the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors and apparatus that may be in operation at the same time. The 2011 NEC required the calculation to include 125% of only the resistance heating loads, not all heating loads. Both induction and resistance heating loads in industrial machinery are likely to be continuous loads that are on for 3 hours or more. It makes sense to calculate all heating loads, rather than just resistance heating loads at 125%, when selecting the supply conductors for industrial control panels. The NEC now requires the minimum size and ampacity for the industrial control panel calculation to include 125% of all heating loads. For example, an industrial panel controls the following loads: (1) 50 amps of induction heating; (2) 100 amps of resistance heating; (3) 75 amps of other connected apparatus that operate at the same time: 50 amps induction heating, 50 amps x 125% = 62.5 amps 100 amps of resistance heating, 100 amps x 125% = 125 amps 75 amps of other load, 75 amps x 100% = 75 amps Total load: 62.5 amps amps + 75 amps = amps The supply conductors to the industrial control panel must have an ampacity equal to at least amps. Question 189: What is the minimum ampacity of supply conductors to an industrial control panel with the following loads: 80 amps resistance heating; 110 amps induction heating; 45 amps of other non-motor loads operating at the same time? A: amps. B: amps. C: amps. D: amps. Page 99 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

100 Question 190: Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps. Listing Required. Question ID#: Since the 2008 edition of the NEC, all luminaires and lampholders have been required to be listed. A listing for a specific piece of equipment means that the product has been evaluated by an organization that is acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (See Article 100 for the full definition of the term "listed"). Section in the 2014 Code has been expanded and now requires lighting retrofit kits to be listed as well. The movement for energy conservation has created a great demand for energy efficient lighting sources in both commercial and residential applications. Rather than removing and replacing all the luminaires in a building, it is becoming more and more common to see the installation of lighting retrofit kits. These retrofit kits allow the housing of a fluorescent luminaire, for example, to be gutted and re-fitted with a more energy efficient lighting source such as light emitting diodes (LEDs). Requiring the retrofit kits to be listed ensures that the kit will work with the luminaire. Generally, listed retrofit kits will specify what type of luminaire the kit is permitted to be installed in and may also provide specific housing dimensions needed to ensure that the new ballast or power supply will have proper heat dissipation. Luminaires that have been modified according to the instructions for the listed retrofit kit will no longer accept the original lamp designed for the luminaire. A new label (provided by the retrofit kit manufacturer) is required to be placed near the retrofit kit to indicate that the luminaire has been modified and can no longer operate the lamps that were originally intended for the luminaire. Retrofit kits are now required to be listed. Question 190: Which of the following items does Section require to be listed? A: A replacement ballast for a 4 foot fluorescent luminaire. B: The fixture whip that supplies power to the luminaire. C: A replacement LED power supply for an LED luminaire that was damaged. D: A retrofit kit used to convert a high pressure sodium luminaire to a metal halide luminaire. Question 191: (F) Luminaires Installed in or Under Roof Decking. Question ID#: A new subsection has been added to Section in order to protect luminaires installed under metal corrugated roof decking. Section (F) has been added and specifies that luminaires installed in exposed or concealed locations under metal corrugated sheet roof decking shall be installed and supported so there is not less than 38 mm (1 1/2 in.) measured from the lowest surface of the roof decking to the top of the luminaire. This is similar to the Code language introduced during the 2008 Code cycle in section 300.4(E) which requires the same 1 1/2 inch distance from metal corrugated roof decking to cables, raceways, or boxes that have been installed under the roof decking materials. Luminaires installed under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking must have at least 1 1/2 inches between the roof and the top of the luminaire. When roofers repair a flat roof, they use 2 inch or 2 1/4 inch screws to hold down the insulating and waterproofing material. Unless the required distances are maintained, screws may penetrate the roof decking and damage electrical cables, raceways, boxes or luminaires. Requiring the luminaires to be located 1 1/2 inches below the roof decking ensures that the standard screws or fasteners used to secure the roofing materials do not pass through the metal roofing far enough to penetrate the luminaire. Prior to this Code change it was permissible to attach a surface mounted luminaire, such as a fluorescent strip light, directly to the underside of the metal roof decking. This creates the possibility that a roof deck screw might penetrate and damage the luminaire, the Page 100 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

101 ballast, or its associated wiring. Question 191: Which of the following statements is true of luminaires installed under corrugated metal roof decking? A: They must be installed so that there is at least 1 1/2 inches from the lowest surface of the metal roof decking to the bottom of the luminaire. B: They must be installed so that there is at least 1 1/2 inches from the lowest surface of the metal roof decking to the top of the luminaire. C: They must be installed so that there is at least 2 1/2 inches between the roof decking and the luminaire. D: They must be installed so that there is at least 1 1/2 inches from the top of the metal roof decking to the top of the luminaire. Question 192: Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. Question ID#: Section addresses installations where a luminaire is surface mounted over an outlet box that has been recessed into a combustible wall or ceiling finish and the edge of the luminaire housing extends beyond the opening for the outlet box. The revised text states that any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed between the edge of a luminaire canopy or pan and an outlet box having a surface area of 1160 mm2 (180 sq. in.) or more shall be covered with noncombustible material. Previous editions of the NEC required the combustible wall covering between the opening for the outlet box and the edge of the canopy to be covered with noncombustible material in all cases. Sheetrock is the most common material used for wall and ceiling finishes but some installations involve mounting the luminaire over an outlet box that has been recessed into combustible surfaces such as wood wall paneling, tongue and groove wood ceilings, and even decorative wooden beams. According to the Code change, these types of installations would require the exposed combustible surface under the canopy of the luminaire to be covered with noncombustible material if the surface was 180 sq. in. or more. A combustible surface area of 180 sq. in. or more must be covered with noncombustible material. Section requires all luminaires to be listed. Canopy-type luminaires that have been listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory have been tested and found to be suitable to be surface mounted over an exposed combustible surface less than 180 sq. in. without subjecting the combustible surface to more than 90º C per section Anything larger than that has not been evaluated by a testing lab, and the exposed combustible surface must be covered with noncombustible material. Question 192: Which of the following installations requires a wall finish to be covered with noncombustible material? A: A luminaire installed over an outlet box, recessed in a noncombustible surface, where 200 sq. in. of the surface is exposed under the luminaire canopy. B: A luminaire installed over an outlet box, recessed in wood paneling, where a 12 inch X 15 inch section of the wood surface is exposed under the luminaire canopy. C: A luminaire installed over an outlet box, recessed in wood paneling, where less than 180 sq. in. of the wood surface is exposed under the luminaire canopy. D: A luminaire installed over an outlet box, recessed in wood paneling, where a 13 inch X 13 inch section of the wood surface is exposed under the luminaire canopy. Page 101 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

102 Question 193: (G) Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: Fluorescent luminaires with double-ended lamps and ballasts require a disconnecting means either inside or outside each luminaire. For existing luminaires without disconnecting means, a disconnecting means must be installed when the ballast is replaced. The 2011 NEC had an exception for industrial establishments with qualified persons to service the luminaires. The 2014 NEC has deleted that exception. The arguments to delete the exception and require fluorescent luminaires in industrial locations to have disconnecting means were about providing the same level of protection to qualified persons when servicing luminaires as was required elsewhere. The popular inline disconnects used with fluorescent luminaires have made installing them in existing luminaires quick and relatively inexpensive. Industrial locations now also require that fluorescent luminaires with double-ended lamps and ballasts have a disconnecting means. The remaining 4 exceptions to (G) are: - Luminaires in hazardous locations do not require a disconnecting means. - Emergency lighting, including exit signs, do not require a disconnecting means. - Cord-and-plug connected luminaires are considered to already have a disconnecting means if the plug and receptacle are accessible. - If there is more than one luminaire in a space, and there is a way to disconnect the luminaires so that the space cannot be left in total darkness, then each luminaire is not required to have a disconnecting means. Question 193: Which of the following luminaires require a disconnecting means for each luminaire? A: An LED luminaire in an office conference room. B: An HID luminaire in a big box retail store. C: A fluorescent luminaire in an industrial facility. D: A fluorescent luminaire in a hazardous location. Question 194: 411 Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less and Lighting Equipment Connected to Class-2 Power Sources. Question ID#: Article 411 has been revised to include equipment connected to Class 2 power sources. These revisions are part of an effort to modernize Article 411 in order to keep up with changing technology. It will provide answers to many questions concerning proper marking of Class 2 power sources, secondary wiring methods, and listing requirements. The previous title for Article 411, "Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less", has been changed to "Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less and Lighting Equipment Connected to Class-2 Power Sources". Section 411.1, Scope, now says the article covers lighting equipment connected to a Class 2 power source. Section has been reorganized to include a new requirement that listed Class 2 lighting equipment must be rated to comply with Chapter 9, Table 11(A) for alternating-current or Table 11(B) for direct current. These tables provide the general requirements that Class 2 and Class 3 power sources must comply with as part of the listing process. The last sentence in section is new and states that Class 2 power sources and lighting equipment connected to a Class 2 power source must be listed. When these power sources are listed, they will be required to be marked as a Class 2 power source. Requiring the Class 2 power source to be listed helps the installer and inspector determine what low voltage wiring methods are permitted to be Article 411 now covers lighting equipment connected to Class-2 Power Sources. Page 102 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

103 installed on the load side of the power supply, according to Article 725, Part III. Question 194: A Class 2 alternating current power source must comply with which of the following? A: Chapter 9, Table 11(B). B: Chapter 9, Table 5. C: Chapter 9, Table 5(A). D: Chapter 9, Table 11(A). Question 195: Appliances. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection. Question ID#: All GFCI devices that are required by Article 422 for appliances must be readily accessible. Section states that the device providing GFCI protection shall be readily accessible. According to Article 100 definitions, readily accessible means capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections without requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to actions such as to use tools, to climb over or remove obstacles, or to resort to portable ladders, and so forth. Similar requirements can be found in section for dwelling and non-dwelling locations. Making sure that the GFCI is readily accessible ensures that the device can easily be reached for routine testing to confirm proper operation. Placing a GFCI receptacle behind a large vending machine or behind a cord-and-plug connected electric drinking fountain makes it difficult for those who are troubleshooting the circuit and now is a Code violation. Many installers remedy the situation by using a GFCI circuit breaker located in a readily accessible panelboard rather than a GFCI-type receptacle which may be considered readily accessible up until the time that a large vending machine gets delivered and installed in front of the device. GFCI devices required by Article 422 must be readily accessible. Question 195: Which of the following receptacles is required to be readily accessible? A: A receptacle that provides power for a vending machine that has its own GFCI built into the appliance cord. B: A GFCI-type receptacle that supplies power to a drinking fountain. C: A receptacle that is supplied by a GFCI breaker in a panelboard. D: A receptacle that does not require GFCI protection. Page 103 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

104 Question 196: (B)(1) Electrically Operated In-Sink Waste Disposers. Question ID#: In the 2014 NEC, the term "kitchen" has been removed from (B)(1) and replaced with the phrase "in-sink" to make it clearer that waste disposers installed in sinks in other locations besides kitchens can be connected with a flexible cord. The phrase "in-sink" was added to distinguish food-type disposers from other types of waste disposers such as trash compactors. Limiting cord-connected waste disposers to just kitchens in the 2011 NEC, meant that the location had to have permanent provisions for food preparation and cooking. Prep rooms in small grocery stores and convenience markets would not have met this definition of a kitchen and a cord-connected waste disposer would not have been permitted in the 2011 NEC. A waste disposer that is connected by a flexible cord to a receptacle can be located in a kitchen, family room, wet bar, or any location where the waste disposer is installed in a sink. The 4 conditions of (B) must be met. An in-sink waste disposer that is connected by a The 4 conditions are: flexible cord to a receptacle is permitted in locations besides kitchens. - The flexible cord shall be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug. Exception: A listed in-sink waste disposer distinctly marked to identify it as protected by a system of double insulation, or its equivalent, shall not be required to be terminated with a grounding-type attachment plug. - The length of the cord shall not be less than 450 mm (18 in.) and not over 900 mm (36 in.). - Receptacles shall be located to avoid physical damage to the flexible cord. - The receptacle shall be accessible. Question 196: Which of the following waste disposer installations is permitted? A: A listed in-sink waste disposer in a restaurant connected by a 14 inch cord with a grounding-type attachment plug. B: A listed waste disposer in a kitchen connected by a 42 inch cord with a grounding-type attachment plug. C: A listed in-sink waste disposer in a convenience market connected by a 24 inch cord with a grounding-type attachment plug. D: A listed waste disposer in a wet bar connected by a 30 inch cord with a non-grounding type attachment plug. Page 104 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

105 Question 197: ,422.20, Requirements for Outlet Boxes. Question ID#: New sections , , and have been added to provide specific requirements for ceiling-suspended paddle fans. Section now permits the cubic inch capacity of a ceiling suspended (paddle) fan canopy and the outlet box to be added together to provide sufficient space for conductors and their connecting devices. It is important that there is enough space within the box and canopy of a ceiling fan to make all the needed connections. Sometimes a ceiling fan box becomes a junction box for other conductors besides those for the actual fan. This practice is allowable as long as the box complies with Section and has sufficient space for all conductors within the box. Section states that in a completed installation, each outlet box shall be provided with a cover unless covered by means of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan canopy. Similar language is found in which allows a luminaire, lampholder, or receptacle to be used for this purpose but does not include a ceiling fan as an acceptable way to cover the box. Canopies and outlet boxes must provide sufficient space for the conductors and their Section requires any combustible ceiling finish exposed between the edge of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan canopy or pan and an outlet box to be covered with noncombustible material. This is important for installations where a ceiling fan is mounted over an outlet box that has been recessed into a combustible ceiling such as wood paneling or a tongue and groove wood finish. It is common for the canopy of a ceiling fan to be significantly larger than the outlet box that it covers thus leaving an exposed combustible surface present next to the wiring splices. These surfaces are now required to be covered with noncombustible material. connecting devices. Question 197: What is the purpose of providing sufficient space within an outlet box and a ceiling fan canopy? A: To provide enough room for future connections. B: To allow space for devices such as remote control fan receivers. C: To provide enough room for conductors and splicing devices. D: To provide enough room for future conductors. Question 198: Tire Inflation and Automotive Vacuum Machines. Question ID#: A new section has been added to Article 422 in order to provide an additional level of protection for the public. Section requires tire inflation and automotive vacuum machines provided for public use to be protected by a ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI). Tire inflation and automotive vacuum machines are heavily used and abused.â Â Â Â They are located outdoors and exposed to all weather conditions.â The electrical components can become damaged from constant use.â The areas around the machines can be wet and a person could be standing in water while using the equipment.â Â Tire inflation and automotive vacuum machines The Consumer Product Safety Commission reported a patron was killed while operating an automotive vacuum machine.â Ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection has proved to be an effective way to protect people while using appliances, especially when used in wet locations. need GFCI protection. Note that the new requirement for GFCI protection is not voltage specific nor does it specify that the GFCI protection be in the form of a receptacle at the equipment or a GFCI breaker where the circuit originates. Page 105 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

106 The following is a partial list of locations where GFCI protection is currently required: - Bathrooms (125-volt,15-and 20-amp) receptacles) - Dwelling unit garages & accessory buildings (125-volt, 15- and 20-amp receptacles) - Outdoors (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Dwelling unit crawl spaces (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Unfinished basements in dwellingsâ (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Kitchens (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Within 6 feet of a sink (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Boathouses (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Rooftops (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Indoor wet locations (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Locker rooms with associated showering facilities (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Repair garages and aircraft hangars where electric hand tools are used (125 volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Dwelling unit boat hoists (up to 240 volts) - Tire inflation and vacuum machines for public use (any voltage) - Circuits supplying floor heating cables (any voltage) - Agricultural buildings - Receptacles on portable generators 15 kw or smaller (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Elevator pits (125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles) - Pool lighting - Single-phase 15- or 20-amp 120- or 240-volt swimming pool pump motors - Electric pool covers - Spas, hot tubs, hydromassage and therapeutic tubs - Floating buildings  Question 198: Which of the following types of equipment require ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection? A: All automotive vacuum machines. B: Air compressors rated at 240 volts inside a dwelling unit garage. C: All tire inflation machines. D: An automotive vacuum installed for public use. Page 106 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

107 Question 199: High-Pressure Spray Washers. Question ID#: Two types of high-pressure spray washers now require GFCI protection: - Single-phase spray washers rated 250 volts or less. - Three-phase spray washers rated 208Y/120 volts and 60 amperes or less. The requirement to add GFCI protection for 3-phase high-pressure spray washers that are rated 208Y/120 volts and 60 amps or less is new to the 2014 NEC. GFCI protection is available for 3-phase systems rated 208Y/120 volts and 60 amperes and less. Since single phase high-pressure spray washers rated 250 volts or less were already required to be supplied with GFCI protection, the requirement was expanded to include 3-phase systems of 208Y/120 volts. GFCI protection for 3-phase systems above 60 amps is not readily available, so only those spray washers rated 60 amps or less were included in the requirement. GFCI protection is now required for spray washers that are 3-phase and rated 208Y/120 volts, 60 amperes or less. The GFCI protection for high-pressure spray washers can be provided in one of two ways: - Factory-installed GFCI protection that is an integral part of the attachment plug. - Factory-installed GFCI protection that is located in the supply cord within 12 inches of the attachment plug. Any time an electrical appliance is used around water, there is a shock hazard. GFCI protection is required in damp and wet locations and for appliances like dishwashers and waste disposers that use water. Electricity and water do not mix. GFCI protection has made many common job tasks safer and protected generations of homeowners, workers, and others from electric shock. Question 199: Which of the following high-pressure spray washers require built-in GFCI protection? A: A single-phase spray washer rated 277 volts and 20 amperes. B: A 3-phase spray washer rated for use on a 480Y/277 volt system and rated 60 amperes. C: A 3-phase spray washer rated for use on a 208Y/120 volt system and rated 30 amperes. D: A 3-phase spray washer rated for use on a 208Y/120 volt system and rated 75 amperes. Question 200: Vending Machines. Question ID#: New requirements for ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection (GFCI) at vending machines have been added to Section Now vending machines that are directly wired, as well as those that are cord-and-plug connected, are required to be GFCI protected (A) is similar to the vending machine section in the 2011 NEC, but requires a ground-fault circuit-interrupter that is a part of the attachment plug to be identified for portable use. Cord-and-plug connected vending machines that are manufactured or remanufactured on or after January 1, 2005, must include a ground-fault circuit-interrupter identified for portable use as an integral part of the attachment plug or be located in the cord within 300 mm (12 in.) of the attachment plug if it is not built into the plug itself. Older vending machines manufactured or remanufactured prior to January 1, 2005, must be connected to a GFCI protected outlet. The GFCI protection can be provided by using a GFCI-type receptacle or installing a GFCI breaker ahead of the branch circuit in the panelboard. Vending machines that are hardwired must be connected to a GFCI protected circuit (B), which is new in the 2014 NEC, states that vending machines not utilizing a cord-and-plug connection shall be connected to a GFCI protected circuit. The same Page 107 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

108 hazard exists for vending machines that are hardwired as for those that are cord-and-plug connected. Vending machines are often installed in damp or wet locations and subject to heavy use or abuse by the general public. In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is important that GFCI protection be present for the vending machine whether the machine is cord-and-plug connected or directly wired to the branch circuit without the use of a receptacle. It is also important that the GFCI device is readily accessible according to Question 200: Which of the following is true of vending machines that are not cord-and- plug connected? A: They must be equipped with a GFCI that is integral to the attachment plug. B: They must be connected to a circuit that is GFCI protected. C: They must be connected to a GFCI-type receptacle. D: They must be connected to a receptacle that is GFCI protected. Question 201: Fixed Electric Space-Heating Equipment. Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: A simultaneous disconnecting means must be provided for fixed electric space-heating equipment which will disconnect the ungrounded conductors of the heater, motor controller, and supplementary overcurrent protection. The 2014 NEC requires that when the heating equipment is supplied by more than one source, feeder, or branch circuit, the disconnecting means must be grouped and marked. The 2011 NEC said that the disconnecting means for the fixed electric space-heating equipment must be grouped and marked if they were supplied from one source. "Source" is not defined in the NEC, and installers and inspectors didn't know if "source" meant a source of AC voltage, a single panelboard, or a remote power supply. Now it is clear that if fixed electric space-heating equipment is supplied by more than one source, feeder, or branch circuit, the disconnecting means for the equipment must be grouped and marked. The 2014 NEC requires that when space-heating equipment is supplied by more than one source, feeder, or branch circuit, the disconnecting means must be grouped and marked. They must Also, a reference to has been added which requires the disconnecting means to be lockable in the open position with the provisions for locking remaining in place with or without the lock installed. There were a number of sections in the Code that required a disconnecting means to be lockable in the open position. Instead of saying the same thing in different places, the requirement to have the disconnecting means be capable of being locked in the open position was written in Section and referred back to throughout the Code. also be lockable. Question 201: Which of the following installations requires the disconnecting means for fixed electric space-heating equipment to be grouped? A: Two branch circuits that supply the same piece of space-heating equipment. B: Separate space-heating equipment units that serve the same building space. C: Space-heating equipment for two separate zones in a building. D: All space heating equipment for a single floor in a building. Page 108 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

109 Question 202: (A)&(B) Duct Heaters. Installation. General and Limited Access. Question ID#: There are new requirements for working space around duct heaters installed above a suspended ceiling. In the past, this type of heater was often installed above suspended ceilings with little regard for providing access to the equipment or safe working conditions for individuals who would service the equipment after the installation was complete. In earlier editions of the NEC, Section (A) included a note telling the reader to "See " However, it did not require that the installation comply with the minimum working space clearances given in Section Previously, just stated that "sufficient clearance" was to be provided for servicing the equipment without specifying minimum working space requirements. There are new requirements for access to duct heaters installed above a ceiling including a minimum working space width of 30 inches (B) Limited Access When electric duct heaters are installed in a space above a ceiling, the following requirements apply: - They are required to be accessible through access panels or by removal of suspended ceiling panels. - The working space must be 30 inches wide or the width of the equipment, whichever is greater. - Access panels and doors on the equipment are required to open 90 degrees or more. - The minimum depth of working space in front of the equipment is to comply with the requirements of Table (A)(1). Question 202: An electric duct heater that measures 28 inches wide is installed in a limited access space above a ceiling. Which of the following statements is correct? A: The width of the required work space is 40 inches. B: The width of the required work space is 28 inches. C: The width of the required work space is 30 inches. D: The width of the required work space is 48 inches. Page 109 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

110 Question 203: (G) Single Motor. Conductors for Small Motors. Question ID#: The general rule says the minimum size conductor permitted to supply a small motor is No. 14 AWG. However, if the conductors are installed in an enclosure or cabinet, both the 2011 NEC and the 2014 NEC specify conditions that allow No. 18 or No. 16 AWG copper conductors to be used for small motors. Except for using the word "current" rating rather than "ampacity", the three conditions in the 2011 NEC under which No. 16 or No. 18 AWG copper conductors were permitted to be used for small motors that are installed in an enclosure or cabinet are essentially the same. In each case there are two sets of three conditions that all must be complied with in order to use either No. 18 or No. 16 AWG copper conductors. The requirements for overcurrent protection were not changed. However, the requirements for overload protection for motors covered by Section (G) were revised. Now, overload protection is permitted to be provided by either a Class 10 overload device or a Class 10 A overload device installed in accordance with Section This change means that if a Class 10 A adjustable, bi-metallic overload relay complies with the listing requirements of ULÂ, it is now permitted to be used to protect small motors supplied with either No. 18 or No. 16 AWG copper conductors from overloads. Overload protection is permitted to be provided by either a Class 10 or a Class 10A overload device installed in accordance with NEMAÂ, IECÂ, and ULÂ standards for Class 10 and 10A overloads relays require both types of these devices to be able to meet all of the following standards: - Must open a circuit in 10 seconds or less under locked-rotor conditions. - Must open a circuit in less than 2 hours under any condition specified in Must open a circuit in less than 2 minutes after sensing overload current rated at 150% of their setting. Question 203: What is the smallest copper conductor permitted to be used to supply a small motor that is NOT installed in either an enclosure or cabinet? A: No. 12 AWG. B: No. 18 AWG. C: No. 14 AWG. D: No. 16 AWG. Page 110 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

111 Question 204: (C)(5) Rating or Setting for Individual Motor Control. Rating or Setting. Power Electronic Devices. Question ID#: Semiconductor fuses are now the type of fuses permitted to protect power electronic devices. In the 2011 NEC it said fuses used to protect power electronic devices only had to be "suitable." With this change, (C)(5) now permits the use of "semiconductor fuses" in place of the overcurrent devices listed in Table , provided the fuse is designed to provide protection for power electronic devices that are used in equipment such as variable frequency drives and other solid-state motor control equipment. Semiconductor fuses are not interchangeable with current-limiting fuses. They are extremely fast acting devices used to minimize damage to power electronic devices caused by short circuits. Semiconductor fuses do not provide the full range of protection (from overcurrent through short circuit) that branch circuit type class rated fuses provide, such as CC, J, T, and RK5. In addition to being permitted to protect electronic devices, semiconductor fuses are also permitted to provide overcurrent protection for electro-mechanical components like contactors and conductors and other electro-mechanical devices in power electronic equipment. When semiconductor fuses are installed, the equipment is required to be marked adjacent to the semiconductor fuse to identify devices permitted to replace them. Semiconductor fuses should now be used to protect power electronic devices. Question 204: Which of the following statements bests describes semiconductor fuses? A: They are designed to be used specifically in place of current-limiting fuses. B: They are now one of the types of overcurrent devices listed in Table C: They are only permitted to be used to protect electronic devices in power electronic equipment. D: They are fast acting devices permitted to be used in place of devices listed in Table to protect power electronic devices. Question 205: (D) Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit. Single Motor Taps. Question ID#: This change clarifies the requirements for the length of 10 ft. and 25 ft. tap conductors for individual motors that are part of a group installation that is supplied by one branch circuit. The revision makes it clear that the length of the tap conductor is measured from the point of the tap to the motor overload device. The requirements in (D)(2) now say that when applying the 25 foot tap rule, the tap conductor is to be measured from the "point" where the tap conductor is connected to the branch-circuit conductor to the motor overload device, which is usually part of a motor controller or starter. Section (D)(3) requires that when applying the 10 foot tap rule, the tap conductor is to be measured from the "point" where the tap conductor is connected to the branch-circuit conductor to either a listed manual motor controller that is marked "Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" or to a branch-circuit protective device. If the tap conductors are protected by an approved means, a raceway, or are within an enclosed controller and the installation complies with one of the three requirements listed below, taps supplying a single motor that is part of a group installation are not required to have a separate overcurrent protective device installed to protect the tap itself. The length of the tap conductor is measured from the point of the tap to the motor overload device. No separate overcurrent protective device is required for a tap conductor if one of the following conditions is met: Page 111 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

112 - The ampacity of the tap conductors that supply a single motor are required to equal or exceed the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors supplying the group installation. - Tap conductors are permitted to be up to 25 feet long provided their ampacity is not less than 1/3 the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors to which the tap is connected. For Example, the minimum ampacity of a 25 foot tap conductor that is tapped to a branch-circuit conductor that has an ampacity of 75 amps is 25 amps: (75 A Ã 3 = 25 A). - Tap conductors are permitted to be up to 10 feet long if their ampacity equals or exceeds 1/10 the rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault overcurrent protective device (OCPD) that protects the conductors to which the tap is connected. For Example: the minimum ampacity of a 10 foot tap conductor that is tapped to branch-circuit conductors protected by a 200 amp OCPD is 20 amps: (200 A Ã 10 = 20 A). Question 205: In a group motor installation in which a single motor is supplied by tap conductors that are connected to one branch circuit, which of the following statements is correct? A: When applying the 25 foot tap rule, conductors are measured from the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device to the motor itself. B: When applying the 10 foot tap rule, conductors are measured from the point of the tap on the branch circuit to a listed manual motor controller or a branch-circuit protective device. C: Each tap conductor is always required to be provided with a separate short-circuit and ground-fault protective device. D: Tap conductors must always have the same ampacity as the feeder that supplies the group installation. Question 206: Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault Protection for Single Motor Circuits Containing Power Conversion Equipment. Question ID#: Sections and are new in the 2014 NEC and provide requirements for motors connected to power conversion equipment. Adjustable speed drives or variable frequency drives (VFD's) are types of power conversion equipment that adjust the speed of the motor by adjusting the voltage and frequency of the input supply to the motor. Changing the speed of a motor with a variable frequency drive is much more energy efficient than using dampers or mechanical means to slow the rate of the driven load connected to the motor. When a motor circuit includes a variable frequency drive, the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection, whether a fuse or circuit breaker, is based on the full-load current rating marked on the motor nameplate, or on the controller nameplate. The setting of the overcurrent or ground-fault device is determined by applying the percentages of full-load current found in Table There may be a conflict between the maximum branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault settings found in the variable frequency drive manufacturer's instructions and the values calculated by applying Code rules. In such a case, the values from the manufacturer's instructions must be used. The branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective fuses or inverse time circuit breakers shall be of a type and rating or setting permitted for use with the power conversion equipment using the full-load current rating of the connected motor load in accordance with A bypass device may be installed in the motor circuit to allow the variable frequency device to be cut out of the circuit for maintenance or other reasons. If a bypass device is installed, it must also have overcurrent protection. If a single overcurrent protective device is provided for both the main circuit and the bypass circuit, the rating of the overcurrent protection is determined by the larger of either the rating of the variable frequency drive circuit or the bypass circuit. Page 112 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

113 Question 206: Branch-circuit protection for a variable frequency drive shall be determined by using which of the following? A: The service factor listed on the motor nameplate. B: The temperature rise of the motor. C: The size of the required overload protection. D: The full-load current rating of the motor load. Question 207: Guards for Attendants. Question ID#: Where motors or motor controllers have exposed live parts operating at over 50 volts, and the motors require adjustment or servicing while energized, suitable mats or platforms must be provided to protect personnel. In the 2011 NEC, the voltage level was 150 volts, but in the 2014 NEC the voltage level has been reduced to 50 volts. Fifty volts or greater is the threshold voltage for shock used by NFPA 70E, OSHA, and the NEC. At 50 volts there is a shock hazard to personnel who may come in contact with an energized part. In earlier editions of the Code, requiring guards for attendants to protect against live parts only if the voltage was over 150 volts was a considered a conflict with the rest of the NEC and other standards. In fact, in the section immediately before , exposed live parts of motors and controllers operating at 50 volts or more require guarding against accidental contact. The situations described in and are different. Section describes what is necessary to protect personnel from accidental contact. Section describes how to protect personnel that may need to adjust or service motors or controllers that are guarded by location only. Operating at more than 50 volts to ground, motors or controllers must be guarded against accidental contact by enclosure or location. Requiring mats or platforms for attendants to stand on while adjusting or servicing motors or controllers will insulate the personnel from ground, and it will help protect them from the dangers of electric shock. Live parts that are guarded from contact only by location are required to be guarded if they are operated in excess of 50 volts to ground. Guarding by location means being: - located in a room only accessible to qualified persons, - located on a balcony or platform only accessible to qualified persons, or - located 8 ft. or more above the floor. Question 207: Which of the following is required to be guarded if it is only guarded by location? A: A motor with exposed live parts operated at 30 volts to ground. B: A motor with exposed live parts operated at 40 volts to ground. C: A motor with exposed live parts operated at 12 volts between terminals. D: A motor with exposed live parts operated at 60 volts to ground. Page 113 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

114 Question 208: Generators. Marking. Question ID#: Major revisions have been made to the marking requirements for generators. Some re-organizing now requires that the marking requirement for power factor, subtransient and transient impedances, insulation system class, and time rating is only for nameplates of generators larger than 15 kw. The most significant change to this section is the new requirement that marking shall be provided by the manufacturer to indicate whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the generator frame. Since generators are permitted to be installed either as a separately derived system or not, this change will greatly assist installers and inspectors as they try to determine proper bonding requirements, transfer switch application, and signage required by 700.7, 701.7, and Generators now must be marked to indicate In many installations, the generator supplier will install the generator and an electrical contractor will provide all wiring methods from the generator through the transfer switch and on to the loads served by the generator. Since the electrician is contracted only to install the wiring methods, it is quite common for the electrician to have no idea if the generator is equipped with a system bonding jumper. Prior to this Code change, it was very common for the electrical inspector to request that the generator enclosure be dismantled in order to verify if the generator contained a system bonding jumper. Based on the findings, the inspector could then inspect the generator as either a separately derived system or a system that is not separately derived. whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the generator frame. The last part of this Code change specifies that where the bonding of a generator is modified in the field, additional marking shall be required to indicate whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the generator frame. Question 208: When the bonding of a generator has been field modified, additional marking shall be required to indicate which of the following? A: Whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the generator frame. B: Whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the grounded conductor. C: Whether or not the generator equipment grounding conductor is bonded to the generator frame. D: Whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the grounding electrode. Question 209: Disconnecting Means Required for Generators. Question ID#: Working on generator installations should be safer for maintenance personnel because of the changes made to Generators must be equipped with a disconnecting means which is lockable in the OFF (open) position and which will disconnect all of the circuits supplied from the generator. Portable generators are not included in this requirement because cords that are plugged into the generator can simply be removed from the receptacles mounted on the generator. Also, a portable generator that is connected to a flanged inlet device can easily be unplugged. A generator disconnecting means is not required if both of the following conditions are met: Generators must be equipped with a disconnecting means which is lockable in the - The driving means for the generator can be readily shut down, is rendered incapable of restarting, and is lockable in the OFF position in accordance with The generator is not arranged to operate in parallel with another generator or other source of voltage. OFF position unless cord-and-plug connected or the driving means can be shut down and not restart and not arranged to operate in parallel. Requiring the driving means for a generator to be shut down, locked out, and prevented from automatically restarting will mean working on generators in the field Page 114 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

115 will be safer for personnel. It is important to remember that the requirements in (2) are not the same as the disconnecting requirements found in , , and , which apply to the disconnection of conductors supplied by an outdoor generator. These requirements allow the generator to keep running as long as the conductors supplied by the generator that serve or pass through a building can be disconnected whereas the requirements in (2)(a) require that all circuits supplied by the generator be shut down completely by a disconnecting means that can be locked in the OFF position. Question 209: Which of the following types of generators is NOT required to be equipped with a lockable disconnect switch? A: A generator on wheels that only has provisions for cord-and-plug connected loads. B: A generator that is permanently installed and wired in parallel with another generator. C: A generator that is permanently installed and capable of being re-started from 3 different remote locations in the event that the generator turns off. D: A generator on wheels that only has lug terminals for hardwired connections. Question 210: Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for Receptacles on 15- kw or Smaller Portable Generators. Question ID#: A new Section has been added to Article 445 and requires GFCI receptacles on 15-kW or smaller portable generators. The new section now requires all 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets, that are a part of a 15 kw, or smaller, portable generator to have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel integral to the generator or receptacle. It is important to note that the Code section is only for portable generators and only includes 125- volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacles. Many small generators are also equipped with 240-volt receptacles that are not affected by this new requirement. 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets that are a part of a 15-kW or These smaller portable generators are commonly used at carnivals, temporary events, equipment rentals, or for construction power or camping. In these types of locations, portable generators equipped with proper GFCI protection can help to greatly reduce shock hazards that may be present due to damaged or frayed power cords, power cords laying in standing water, faulty portable lighting, or damaged power tools. Most of these smaller generators do not receive any type of electrical inspection before use, and adding GFCI protection to receptacles mounted on the generator will provide an additional level of protection. smaller portable generator must have GFCI protection. Question 210: Which type of generator is required to have integral ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for its 125- volt 15-amp single-phase receptacle? A: A 12 kw generator permanently installed at a dwelling. B: A 12 kw generator on wheels. C: A 16 kw portable generator. D: A 15 kw permanently installed generator at an amusement park. Page 115 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

116 Question 211: (A) Grounding. Dry-Type Transformer Enclosures. Question ID#: There are new requirements for grounding dry-type transformer enclosures. Connections for equipment grounding conductors and supply-side bonding jumpers must now be made at a terminal bar that is mounted inside the transformer enclosure. The terminal bar must be bonded to the enclosure and cannot be installed on or over any vented portion of the enclosure. There is an exception that permits the grounding and bonding connections for dry-type transformers with wire-type leads to be made with pressure connectors, fasteners, or any of the other methods in When a terminal bar is mounted to the transformer enclosure, it is important that the terminal bar or the conductors connected to it do not block the vents that provide air flow around the transformer coils. Where separate equipment grounding conductors and supply-side bonding jumpers are installed, a terminal bar for all grounding and bonding conductor connections shall be secured A terminal bar will ensure that all of the grounding and bonding connections made at the transformer have a common point and do not depend on the metal transformer enclosure to tie the connections together. inside the transformer enclosure. Question 211: When can the grounding and bonding connections be made at a dry-type transformer without using a terminal bar? A: When the transformer is mounted 8 ft. or more above the floor. B: When the transformer is equipped with vented openings. C: When the transformer is connected as a step-down transformer. D: When the transformer is equipped with wire-type connections. Question 212: (B) Source Marking. Question ID#: Section , Marking, has been divided in section (A) General, and (B) Source Marking. Section (A) has been changed to list format. (A) General. Each transformer shall be provided with a nameplate giving the following information: 1. The name of the manufacturer 2. Rated kilovolt-amperes 3. Frequency 4. Primary and secondary voltage A transformer can be supplied at the marked secondary voltage. 5. The impedance of transformers 25kVA and larger 6. Required clearances for transformers with ventilating openings 7. The amount and kind of insulating liquid where used 8. For dry-type transformers, the temperature class for the insulation system Section B states: A transformer shall be permitted to be supplied at the marked secondary voltage provided the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The new section on Source Marking has been added because many transformers are Page 116 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

117 reverse-fed, where the secondary is used as the input and the primary is used as the output. Reverse feeding, so that a step-up transformer becomes a step-down transformer and a step-down transformer becomes a step-up transformer, will work according to the turns ratio of the transformer. However, issues may arise in terms of wire insulation and cooling, so if a transformer is reverse-fed, it should only be done according to the manufacturer's instructions. Question 212: Which of the following statements about transformers is true? A: The impedance of a 15 KVA transformer must be on the nameplate. B: A transformer can be reverse-fed if installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. C: The date of manufacture must be on the transformer nameplate. D: All dry type transformers can be reverse fed, where the supply is connected to the secondary of the transformer. Question 213: Battery and Cell Terminations. Question ID#: This new section includes requirements for (a) how conductors are connected to batteries, (b) the minimum required ampacities of field-installed battery conductors, and (c) how the conductors that connect batteries on separate levels or racks should be installed (A) requires that when mating dissimilar metals, antioxidant material suitable for the battery connection shall be used. The informational note that follows 480.3(A) refers the installer to the battery manufacturer's installation instructions for guidance on what types of antioxidant should be used. Antioxidant aids in the prevention of corrosion as well as provides for a better connection, especially in the event that dissimilar metals are used when terminating the cable to the battery (B), requires the cross-sectional area of field-assembled inter-cell and inter-tier connectors and conductors to be large enough so that the temperature rise under maximum load and at maximum ambient temperature cannot exceed the safe operating temperature of the conductor insulation or the conductor supports. Electrical connections shall not put mechanical strain on battery terminals (C) requires that electrical connections from cables to batteries and between cells on separate levels or racks shall not subject the battery terminals to mechanical strain and also requires the use of terminal plates whenever practicable. Using terminal plates allows for less strain on battery terminals and lessens the likelihood that a battery acid leak will corrode the electrical termination. Question 213: When the terminal of a battery and the interconnecting cable are of different materials, what must be used at the point of connection? A: Terminals listed for fine strand cables. B: Listed terminals. C: A terminal listed as corrosion-resistant. D: Antioxidant. Page 117 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

118 Question 214: 480.8(C) Racks and Trays. Accessibility Question ID#: Storage battery terminals must be readily accessible for readings, inspection, and cleaning if maintenance on the batteries is required.â One side of transparent battery containers must be readily accessible for inspection of internal components. Most battery systems require visual inspection.â All storage batteries require periodic or regular monitoring of voltage, resistance, and physical condition.â If the storage batteries are not readily accessible, maintenance personnel can be put in danger climbing on ladders or over obstacles to perform the monitoring or maintenance.â Voltage levels of batteries connected in series can be high, and a shock hazard definitely exists. Some equipment designs place the batteries in closed modules with embedded monitoring.â In these cases maintenance is not required or even possible, and the battery terminals are not required to be readily accessible. Battery terminals must be readily accessible for readings, inspections, and cleanings. Readily accessible means equipment is capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections without requiring personnel to use tools, to climb over or remove obstacles, or to resort to portable ladders. Question 214: If storage battery terminals require periodic inspection and cleaning, what is required? A: The batteries must be housed in transparent modules. B: The battery terminals must be readily accessible. C: The batteries must be stored on open racks. D: The battery terminals must be accessible. Question 215: Battery Locations. Question ID#: A number of new requirements have been added for battery locations: 480.9(C) Spaces About Battery Systems Minimum 1 inch clearance between a battery and a wall on the side that does not require maintenance. Work space is measured from the edge of the battery cabinet, rack, or tray (D) Top Terminal Batteries When batteries with terminals on the top are installed on racks, the required working space between the batteries and the row or ceiling above the batteries is per the manufacturer's instructions (E) Egress The personnel doors for entrance to or egress from the battery room must open in the direction of egress and be equipped with panic hardware. A personnel door(s) intended for entrance to, 480.9(F) Piping in Battery Rooms No gas piping is permitted in a dedicated battery room. and egress from, rooms designated as battery rooms shall open in the direction of egress and shall be equipped with listed panic hardware (G) Illumination Illumination must be provided in a battery room unless the battery room is lit from an adjacent light source. Lighting cannot be controlled by automatic means only. Lighting cannot expose personnel servicing the luminaires to energized battery components. Page 118 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

119 Question 215: How is battery system working space to be measured? A: From the edge of the battery cabinet, racks, or trays. B: From battery terminals. C: From the center of the battery. D: From the edge of the battery. Question 216: Isolating Means. Question ID#: There were three editorial changes to this section on the isolating means for equipment over 1000 volts. The isolating means completely isolates high voltage equipment from all ungrounded conductors. A separate isolating means is not required if there are other ways of de-energizing the equipment for inspection and repairs. In the 2011 NEC, one of the ways to de-energize the equipment was by a "draw-out-type metal-enclosed switchgear unit." Throughout the NEC in 2014 "metal-enclosed switchgear" has been changed to "switchgear." If the isolating means is not interlocked with another circuit-interrupting device, a warning sign is required instructing the user not to open the switch under load. A reference to (B) has been added here which points to a section on field-applied hazard markings. The warning sign must use a standardized system of words, colors, and symbols. The warning sign or label must be permanently fixed to the equipment used as the isolating means and cannot be handwritten. The warning sign or label must be durable enough to withstand the environment where the equipment is installed. The warning sign(s) or label(s) on isolating means shall comply with (B). An identified fuseholder and fuse shall be permitted as an isolating switch. The 2011 NEC said both the fuse and fuseholder had to be "identified for the purpose." The 2014 NEC simply says the fuse and fuseholder must be identified. Saying "identified for the purpose" was not necessary because the definition of "identified" means "recognizable as suitable for the specific purpose, function, use, environment, or application." Question 216: Which of the following statements about a warning sign for a high voltage isolating means is correct? A: A warning sign is required for all isolating means for equipment over 1000 volts. B: If a warning sign is required, it must be installed on the equipment used as the isolating means. C: The warning sign can be handwritten if the equipment is in a dry location. D: The warning sign can be located adjacent to the isolating means. Page 119 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

120 Question 217: Switchgear Used as Service Equipment. Question ID#: High voltage switchgear (over 1000 volts) that is used as service equipment must include a ground bus for the connection of service cable shields. The ground bus also provides a place to attach safety grounds during maintenance work. A new requirement says a notice must be posted at the equipment if access to the switchgear is limited to the serving utility or if the utility must provide authorization for onsite personnel to service the equipment. A warning sign that reads, DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT, is also required on panels and doors that provide access to live parts over 1000 volts. The notice that warns onsite personnel that access to the high voltage switchgear is limited to the serving utility will increase worker safety. Maintenance employees cannot de-energize equipment that is owned by the utility. Working on energized high voltage switchgear is a very special skill and very dangerous work. If access to the switchgear is limited to the utility, facility technicians will be reminded by the notice that they should not attempt to work on the equipment. High voltage switchgear used as service equipment must include a ground bus. This new section in Article 490 of the 2014 NEC about high voltage switchgear used as service equipment was moved from Article 225, Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders. Question 217: What is the purpose of the ground bus required by Section for high-voltage switchgear used as service equipment? A: It provides a connection point for service cable shields. B: It acts as a grounding electrode and provides lightning protection. C: It provides a neutral connection for line to neutral loads. D: It stabilizes the voltage to ground. Question 218: Substations. Question ID#: This section on Substations in Article 490 has been moved from Article 225, Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders. An important new section on design documentation for substations has been added. Documentation on the engineered design of the substation must be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. The substation design must be done by a licensed professional engineer who is primarily engaged in the design of substations. The documentation for the substation design must include information on the following: (1) General (2) Protective Grounding (3) Grounding Live Parts (4) Transformers and Regulators (5) Conductors (6) Circuit Breakers, Switches and Fuses (7) Switchgear Assemblies (8) Metal-Enclosed Bus (9) Surge Arrestors Documentation of the substation design by a licensed engineer shall be available. The 9 items above are from the code language prior to the Errata No Providing documentation on the substation design will help the Authority Having Jurisdiction in the plan review process. The inspection department will have the documentation plus a single-line diagram of the switchgear that identifies the interlocks, isolation means and all the voltage sources for the substation. Substations Page 120 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

121 that are not utility owned fall under the requirements of the National Electrical Code and must be inspected to ensure a safe installation. The single-line diagram of the switchgear must be posted in a readily visible location within the same room or enclosed area where the switchgear is located. Question 218: In the design documentation provided for a new substation, which of the following items is NOT required? A: Conductor terminations. B: Motor rotation of cooling fans. C: Disconnection of fuses. D: Types of enclosures. Chapter 4 - Additional Questions Question 219: Battery Locations. Question ID#: Question 219: Which of the following installations is a Code violation? A: Exit doors that open outward from the battery room. B: Luminaires that are installed above the spaces between battery racks. C: Batteries that are installed directly against a wall. D: Sprinkler pipe installed inside a battery room. Question 220: Vending Machines. Question ID#: Question 220: Which of the following statements about a vending machine that was manufactured in 2010 is true? A: If the vending machine is cord-and-plug connected, GFCI protection cannot be built into the cord. B: If the vending machine is directly wired, it does not require GFCI protection. C: If the vending machine is cord-and-plug connected, the GFCI protection cannot be built into the attachment plug. D: If the vending machine is directly wired, it must be connected to a GFCI protected circuit. Question 221: 400.7(A)(11) Flexible Cords and Cables. Uses Permitted. Question ID#: Question 221: When connecting a wall-mounted flat screen TV to a receptacle outlet which of the following methods is permitted? A: Installing the TV cord through the wall to a receptacle outlet on the other side of the wall. B: Installing a standard extension cord inside the wall between the TV and an existing outlet. C: Installing a listed cord and cable power assembly. D: Installing the TV cord inside the wall. Question 222: 406.5(E) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar Work Surfaces. Question ID#: Page 121 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

122 Question 222: If a receptacle assembly for countertop applications is installed on a countertop in a commercial kitchen: A: The assembly cannot be mounted within 6 ft. of a sink. B: The assembly is not required to be listed. C: The assembly is not required to be listed as providing GFCI protection. D: The assembly shall be permitted to be listed as providing GFCI protection. Question 223: Tire Inflation and Automotive Vacuum Machines. Question ID#: Question 223: Which of the following statements about a tire inflation machine is true? A: A tire inflation machine installed under a canopy is not required to have GFCI protection. B: A coin operated tire inflation machine installed at a car wash requires GFCI protection. C: A 240 V tire inflation machine installed at a rental car facility requires GFCI protection. D: Credit card operated tire inflation machines installed at convenience markets do not require GFCI protection. Question 224: Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. Question ID#: Question 224: A 12 inch X 48 inch fluorescent luminaire is attached directly to a wood ceiling. The luminaire is supplied by a cable with a connector that attaches directly to a knockout in the top of the luminaire. All splices are contained within the luminaire. According to section , what is required of the wood surface behind the luminaire? A: It must be noncombustible material since the surface is 180 sq. in. or larger. B: The luminaire must be lowered so that it is not directly attached to the wood ceiling. C: Nothing, since the installation does not involve the use of an outlet box. D: It must be covered with noncombustible material since the surface is 180 sq. in. or larger. Question 225: Space for Conductors Outlet Boxes to be Covered Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet Boxes. Question ID#: Question 225: In a completed installation, what is required of a listed fan rated outlet box installed in a ceiling? A: It must be provided with a cover. B: It must be listed as a fan canopy. C: It must be installed in a noncombustible surface. D: It must be covered with a ceiling fan. Question 226: Tamper-Resistant Receptacles. Question ID#: Question 226: Where are tamper-resistant receptacles required for a 125-volt, 15-ampere outlet? A: Behind the refrigerator in a dwelling. B: Behind the bed in a motel sleeping room. C: As part of a desk lamp in a motel suite. D: Behind a flat screen TV mounted 6 ft. above the floor in a dwelling. Question 227: (A)&(B) Duct Heaters. Installation. General and Limited Access. Question ID#: Page 122 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

123 Question 227: Which of the following statements about the installation of electric resistance duct heaters is correct? A: This type of heater is required to be readily accessible. B: Access doors are required to open at least 90 degrees. C: The minimum width for the access to the heater is 48 inches or the length of a removable ceiling tile, whichever is smaller. D: This type of heater is not permitted to be installed above a suspended ceiling. Question 228: 406.3(E) Receptacle Rating and Type. Controlled Receptacle Marking. Question ID#: Question 228: Where is the controlled receptacle marking required? A: In bathrooms. B: For receptacles controlled by a timer. C: In guest rooms or guest suites. D: For receptacles that are controlled by two separate devices. Question 229: Generators. Marking. Question ID#: Question 229: Which types of generators are required to be marked with the power factor? A: Generators 15 kw and larger. B: Generators that have a bonded neutral. C: All generators. D: Generators over 15 kw. Question 230: Appliances. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection. Question ID#: Question 230: Which of the following GFCI devices is readily accessible? A: A GFCI receptacle located 3 feet above a door that supplies power to a fly fan at a restaurant. B: A GFCI receptacle located behind a large appliance. C: A GFCI circuit breaker located in a panelboard within an electric room. D: A GFCI receptacle located behind a commercial washing machine. Question 231: (G) Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: Question 231: Which of the following statements about the disconnecting means for fluorescent luminaires is correct? A: If the luminaries are controlled by a three-way switch, an additional disconnecting means is not required. B: If the overcurrent protection for the luminaires is a circuit breaker, an additional disconnecting means is not required. C: Disconnecting means are not required when qualified persons service the installation. D: Disconnecting means are required to be installed when a ballast is replaced. Question 232: 406.9(B)(1) Receptacles of 15 and 20 Amperes in a Wet Location. Question ID#: Page 123 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

124 Question 232: Where are extra duty covers required for receptacles? A: At a dwelling, in a crawl space. B: At a dwelling, on a deck. C: At a dwelling, inside a screened in porch. D: At a dwelling, inside a car port. Question 233: (A) Grounding. Dry-Type Transformer Enclosures. Question ID#: Question 233: Which of the following statements about grounding and bonding at a dry-type transformer is true? A: A terminal bar used for connecting grounding and bonding conductors shall be insulated from the transformer enclosure. B: A terminal bar used for connecting grounding and bonding conductors shall be able to accept conductors sized a minimum of 1/0 AWG. C: A terminal bar used for connecting grounding and bonding conductors can be mounted above the transformer vents. D: A terminal bar used for connecting grounding and bonding conductors shall be secured inside the transformer enclosure. Question 234: 408.4(B) Field Identification Required. Source of Supply. Question ID#: Question 234: What type of field marking is required at switchgear? A: Signs that include emergency phone numbers and contact information for authorized personnel. B: Signs that describe the equipment where the source of each feeder to the switchgear is located. C: Signs that describe any alternate sources of power. D: Signs that describe the source of each feeder and voltage. Question 235: Disconnecting Means Required for Generators. Question ID#: Question 235: Which of the following applies for a disconnect switch required for a generator that operates in parallel with another generator? A: It must be capable of being locked ON. B: It must be capable of being locked OFF. C: It must be readily accessible. D: It must be suitable for use as service equipment. Question 236: 406.4(D) General Installation Requirements. Replacements. Question ID#: Question 236: Which of the following is a true statement about replacement receptacles? A: A replacement GFCI receptacle in a garage is not required to be readily accessible. B: AFCI replacement receptacles in a bedroom are not required to be readily accessible because it is more convenient for the homeowner if the outlet is located behind the bed. C: A replacement receptacle for a bathroom receptacle must be AFCI protected. D: A replacement AFCI receptacle for a bedroom outlet must be readily accessible. Question 237: 404.2(C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. Question ID#: Page 124 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

125 Question 237: On a grounded general-purpose branch circuit, if a single-pole snap switch supplied with NM-Cable is mounted in a device box that will not be accessible after construction, which of the following locations requires a grounded conductor at the switch location? A: Where a switch controls a receptacle load. B: Where a switch is located in an attic. C: Where lighting in the area is controlled by an automatic means. D: Where the switch is installed in the living room of a dwelling. Chapter 5 Question 238: Multiwire Branch Circuits. Deleted. Question ID#: Section , about the use of multiwire branch circuits in Class I, Division I locations, has been deleted. Wiring methods and materials used in Class I locations have stricter requirements than those used in ordinary locations due to the increased hazard that exist because of the flammable liquids or vapors that might be present. Multiwire branch circuits are still permitted in hazardous locations if all ungrounded conductors are disconnected simultaneously at the point where the circuit originates. The previous Code requirement did not allow a multiwire branch circuit to be used in a Class I, Division 1 location unless the disconnecting device for the circuit opened all ungrounded conductors of the circuit at the same time. The intent of the Code section was to ensure that there was never a situation where an ungrounded conductor that was part of a multiwire branch circuit could be disconnected by itself without also disconnecting the other ungrounded circuit conductor of the circuit. If only one of the two ungrounded conductors are disconnected, then there is potential for return current from the other ungrounded conductor to flow on the common shared grounded conductor which could create a spark or ignition source if it is opened by the electrician working on the de-energized portion of the circuit. Section was removed because it was already covered in Section 210.4(B). Section 210.4(B) requires each multiwire branch circuit to be provided with a means that will simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuit originates. If all ungrounded conductors of a multiwire circuit are disconnected, there is no chance of a spark in a hazardous location setting off a fire or explosion. Multiwire branch circuits are still permitted in hazardous locations as long as they comply with 210.4(B). Question 238: What is required of a multiwire branch circuit that is used in a Class I, Division 1 location? A: It must be capable of disconnecting all ungrounded conductors. B: Multiwire branch circuits are not permitted in hazardous locations. C: It must be capable of simultaneously disconnecting all grounded and ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuit originates. D: It must be capable of simultaneously disconnecting all ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuit originates. Page 125 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

126 Question 239: 514.3(B) Classified Locations. Question ID#: The illustration in Section that shows the classification of hazardous areas in the vicinity of fuel dispensers has been modified and a new illustration for hazardous areas around fuel dispensers with aboveground fuel storage tanks has been added. Figure in the NEC shows the classification of areas adjacent to fuel dispensers and Figure 514.3(B), new in the 2014 NEC, displays classified areas adjacent to fuel dispensers mounted on aboveground storage tanks. New figures display classified areas adjacent to fuel dispensers mounted on aboveground storage tanks. Although the physical measurements for hazardous areas around and under the fuel dispensers have remained unchanged in Figure 514.3, the illustration has been updated in an effort to reflect similar illustrations found in NFPA 30A-2012, Code for Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities and Repair Garages. It is also easier to recognize the below grade sump required to be considered as a Class I, Division 1 location under the fuel dispenser in the revised illustration. Figure 514.3(B) on page of the 2014 NEC is new and shows the classified area surrounding an aboveground storage tank and associated dispenser. The illustration makes it clear that the area within 20 feet of any edge of the dispenser measured horizontally is considered as a Class I, Division 2 location up to 18 inches above grade. Figure 514.3(B) also shows that the area within 18 inches horizontally of the dispenser as well as surrounding the envelope of the storage tank is considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location. The end and side views of the above ground tank in figure 514.3(B), clearly show that the area immediately above the dispenser is unclassified. Question 239: According to Figure 514.3(B), what is the classification for the area up to 18 inches above grade that is within 20 ft. horizontally of the fuel dispenser on an above ground tank? A: Unclassified. B: Class I, Zone 1. C: Class I, Division 2. D: Class I, Division 1. Question 240: 514.3(C)(D) and(e) Motor Fuel Dispensing Stations in Boatyards and Marinas. Closed Construction. Open Construction. Question ID#: The requirements for motor fuel dispensing stations in boatyards and marinas have been moved from Article 555, Marinas and Boat Yards, to Article 514, Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities. In any location the area around a fuel pump is a classified location. Requirements for installing fuel pumps in marinas and boatyards are better placed in Article 514. There are two types of dock and wharf construction included: (1) Closed construction docks have no space between the bottom of the dock and the surface of the water, such as concrete-enclosed expanded foam docks, and (2) Open construction, where the dock is built on stringers supported by piling or floats. Regardless of location, the area around a fuel pump is a classified location. For both closed and open construction type docks, the area 18 inches above the dock and 20 ft. in all directions from the outside edge of the dispenser is a Class I, Division 2 location. For closed construction docks, chases, enclosures, and voids below the surface of the dock are a Class I, Division 1 location. Any enclosures or chases below the surface of the dock within 20 ft. of the dispenser for an open construction dock are Class I, Division 1 locations. Closed construction docks have chases for fuel pipes and electrical conduit that extend the length of the dock. These areas can accumulate vapors and are an Page 126 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

127 explosion hazard. They are classified Class I, Division 1. If there is an air space between dock sections where fumes can be released, then they are Class I, Division 2 locations. If there are dock sections where flammable liquids and vapors cannot travel, then these dock sections are unclassified. Question 240: For a closed construction type of dock, how is a junction box below the surface of the dock immediately under a dispenser classified? A: Class II, Division 1 location. B: Class I, Division 2 location. C: Unclassified. D: Class I, Division 1 location. Question 241: 516 Spray Application, Dipping, Coating, and Printing Processes Using Flammable Combustible Materials. Question ID#: Article 516 has been completely re-built to update its requirements to match those found in NFPA 33, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, and NFPA 34, Standard for Dipping, Coating, and Printing Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Liquids. Some of the more significant changes include: For limited finishing workstations, the area 3 ft. horizontally from the enclosure is a classified location. For a printing process, see NEC figure 516.3(D)(6)(e). - The title of the article has been expanded to include printing processes. - 4 new definitions have been added and the existing 3 definitions have been revised. - 8 new illustrations have been added (A), Zone Classifications of Locations, now covers a new zone classification system. - A Limited finishing workstation is now addressed in 516.3(D)(5) (C) has been rewritten with new illumination requirements (F) has been added to address static electric discharge. Figure 516.3(D)(5) shows area classification requirements for limited finishing work stations. Section defines a limited finishing work station as: an apparatus that is capable of confining the vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are generated by a spray application process and that meets the requirements of Section 14.3 of NFPA 33, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Combustible Materials, but does not meet the requirements of a spray booth or spray room, as herein defined. Determining the classification of an area requires knowing what kind of paint or materials are being applied. For example, Figure 516.3(D)(6)(e) shows the area classification of the typical printing process. All of the associated classified areas having to do with a printing process are considered to be Class I locations due to the fact that printing processes utilize chemicals that produce a flammable vapor. Many of the captions for the illustrations and the illustrations themselves in Article 516 show that areas surrounding painting processes as well as equipment used in a printing process may be classified as either a Class I or Class II hazardous location. Page 127 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

128 Question 241: NEC Figure 516.3(D)(6)(e) shows the area classification for equipment used in a printing process. The area between the outer most edge of the equipment and the class I Division 2 area is considered a Class 1, division 1 area. This classified area extends in all directions horizontally and vertically from the press. According to NEC Figure 516.3(D)(6)(e), what is the distance between the outer most edge of equipment used in a printing process and the boundary between the Class 1, division 1 area and the Class 1, division 2 area? A: 10 feet B: 1 foot C: 5 feet D: 3 feet Question 242: Health Care Facilities. Definitions. Question ID#: Section 517.2, which provides definitions that are specific to health care facilities, has been revised. In an effort to more closely follow NFPA 99 (Standard for Health Care Facilities), several definitions and informational notes in this section have been added, deleted, or modified. Patient care space includes areas where patients are examined or treated while support space is The definition of "Emergency System" has been removed from section as well as Article 517 altogether and the term "essential electrical system" will be used instead. This change was made in an effort to remove confusion that may occur since there are similar, but yet great differences, in the way the term "Emergency System" is used in Article 517, Health Care Facilities, and Article 700, Emergency Systems. an area that does not physically impact patients or caregivers. The terms "Critical Branch" and "Life Safety Branch" have been slightly modified and the term "Emergency System" has been removed from those definitions. "Patient Care Area" has now become "Patient Care Space" and has additional descriptions within the definition in order to clarify the following locations: - Basic Care Space. Space in which failure of equipment or a system is not likely to cause injury to the patients or caregivers but may cause patient discomfort. - General Care Space. Space in which failure of equipment or a system is likely to cause minor injury to patients or caregivers. - Critical Care Space. Space in which failure of equipment or a system is likely to cause major injury or death to patients or caregivers. - Support Space. Space in which failure of equipment or a system is not likely to have a physical impact on patients or caregivers. Also, 5 informational notes have been added after the definition of "Patient Care Space" that provide actual examples of facilities that fall into these categories. Question 242: Which of the following is one of the functions of the essential electrical system? A: To provide backup power in order to maintain electricity during disruption of the alternate power source. B: To provide backup power in order to maintain electricity during disruption of emergency power. C: To provide backup power during the disruption of normal power sources. D: To provide alternate power primarily to 3-phase power equipment. Page 128 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

129 Question 243: Use of Isolated Ground Receptacles. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC, isolated ground receptacles were not permitted anywhere in a health care facility. In the 2014 NEC, isolated ground receptacles are not permitted within the patient care vicinity, but they are permitted in other locations of a health care facility such as at a nurse's station. The patient care vicinity is a space within 6 ft. of a patient bed, chair, table, or treadmill where a patient is receiving treatment. The patient care vicinity extends to a height of 7 ft., 6 in. above the floor. Isolated ground receptacles cannot be used in a patient care vicinity. Isolated ground receptacles, as described in 406.3(D), do not provide the redundant grounding required in patient care spaces. Isolated ground receptacles are used for sensitive electronic equipment and are permitted at nurse's stations or other areas outside the patient care vicinity where computers or monitoring equipment might be affected by electromagnetic interference. In the patient care vicinity, protecting the patient from the threat of electric shock is the main concern. Redundant grounding, where the metal raceways, boxes, and enclosures and an insulated equipment grounding conductor are used as equipment grounds, provides the highest level of protection from electric shock. Previously isolated ground receptacles were not permitted anywhere inside a health care facility. Now they are permitted in areas outside the patient care vicinity. Question 243: Which of the following is considered to be within the patient care vicinity of a hospital? A: A wall switch located 10 feet away from the patient bed that controls a light fixture installed 7 feet above the floor located directly over the patient bed. B: A receptacle located 5 feet from a patient bed. C: A luminaire installed 100 inches above the floor directly above a patient bed. D: A luminaire located 7 feet above the floor and 7 feet horizontally from the patient bed location. Question 244: (A) & (B) Patient Bed Location and Receptacles. Question ID#: Section (A) and (B), which apply to general care areas within health care facilities, have seen significant revisions regarding branch circuit identification and minimum number of receptacles required at patient bed locations. Patient bed locations shall be supplied by at least two branch circuits; receptacles supplied Section (A) deals with the minimum number of branch circuits required to serve patient bed locations and requires each patient bed location to be supplied by at least two branch circuits, one from the critical branch and one from the normal system. The term "emergency system", which was used in previous Code editions, has been replaced with the term "critical branch". A new requirement in this section requires that the electrical receptacles or the cover plate for receptacles supplied from the critical branch have a distinctive color or marking so as to be readily identifiable. The receptacles or cover plates shall also indicate the panelboard and branch-circuit number supplying them. from the critical branch shall be readily identifiable. Section (B) specifies the minimum number of receptacles required to serve patient bed locations in general care areas. In order to correlate with the new rules found in NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities Code, the previous requirement of at least four receptacles has been increased to eight. The revised text states that each patient bed location shall be provided with a minimum of eight receptacles. They shall be permitted to be of the single, duplex, or quadruplex type or any combination of the three. A duplex receptacle is counted as 2 receptacles, and a quad receptacle is counted as 4 receptacles. Page 129 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

130 All receptacles shall be listed "hospital grade" and shall be so identified. As part of the listing process, receptacles that are listed as "hospital grade" are required to be identified by the green dot on the front of the receptacle as well as marked "Hospital Grade" or "Hosp. Grade", typically on the back of the receptacle where visible during installation. Question 244: Receptacles in general care areas that serve patient bed locations must be marked so that they are readily identifiable in order to make it evident that they are supplied from what branch? A: Emergency. B: Essential. C: Normal. D: Critical. Question 245: (B) and (C) Patient Bed Location Receptacles and Operating Room Receptacles. Question ID#: Major changes have occurred in the minimum number of receptacles required at patient bed locations. There is also a new requirement detailing the minimum number of receptacles required to serve an operating room. A specific number of receptacles are required at patient bed locations and operating rooms. In section (B), the previous edition of the Code required critical care areas to have at least 6 receptacles serving the patient bed location. Now there must be at least 14 receptacles serving the patient bed location in critical care areas, and at least one of them is required to be supplied from either (1) the hospital normal system branch circuit or (2) a critical branch circuit supplied by a different transfer switch than the other receptacles at the location. Receptacle requirements for operating rooms have never been addressed by the NEC prior to this new Code cycle. Each operating room will be required to be equipped with a minimum of 36 receptacles. At least 12 of the receptacles shall be connected to either of the following: (1) The normal system branch circuit required by (A); or (2) A critical branch circuit supplied by a different transfer switch than the other receptacles at the same location. Question 245: Of the following receptacle configurations, which installation complies with the minimum number of receptacles required at a patient bed location in a critical care area? (Assuming that the normal system and critical branch are fed from different backup power transfer switches). A duplex receptacle counts as two receptacles. A: Twelve single receptacles fed from the critical branch and one single receptacle fed from the normal system branch circuit. B: Six duplex receptacles fed from the critical branch and one duplex receptacle fed from the normal system branch circuit. C: Twelve duplex receptacles fed from the equipment branch circuit. D: Six duplex receptacles fed from the critical branch and one single receptacle fed from the normal system branch circuit. Page 130 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

131 Question 246: Application of Other Articles. Question ID#: A clarification to section as well as a new informational note will help to eliminate confusion when applying the provisions of Article 700 to essential electrical systems in health care facilities. Previously, section required that the entire essential electrical system meet the requirements found in Article 700 (Emergency Systems) except as amended by Article 517. A hospital essential electrical system is made up of 3 parts: (1) the equipment system, (2) the life safety branch, and (3) the critical branch. Now only the life safety branch, which includes exit signs, must meet the requirements of Article 700. The new Code text states that instead of the entire essential electrical system needing to meet the requirements of Article 700, only the life safety branch of the essential electrical system must meet the requirements found in Article 700. The significance of this change is that now only the following systems or components are required to comply with Article 700: - Means of egress illumination - Exit signs - Alarms and alerting systems - Communication systems - Generator illumination and essential generator receptacles - Generator accessories needed for generator performance - Elevators - Automatic doors These systems and components that make up the life safety branch are found in section and assist in creating a safe environment for occupants to exit the building in an emergency. Prior to this change, the entire essential electrical system was required to comply with Article 700, except where amended in Article 517. The essential electrical system of a health care facility includes far more than just the minimum systems or components needed to safely exit the building. The essential electrical system includes provisions for supplying limited lighting, selected receptacles and selected power circuits to critical care areas and to the equipment system to power basic hospital operation. This new change will ease some of the restrictions that were previously placed on essential electrical systems by Article 700 and limit them to only the life safety branch. Question 246: In a health care facility, which of the following is part of the life safety branch and must comply with Article 700 requirements? A: Manually operable egress doors. B: Receptacles in waiting rooms. C: Parking lot lighting. D: Signaling systems for elevators. Page 131 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

132 Question 247: Essential Electrical Systems for Hospitals. Question ID#: There have been a number of changes to Section , Essential Electrical Systems for Hospitals. The changes were made to help align the NEC with NFPA , Health Care Facilities Code. In (B) the term "emergency system" was deleted. Now there are 3 separate branches to the Essential Electrical System: Equipment Branch, Life Safety Branch, Critical Branch. The Essential Electrical System must be capable of supplying a limited amount of lighting and power service that is considered essential for life safety and effective hospital operation during the time the normal electrical service is interrupted for any reason. The three branches of the essential electrical system are equipment, critical, and life safety. The receptacles or the receptacle cover plates that are connected to the essential electrical system must be marked with a distinctive color, usually red, so they are readily identifiable. The change is that now receptacles that are connected to the equipment branch must also be identified, as well as receptacles connected to the critical branch and the life safety branch. New Section (F), Feeders from Alternate Power Source, permits a single feeder from a generator or other alternate source to feed the entire Essential Electrical System, up to the point where the life safety, critical, and equipment branch separate. New Section (G), Coordination, requires that overcurrent protective devices that protect the essential electrical system must be coordinated for the length of time that a fault extends beyond 0.1 seconds. Most short circuit or ground faults would clear much faster than 0.1 seconds. Coordination is meant to prevent cascading outages and localize a fault to the overcurrent device immediately upstream from the fault. Question 247: Which of the following is NOT part of the essential electrical system in a hospital? A: Equipment branch. B: Emergency branch. C: Critical branch. D: Life safety branch. Page 132 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

133 Question 248: (E) Essential Electrical Systems. Receptacle Identification. Question ID#: Non-locking-type, 125-volt, 15-and 20-ampere receptacles shall have an illuminated face or an indicator light to indicate that there is power to the receptacle. The general requirement in section (A) specifies that (E) applies to nursing homes and limited care facilities such as health clinics. It does not apply to hospitals. In order to identify receptacles as being part of the essential electrical system in a nursing home or limited care facility, all receptacles, or the receptacle cover plates, must have a distinctive color or marking, usually red, to identify them as being powered by the essential electrical system. In addition, in the 2014 NEC, non-locking, 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles must have an illuminated face or indicator light. In a nursing home or limited care facility, non-locking, 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles supplied by the critical and life safety branches must have an illuminated face or The essential electrical system in a nursing home or limited care facility is made up of the critical branch and the life safety branch. Both the critical branch and the life safety branch are powered by the emergency generator when the utility power fails. indicator light to show there is power to the receptacle. If the power goes out in a nursing home or similar facility, nonessential loads will drop out, and there will be a short period of time before the generator will start supplying circuits that are connected to the critical and life safety branch. When staff are caring for patients with the general lighting at less than 100% levels, illuminated receptacles will indicate they are powered up and available for use with cord-and-plug connected equipment. Losing power in a nursing home is an emergency that staff will have to respond to quickly to guarantee patient safety. Illuminated receptacle outlets will reassure nursing home staff that power is available and ready. A tentative interim amendment has been submitted that would make NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities Code responsible for receptacle configuration instead of the NEC. Question 248: Which of the following statements about 125-volt, non-locking receptacles supplied by the essential electrical system in a nursing home is correct? A: The receptacles must be illuminated. B: The receptacles must be rated 20-amps. C: The receptacles must be GFCI protected. D: The cover plates must be brown, ivory, or white. Page 133 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

134 Question 249: and 547.5(F) Agricultural Buildings. Definitions and Separate Equipment Grounding Conductor. Question ID#: Article 547, Agricultural Buildings, has seen two significant revisions during the 2014 Code cycle. One item is a clarification to the definition of an equipotential plane and the other is a new provision to allow aluminum conductors to be installed underground. The last part of the definition in of an equipotential plane has been reworded in order to make it clear that its purpose is "to minimize voltage potentials within the plane and between the planes, the grounded equipment, and the earth". Underground equipment grounding conductors in the scope of Article 547 must be insulated or covered. The old definition said the purpose of an equipotential plane was "to prevent a difference in voltage from developing within the plane." This change was made in order to align with the true intent of an equipotential plane, which has always been to minimize voltage potentials to a level that a potential shock hazard does not exist. Another change in now allows the use of aluminum equipment grounding conductors installed underground at agricultural buildings. Section 547.5(F) states that equipment grounding conductors installed underground within a location falling under the scope of Article 547 shall be insulated or covered. The previous Code language was similar but only allowed the use of a copper conductor. Copper conductors were previously required because of their ability to resist corrosion, but studies have since shown that aluminum also has excellent corrosion-resistant properties, especially in moist areas where ammonia, carbon dioxide, and methane are present. Question 249: Which of the following best describes an equipotential plane as related to an agricultural building? A: An area where wire mesh is placed under concrete and bonded to all metal structures that may become energized. B: An area where fiberglass mesh is embedded in concrete, bonded to all metal structures that may become energized, and connected to the electrical grounding system. C: An area where wire mesh is placed on concrete, bonded to all metal structures that may become energized, and connected to the electrical grounding system. D: An area where wire mesh is placed under concrete, bonded to all metal structures that may become energized, and connected to the electrical grounding system. Page 134 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

135 Question 250: (H) Under-Chassis Wiring (Exposed to Weather). Question ID#: Under-chassis wiring (exposed to weather) for a mobile home that operates at 120 volts or higher can be in any raceway approved for use in a wet location or that will provide protection from physical damage. The conductors inside the raceway must be listed for use in wet locations. The new language does away with the requirement to use Schedule 80 PVC or RTRC listed for exposure to physical damage when the conduit comes out of the ground and terminates to a factory-installed conduit or enclosure. The old rules required rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit for under-chassis wiring (exposed to weather) for a mobile home. If the wiring method was installed tight up against the frame, it was permitted to be installed in RTRC, EMT, MI cable, or PVC conduit. Under-chassis wiring needs to be protected by conduit or raceway approved for use in wet locations. Mobile homes are manufactured under HUD regulations. Non-metallic conduit has been installed in mobile homes at the factory for many years. The practice of installing rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit was abandoned long ago as impractical or unnecessary because of other conduits being listed for wet locations or that will provide protection from physical damage. The changes made at Section (H) will permit the Authority Having Jurisdiction to approve nonmetallic wiring methods for under-chassis wiring for mobile homes. Question 250: Which of the following wiring methods, installed in a moist area under the chassis of a mobile home, is required to be enclosed within a raceway that is suitable for use in wet locations? A: An alarm cable that operates at 24 volts DC. B: A satellite coax cable. C: A 240-volt type cable that supplies power to a clothes dryer. D: Cat-5 telephone cable. Question 251: 590.4(D)(2) Receptacles in Wet Locations. Question ID#: There has been no actual change to the Code in section 590.4(D)(2) but, since that section references 406.9(B)(1), the changes at 406.9(B)(1) will apply to the 15 and 20 amp 125-volt and 250-volt receptacles installed in a wet location for temporary installations governed by article 590. Temporary installations will now also require "extra duty" covers for 15- and 20-ampere 125and 250- volt receptacles in wet locations. This now means that the "extra duty" covers mentioned in section 406.9(B)(1) will need to be installed on all 15- and 20- amp 125-V and 250 V receptacles installed in a wet location for temporary installations, including at one- and two-family dwellings. This new requirement comes as a result of the failure of the commonly used plastic "in use" covers that break off easily leaving the receptacle fully exposed and unprotected from the weather. Section 406.9(B)(1) also requires the following: - Receptacles of 15- and 20-amperes installed in a wet location shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof whether or not the attachment plug cap is inserted. - All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt non-locking-type receptacles shall be listed weather-resistant type. Since Article 590 applies to all temporary electric power and lighting installations, the provisions in 590.4(D)(2) will be required for the receptacles used in areas such as job sites during construction and temporary events. The types of areas covered include residential, commercial, and industrial locations. Page 135 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

136 Question 251: Which of the following temporary jobsite receptacles are required to have a cover that is listed as "extra duty"? A: All receptacles used in a wet location. B: 30-amp 125-volt receptacles used in a wet location. C: Those receptacles that are also equipped with GFCI protection. D: 20-amp 125-volt receptacles used in a wet location. Question 252: 590.4(I) Termination(s) at Devices. Question ID#: In temporary installations, when a flexible cord or cable enters an enclosure that has devices where conductors are terminated, the fittings for the flexible cord or cable must be listed for connecting the flexible cords and cables to boxes. In the 2011 NEC, the fittings that connected the cord or cable to the box had to be "designed for the purpose." The stronger language in the 2014 NEC will increase the safety of the installation by requiring fittings that have passed a round of testing by 3rd party testing labs. Fittings need to be listed for the purpose of connecting flexible cords and cables to boxes. Temporary installations are subject to abuse by workers of all trades. Temporary wiring is often removed and re-installed in another location. If a flexible cord or cable is connected to a device box where the conductors are terminated, and the cord or cable comes loose from the enclosure, the conductors can pull out of the terminations and create a ground fault. Listed fittings for flexible cord and cable keep the cord secure inside the fitting by different clamping mechanisms that are designed for the shape of the cord or cable. Using a fitting which is not listed to connect a flexible cord or cable to an enclosure means the cord or cable will not be as securely attached to the enclosure. Using an NM connector as a fitting to secure a round cord to a device box is an example of using a fitting which is not listed for the purpose and would be a clear Code violation. Question 252: In a temporary installation, when a flexible cord is connected to a box, which of the following statements is true? A: Non-metallic fittings are not permitted to be used with metallic boxes. B: When connecting flexible cords to boxes, an anti-short bushing must be installed. C: The fittings used with flexible cords cannot be connected to boxes with eccentric knockouts. D: The fittings used must be listed for connecting flexible cords and cables to boxes designed for the purpose. Page 136 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

137 Question 253: 590.4(J) Temporary Installations. General. Support. Question ID#: Temporary electrical wiring on construction sites is a necessity for all trades to finish their projects, and electrical wiring that serves power to a construction site must be installed safely in order to protect all personnel from electrical shock. Branch circuit flexible cords and cables cannot be installed on the floor. Extension cords used on construction sites for power hand tools and portable equipment are required to be GFCI protected, and that has definitely saved lives. However, many times feeder and branch circuit wiring installed for other uses such as lighting may not be GFCI protected and are dangerous. This is especially true if they are laid on the ground or are in a wet environment and not properly protected from physical damage (J) now clearly defines that all cable assemblies and flexible cords that serve branch circuits and feeders shall not be installed on the floor or ground, and they shall be supported in place at intervals that will protect them from physical damage. Support for these types of cables shall be in the form of staples, cable ties, straps, or similar type fittings. Vegetation shall not be used as a method of support. Extension cords which derive their power from GFCI type protected devices shall not be required to comply with 590.4(J). Question 253: Which of the following temporary electrical wiring types is NOT required to be supported and protected from physical damage? A: A cable assembly serving a temporary panelboard. B: A multi-wire branch circuit cable serving lighting branch circuits. C: A flexible cord serving a 220-volt receptacle outlet. D: An extension cord plugged into a GFCI protected outlet. Chapter 5 - Additional Questions Question 254: Application of Other Articles. Question ID#: Question 254: Which of the following is NOT part of the life safety branch in a hospital? A: Low pressure alarms for non-flammable medical gas. B: Receptacles in a patient care space. C: Directional exit signs. D: Fire alarms. Question 255: and 547.5(F) Agricultural Buildings. Definitions and Separate Equipment Grounding Conductor. Question ID#: Question 255: What is required of a feeder with an equipment grounding conductor that is installed underground to supply power to an electric panel at an agricultural building? A: The equipment grounding conductor must be insulated or covered. B: The feeder conductors must be in a cable type wiring method. C: The equipment grounding conductor must be bare. D: The equipment grounding conductor must be aluminum. Page 137 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

138 Question 256: 590.4(J) Temporary Installations. General. Support. Question ID#: Question 256: A cable assembly or flexible cord installed as temporary wiring to serve a 120/240-volt, single-phase panelboard is required to have a wiring support method? A: At intervals not exceeding 3 feet. B: At intervals that ensure it is protected from physical damage. C: At intervals not exceeding 6 feet. D: At intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Question 257: (B)&(C) Patient Bed Location Receptacles and Operating Room Receptacles. Question ID#: Question 257: In an operating room, how many receptacles are required to be supplied by a different transfer switch than the other receptacles in the same operating room? A: 12. B: 24. C: 36. D: 14. Question 258: 590.4(I) Termination(s) at Devices. Question ID#: Question 258: Which of the following statements about cord connectors used in temporary installations is true? A: They are required to be attached to the enclosure with double locknuts. B: They are required to be listed. C: They are required to have a wire basket that encircles the cord. D: They are required to be suitable for outdoor locations. Question 259: 590.4(D)(2) Receptacles in Wet Locations. Question ID#: Question 259: Which of the following temporary receptacles does not require a cover that is "extra duty"? A: A 15-amp, 125-volt receptacle. B: A 30-amp, 125-volt receptacle. C: A 20-amp, 250-volt receptacle. D: A 15-amp, 250-volt receptacle. Question 260: (A) & (B) Patient Bed Location and Receptacles. Question ID#: Question 260: Which of the following satisfies the minimum number of receptacles required to serve a patient bed location in a general care area? A: Three duplex receptacles. B: Two duplexes and two single receptacles. C: One quadruplex receptacle and one duplex receptacle. D: Three duplexes and two single receptacles. Page 138 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

139 Chapter 6 Question 261: Listing Markings. Question ID#: According to all signs have to be listed and provided with the installation instructions. This includes fixed, mobile and portable electric signs, section signs, outline lighting, and retrofit kits, regardless of voltage. With the written special permission of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, this requirement can be waived. According to all signs and retrofit kits must be marked to indicate that field wiring and installation instructions are required. In the 2011 NEC, section 600.4(E) specified that only section signs were required to be marked to indicate that field wiring and installation instructions were required. Now all signs, outline lighting, skeleton tubing systems, and retrofit kits shall be marked to indicate that field wiring and installation instructions are required. Fixed, mobile, or portable electric signs need to have installation instructions. Exception: Portable, cord-connected signs are not required to be marked. These new marking requirements will be controversial. Section requires signs to be listed unless otherwise approved by special permission (See Article 100 definition of "special permission"). Part of the standard for signs that are listed to UL 48 is that they are required to be marked "installation and assembly required, see installation instructions". If special permission is being granted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) so that listing is not required, then do the signs still need to be marked as required in 600.4(E)? Furthermore, if during an inspection for a listed sign, the installer hands the installation instructions to the inspector and the entire installation is Code compliant but the sign sections are not physically marked to state that "installation instructions are required", would the inspector be required to reject the installation? Often, changes made to certain Code sections are a step in the right direction but don't quite make it to the finish line. Hopefully future Code proposals will work to eliminate these inconsistencies. Question 261: Which of the following signs are NOT required to be marked to indicate that field wiring and installation instructions are required? A: Portable cord-connected signs. B: Section signs. C: Retrofit kits. D: Skeleton tubing systems. Page 139 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

140 Question 262: 600.6(A)(1) Disconnects. At Point of Entry to a Sign Enclosure. Question ID#: Disconnects for electric signs and outline lighting must now be located at the point where the feeder or branch circuit enters the sign enclosure or pole. In the 2011 NEC, the disconnect could be located anywhere on the sign enclosure. This meant that the feeder or branch circuit could enter the sign enclosure at one end of the sign and the disconnect could be at the other end of the enclosure. Line-side conductors inside the sign would remain energized even if the disconnect was in the off position, posing a serious shock hazard to the sign technician. Requiring the disconnecting means at the point where the feeder or branch circuit enters the sign, or where the conductors enter the pole that supports the sign, will mean that when the disconnect is off all conductors inside the sign will be de-energized. A sign disconnect is required at the point the feeder circuit or branch circuit(s) enters the sign Exception: A disconnect shall not be required for branch or feeder circuits passing through the sign where enclosed in a Chapter 3 listed raceway. enclosure. For a sign that has an integral disconnect switch, it is common for individually insulated branch circuit conductors feeding the sign to be routed up inside the support pole or sign body before ever reaching the line side of the disconnecting means. Even when the disconnect switch is turned off, there are still live conductors inside the sign which can be dangerous for those servicing the sign who assume the sign has no power. Requiring the disconnecting means to disconnect the conductors at the point where the conductors enter the sign enclosure will ensure that there are no conductors within a sign pole or enclosure that are still live after the switch is opened. The exception allows conductors in listed raceways to pass through the sign enclosure without the need of a disconnect switch. It is important to understand that this will only apply if the conductors pass through the sign and do not terminate within the sign enclosure. Question 262: Which of the following conductors are required to be disconnected at the point where the conductors enter a sign enclosure? A: Circuit conductors that supply a convenience receptacle that happens to be secured to the sign post but does not enter the sign. B: Circuit conductors that supply a time clock mounted on the sign post but do not enter the sign enclosure. C: Feeder conductors passing from one section to another within a sign but are enclosed in liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. D: Branch circuit conductors entering a sign pole from an underground raceway stubbed into the pole base. Page 140 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

141 Question 263: Wiring Methods. Exception. Question ID#: A new exception has been added after Section in order to allow cord-and plug-connected equipment to be installed in elevator hoistways and similar areas without requiring the cords for these devices to be installed in a raceway. Section requires that raceways and cables such as rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, rigid nonmetallic conduit, wireways, type MC, MI, or AC cable must be used for conductors and optical fibers located in the following areas: - Hoistways Escalator and moving walk wellways Platform lifts, stairway chairlift runways Machinery spaces, control spaces, in or on cars Machine rooms and control rooms Listed cord-and plug-connected equipment does The new exception states that cords and cables of listed cord- and plug-connected equipment shall not be required to be installed in a raceway. As technology improves, the presence of high tech elevator monitoring equipment, computer displays, and power supplies become more common. This new exception eases the raceway requirements in order to allow for listed cord- and plug-connected equipment that was never intended to be wired with anything other than a cord and plug connection. not require a raceway. Other types of wiring methods used with elevators, escalators, platform lifts and stairway chairlifts, as outlined in (A), (B), and (C) are permitted. Question 263: Which of the following statements about the wiring methods used in an elevator hoistway is true? A: A flexible cord or cable which is part of listed equipment is not required to be installed in a raceway. B: Flexible cords and cables are not permitted to supply equipment inside an elevator car. C: The cord for a monitor mounted inside the elevator must be installed in a metallic raceway. D: The only wiring method permitted to supply equipment inside or attached to the elevator car is rigid or flexible metal conduit. Page 141 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

142 Question 264: Article 625 Electric Vehicle Charging System. Question ID#: Article 625, Electric Vehicle Charging Systems, has been reorganized, new definitions have been added, and a number of changes have been made.â Article 625 is now organized into 3 parts: Part I         General Part II         Equipment Construction Part III        Installation New definitions have been added for Cable Management System (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment), Output Cable to the Electric Vehicle, and Power-Supply Cord. The definition of a power-supply cord is, An assembly of an attachment plug and length of flexible cord that connects the electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) to a receptacle.â A power-supply cord includes the attachment plug and flexible cord that connects the electric The new definition of power-supply cord is important because some jurisdictions were only approving EVSE equipment that was hardwired and not approving EVSE equipment that was connected to a receptacle.â vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) to a receptacle. Section limits the length of the power-supply cord to 12 inches if the personnel protection system is located within the enclosure of the supply equipment or charging system.â The power-supply cord (not the output cable to the electric vehicle) can be between 6 ft. and 15 ft. long if the personnel protection system is located at the attachment plug, or within the first 12 inches of the power-supply cord.â   EVS equipment is permitted to be cord-and-plug connected in accordance with Only non-locking, grounding type receptacles are permitted to be used. Section permits EVSE equipment to be connected to 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere non-locking receptacle outlets.â EVSE equipment rated for a maximum of 250 V is permitted to be connected to 2-pole, 3-wire and 3-pole, 4-wire grounding-type nonlocking receptacle outlets rated not more than 50 amperes.â Connections can also be made to a supply of less than 50 volts DC. All other electric vehicle supply equipment not mentioned above must be hardwired with a permanent connection. Question 264: Which one of the following receptacle types is permitted to supply cord-and plug- connected electric vehicle supply equipment? A: A 250-volt, single-phase, 60-ampere, grounding-type, non-locking receptacle. B: A 250-volt, single-phase, 50-ampere, grounding-type, non-locking receptacle. C: A 125-volt, single-phase, 15-ampere, grounding-type, locking receptacle. D: A 125-volt, single-phase, 15-ampere, non-grounding type, non-locking receptacle. Page 142 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

143 Question 265: & System Grounding & Equipment Grounding and Bonding. Question ID#: Section , Grounding, in the 2011 NEC has been divided into System Grounding in and , Equipment Grounding and Bonding, in the 2014 NEC. Important clarifications have been made in both sections. The first sentence in states that separately derived power systems shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Parts I and II of Article 250. Simply put, if a separately derived system is used in conjunction with IT equipment, it must comply with the same rules as other separately derived systems installed in ordinary locations. The remainder of is a mirror image of existing requirements in section and states that power systems derived within listed IT equipment that supply IT systems through receptacles or cable assemblies supplied as part of this equipment shall not be considered separately derived for the purpose of applying Auxiliary grounding electrode conductors for IT equipment must comply with A new sentence has been added to and states that any auxiliary grounding electrode(s) installed for information technology equipment shall be installed in accordance with Section makes it clear that auxiliary grounding electrodes can be used, but the earth can never be used as an effective ground-fault current path. Section also says auxiliary ground rods are not required to be bonded to the grounding electrode system, or have a resistance to ground of 25 ohms or less. This is commonly violated when isolated ground-type receptacles are installed in an IT setting and the equipment grounding conductor is connected only to an auxiliary grounding electrode that has no direct connection back to the service or derived system, thus using the earth as a ground. At some point, equipment grounding conductors for branch circuits and feeders used for IT equipment are required to terminate directly at an equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service. See (D) and Exception for more information. Question 265: A power system derived within listed IT equipment that supplies IT systems through a cable assembly supplied as part of the equipment is NOT? A: Separately derived. B: Grounded. C: Isolated. D: Code compliant. Question 266: Selective Coordination. Question ID#: A new section has been added in Article 645 requiring selective coordination for critical operations data systems. A critical operations data system is defined in Section as an information technology (IT) equipment system that requires continuous operation for reasons of public safety, emergency management, national security, or business continuity. Section is new and requires the overcurrent protective devices for critical operations data systems to be selectively coordinated with all supply-side overcurrent protective devices. See Article 100 definition of "coordination (selective)". Similar requirements can be found in Article 708 (critical operations power systems or COPS) in section Critical operations data systems overcurrent protective devices have to be selectively coordinated with other supply-side OCPDs. Selective coordination is the process of designing an electrical system in which the upstream overcurrent device, nearest to the system fault, clears the fault without affecting the operation of the overcurrent devices that are ahead of it. In the case of a Page 143 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

144 critical operations data system, if an electrical system is selectively coordinated, then a fault on a 20-amp branch circuit caused by a shorted appliance cord in the break room should only cause the 20-amp overcurrent device to trip. This way, the 800-amp main breaker protecting the entire electric system won't trip and turn off other circuits that may be feeding critical data systems. Question 266: Which of the following types of IT equipment are considered to be part of a critical operations data system? A: The computer system and server that is used to dispatch waste management employees for neighborhood trash pickup. B: The computer system and server that is used to operate the phone system of a local hotel. C: The computer system and server that is used to operate the 911 call center for a police station. D: The computer system and server that is used to operate the receptionist desk at a doctor's office. Question 267: Article 646 Modular Data Centers. Question ID#: Modular Data Centers (MDC) are modular type, pre-fabricated units that contain information technology equipment (ITE), and the necessary electrical equipment such as supply and distribution wiring, overcurrent protection, grounding, and HVAC equipment.â New Article 646 describes the requirements for installing Modular Data Centers. These units are built in an offsite manufacturing facility, listed and labeled, and then delivered to a site as a complete package. Once on site, wiring from a facility is then installed to the pre-wired unit just the same as any pre-manufactured unit such as HVAC equipment. The use of the modular type data center can greatly reduce the cost of a traditional in-house installed data center. In some modular units, as a facilityâ s needs for greater data infrastructure capabilities expand, the modular unit components can be expanded quickly and more efficiently. They also are very adaptable for military installations, emergency situations, and for temporary events.  MDC units can be built for both exterior and interior use to suit a number of applications.â     A new article covers prefabricated units consisting of an outer enclosure housing ITE and various support equipment. Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent protection for a MDC is based on 646.6(B)(1) and (2) and is calculated in one of two ways. If the MDC is manufactured with its own self-contained service equipment and service conductors as part of the unit, then the service conductor overcurrent protection size is based on through For this type of application, the size of the overcurrent protection serving the unit shall have a rating or setting not higher than the ampacity of the conductors supplying the MDC. If the MDC does not come with pre-installed service equipment, and overcurrent protection is provided with the MDC, the conductors that supply the MDC are considered feeders or taps. The overcurrent protection must comply with the following: (1) The overcurrent protection shall consist of a single circuit breaker or set of fuses.â (2) The MDC shall be marked â œovercurrent PROTECTION PROVIDED AT MDC SUPPLY TERMINALS. (3) The supply conductors shall be considered either as feeders or as taps and be provided with overcurrent protection complying with  Page 144 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

145 Question 267: What is the maximum allowable overcurrent protection size for a MDC with self-contained service equipment and three, 75 degree C, 2/0 THWN copper service entrance conductors? A: 150 amperes. B: 225 amperes. C: 175 amperes. D: 200 amperes. Question 268: Maintenance Disconnecting Means. Question ID#: A maintenance disconnect for utilization equipment is now required for fountains. The 2011 NEC required a maintenance disconnect for pools, spas, and hot tubs. The 2014 has added fountains to the list of locations where a maintenance disconnect for equipment is required. The definition of a fountain in includes fountains, ornamental pools, dsiplay pools, and reflection pools. Drinking fountains are not included. A maintenance disconnect for utilization equipment in pools, fountains, spas, and hot tubs is required to disconnect all ungrounded conductors and to: - Be readily accessible. - Simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. - Be within sight from the equipment it supplies. - Be at least 5 feet from the inside wall of the pool, fountain, spa,or hot tub, unless the disconnect is separated from the water by a permanent barrier that when measured horizontally creates a 5 foot reach path between the water and the disconnect. The disconnect for the fountain is within sight of the fountain. Lighting is not required to have a maintenance disconnect, but illuminated signs are included as utilization equipment. There is an obvious danger of standing in water and coming in contact with a disconnecting means. The disconnect is required to be located at least 5 ft. away from the water to prevent this. The distance is measured to the inside wall of the fountain or pool that retains the water. The disconnecting means can be located closer than 5 ft. from the edge of the fountain if a barrier is installed and the reach path around the barrier is 5 ft. or more. Reach path means that a person at the inside wall of a fountain, pool, spa, or hot tub would have to reach at least 5 ft. to come in contact with the disconnect. The distance is measured from the water's edge. Question 268: The requirements for a maintenance disconnect for utilization equipment for a fountain include all of the following EXCEPT: A: Be readily accessible. B: Simultaneously disconnect the grounded (neutral) conductor and all ungrounded conductors. C: Be located at least 5 ft. away from the edge of the fountain. D: Be within sight of the equipment it supplies. Page 145 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

146 Question 269: (C) Motors. GFCI Protection. Question ID#: According to Section (C) in the 2011 NEC, GFCI protection was required for all 15- and 20- amp, single-phase 120-, 208-, and 240-volt branch circuits that supplied pool pump motors that were hardwired or cord-and-plug connected. Under this rule, a 120-volt 20-amp branch circuit was required to be GFCI protected, but a 120-volt pump supplied by a 25- or 30-amp branch circuit was not required to be GFCI protected. From a safety stand-point, this didn't make sense. The 2014 NEC corrected this problem by deleting the language that limited the requirement for GFCI protection to pumps supplied by 15- and 20- amp branch circuits. Under the 2014 NEC, cord-and-plug connected as well as hardwired pumps supplied by single-phase 120 to 240 volt branch circuits, regardless of their ampacity, are required to be GFCI protected. All single-phase, 120 through 240 volt branch circuits that supply pool pump motors are required to be GFCI protected. Question 269: Which of the following branch circuits for a swimming pool pump motor is required to be GFCI protected? A: A 20-amp, 3-phase, hardwired, 208 VAC branch circuit. B: A 30-amp, 3-phase, hardwired, 230 VAC branch circuit. C: A 15-amp, 3-phase, 230 VAC branch circuit, cord-and-plug connected. D: A 25-amp, 1-phase, hardwired, 230 VAC branch circuit. Question 270: (A)(1) and (2) Receptacles. Required Receptacles, Location. Circulation and Sanitation System, Location. Question ID#: In the 2011 NEC, Section required that permanently installed pools at dwellings have at least one GFCI protected, 125-volt, 15- or 20-amp receptacle connected to a general purpose branch circuit installed near the pool. This receptacle was required to be at least 6 feet from the pool but not more than 20 feet from the inside wall of the pool and not more than 6 feet, 6 inches above the grade or deck level surrounding the pool. The change to this section is to broaden the requirement to all locations, not just dwelling units. Public pools, hotel pools, and neighborhood pools are now all required to have at least one GFCI protected, 125-volt, 15- or 20-amp receptacle connected to a general purpose branch circuit installed at least 6 feet from the pool but not more than 20 feet from the inside wall of the pool and not more than 6 feet, 6 inches above the grade or deck level surrounding the pool. A receptacle outlet needs to be not less than 6 ft. and not more than 20 ft. from the inside wall of a permanent pool. The reason for requiring this receptacle was to prevent people from using extension cords plugged into non-gfci protected outlets and bringing the devices close to the edge of the pool. If such a practice was dangerous at dwelling units, it is equally dangerous at other locations. In the 2014 NEC, a receptacle on a general-purpose branch circuit is required at all permanently installed pools, not just at dwelling pools. Also, a change at (A)(2) did away with the requirement for a pool pump motor to be connected to a locking type receptacle. Receptacle outlets for circulation and sanitation pump motors still must be of the grounding type, consist of a single receptacle, and be GFCI protected, but they are no longer required to be of the locking type. Page 146 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

147 Question 270: Which locations require at least one GFCI protected, 125-volt, 15- or 20-amp, receptacle outlets installed near a swimming pool? A: Dwelling units only. B: Public pools only. C: Dwelling unit or public pools. D: Inflatable pools only. Question 271: (B)(6) Low-Voltage Luminaires. Question ID#: Listed low-voltage luminaires can now be installed within 5 ft. of the inside walls of a pool. In the 2011 NEC, lighting systems could not be installed closer than 10 ft. from the nearest edge of the water for pools, spas, or fountains. A new section has been added which permits low-voltage luminaires to be installed within 5 ft. of the pool under the following conditions: - The low-voltage luminaire is listed. - The low-voltage luminaire must be operated at or below the low-voltage contact limit. - The low-voltage luminaire must be supplied by transformers or power supplies that are listed for swimming pool and spa use. The transformer must be of the isolated winding type with an ungrounded secondary, but has a grounded metal barrier between the primary and secondary windings, or be of the double-insulated type. Some listed low-voltage luminaires can be located closer to the inside walls of a pool. The low-voltage contact limit is defined in as basically 15 volts RMS for AC voltages and 30 volts continuous for DC. Prior to this revision, some jurisdictions were permitting the installation of listed luminaires that complied with the low-voltage contact limit specified in of the 2011 NEC even though the NEC did not specifically permit such installations. In the 2011 NEC, the general requirement in Section 411.4(B) required luminaires to be located at least 10 feet from the edge of pools but permitted closer proximity if permitted in Article 680. Until the 2014 NEC, closer proximity was not permitted in Article 680. Now, provided low-voltage luminaires meet the conditions in (B)(6), the NEC permits luminaires to be installed less than 5 feet from the inside wall of pools, spas, and similar locations. Question 271: Which of the following statements about listed low-voltage luminaires installed in accordance with (B)(6) around swimming pools or spas is correct? A: Low-voltage luminaires are not permitted to be installed within 5 feet from the inside wall of a spa. B: Listed low-voltage luminaires meeting the conditions in (B)(6) are permitted to be installed less than 5 feet from the inside wall of a spa. C: Low voltage luminaires are required to be more than 10 feet from the inside wall of a swimming pool. D: Luminaires are not permitted to be installed within 10 feet of the inside wall of a spa. Page 147 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

148 Question 272: (A)(1) Wiring Methods. Feeders. Exception. Question ID#: The first printing of the 2014 NEC included an exception under (A) that allowed flexible metal conduit or cable type wiring methods with an insulated equipment ground to be used as feeders to pool equipment panels in one- and two-family dwellings. In fact this exception was not adopted as part of the 2014 NEC. NFPA has posted an errata notice on their website. Flexible metal conduit and cable assemblies other than Type MC are not permitted for feeders supplying pool equipment panelboards. The wiring methods permitted in (A)(1) for feeders to panelboards that supply swimming pool equipment are as follows: FMC CANNOT be used to supply a remote - Where the feeder is subject to physical damage, it is required to be installed in either RMC or IMC. - Where it is not subject to physical damage, it is permitted to be installed using any of the following wiring methods: - Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. - Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit. - Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit. - Electrical metallic tubing installed within or on a building. - Electrical nonmetallic tubing installed within a building. - Type MC cable installed within a building in a noncorrosive environment. panelboard that supplies branch circuits for a permanently installed swimming pool. Question 272: Which of the following wiring methods is required when installing a feeder from a service to a remote panelboard that is used for loads associated with a swimming pool at a motel, if the feeder is subject to physical damage? A: Nonmetallic sheathed cable. B: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. C: RMC or IMC. D: Electrical nonmetallic tubing installed within or on a building. Question 273: (C) Equipotential Bonding. Pool Water. Question ID#: Water that contains chemicals used to minimize growth of bacteria in pools and spas is highly conductive. If the water comes in contact with an electrical source such as a defective submerged luminaire or a pump motor, persons in the pool can be subject to a lethal shock hazard. The hazard is greatest in pools in which the water is electrically isolated from the pool's equipotential bonding grid by non-conductive fiberglass shells. The NEC requires protection from this shock hazard by maintaining an effective connection between the water itself and the pool's equipotential bonding grid. If the pool water is in direct contact with metal ladders or other conductive structures that are bonded to the equipotential bonding grid in accordance with Section (B), no further action is required. However, if a pool does not have such components, then a corrosion-resistant conductive structure with a surface area of at least 9 square inches must be installed in contact with the water and bonded to the equipotential bonding grid. This ensures that the pool water and the equipotential bonding grid have the same electrical potential. If it is bonded to the equipotential bonding grid, a properly sized stainless steel or red brass pipe that is used for circulating pool water is an effective way of complying with the requirements in (C). If the pool water is in direct contact with metal ladders that are bonded to the equipotential bonding grid, the water is considered to be effectively bonded to the equipotential bonding grid. The 2011 NEC said that an "intentional" bond had to be made between the pool or Page 148 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

149 spa water and the equipotential bonding grid. So even if ladders or underwater luminaries were bonded and in contact with the water, another bonded connection to the water was required. The new language in the 2014 NEC makes it clear that the water in a pool or spa must be in contact with the equipotential bonding grid, but if a pool ladder or other component is in contact with the water, an additional bonding means is not required. Question 273: Which of the following is permitted to bond pool water in a fiberglass shell to the equipotential bonding grid? A: A circular stainless steel disk that is 3 inches in diameter and is in contact with the water on only one side. B: A square piece of galvanized iron that is 1/4 inch thick and measures 12 inches X 12 inches. C: A piece of stainless steel that is 1/4 inch thick and measures 2 inches X 4 inches and is in contact with the water on only one side. D: A metal ladder that is in direct contact with pool water and is bonded to the equipotential bonding grid. Question 274: (B) Outdoor Installations. Bonding. Question ID#: A self-contained spa or hot tub now does not require an equipotential bonding grid. The 2014 NEC has incorporated a Tentative Interim Amendment from the 2011 NEC that permits a self-contained spa or hot tub to be installed on or above grade without a connection to an equipotential bonding grid. In order to install a spa or hot tub without an equipotential bonding grid underneath the perimeter surfaces, the spa or hot tub must meet the following conditions: - It must be self-contained and listed for aboveground use. - It cannot be identified for indoor use only. - It must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. - The top rim of the tub must be a minimum of 28 inches above any surface that extends up to 30 inches horizontally from the spa or hot tub. Requiring an equipotential bonding grid around a hot tub that was installed above ground usually meant cutting the concrete around the spa or hot tub and installing a bare No. 8 AWG copper conductor. This added considerable expense and a lot of extra work to the installation. In certain instances, an aboveground spa or hot tub does not require equipotential bonding of perimeter surfaces. There had not been any reported incidents of people getting shocked in an aboveground spa that could be tied to the lack of an equipotential bonding grid. Without proof that installing an equipotential bonding grid around a spa or hot tub reduced the shock hazard and increased safety for the general public, the NEC Code panels decided to do away with the requirement for an equipotential bonding plane for self-contained spas or hot tubs installed above ground. Question 274: Which of the following is one of the conditions that would permit a spa to be installed without equipotential bonding for the perimeter surfaces? A: The top rim of the spa is 26 inches above the perimeter surface. B: The spa is installed outdoors and listed for above ground use. C: The spa is identified as suitable for indoor use only. D: The spa is installed in the ground rather than above ground. Page 149 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

150 Question 275: (B) Fountains. Signs. GFCI Protection for Personnel. Question ID#: Section (B) has been revised to clarify the types of circuits supplying a fountain that are required to be provided with GFCI protection for personnel. In the 2011 NEC, "all circuits" supplying a sign were required to provide GFCI protection for personnel. "All circuits" could be interpreted to include low voltage data acquisition circuits, computer and video control circuits, as well as both feeders and branch circuits that are connected to a sign in or on a fountain. Even the secondary circuits of sign transformers, power supplies, or ballasts could be interpreted to need GFCI protection under the 2011 NEC language. In the 2014 NEC, Section (B) was revised to say that GFCI protection for personnel is only required for either branch circuits or feeders, but not both, that supply signs in or on a fountain. If a feeder supplying branch circuits for a sign is GFCI protected, then there is no need to provide GFCI protection at the branch circuit level also. Communication circuits, low voltage data acquisition circuits, and Class 2 control circuits are not required to be GFCI protected. Branch circuits or feeders supplying the sign shall have GFCI protection for personnel. Question 275: Which of the following statements correctly describes the requirements for circuits run to a sign in or on a fountain? A: Both the feeder that supplies a panel where a branch circuit to a sign in a fountain originates and the branch circuit itself are required to be provided with GFCI protection for personnel. B: Class 2 control circuits that supply a sign on a fountain are required to be provided with GFCI protection for personnel. C: All circuits, including data and communications circuits, run to a sign within a fountain are required to be provided with GFCI protection for personnel. D: If a feeder that supplies a panelboard where the branch circuit to a sign originates does not provide GFCI protection for personnel, the branch circuits to the sign originating at the panelboard are required to provide it. Question 276: 690.5(A) Ground-Fault Protection. Ground-Fault Detection and Interruption. Question ID#: Ground-fault detection equipment in grounded photovoltaic (PV) systems is now required to detect a ground-fault in the PV array DC conductors, including grounded and ungrounded conductors. The 2011 NEC did not say the ground-fault detection equipment had to be capable of detecting a ground-fault in the DC grounded conductor. Ground-fault detection equipment for PV systems must also be listed, so from now on listed ground-fault detection equipment must be capable of detecting a ground-fault in both grounded and ungrounded DC conductors. Ground-fault protection devices must detect a ground fault in the PV array, interrupt the flow of Older style ground-fault detection equipment had trouble detecting ground-faults in the grounded conductor. These undetected ground-faults were the cause of a number of rooftop fires where PV systems were installed. Newer style ground-fault detection equipment for PV systems will be able to sense ground-faults in both grounded and ungrounded conductors, and will have lower trip settings than older models. fault current, provide indication of the fault, and be listed. Also, one of the exceptions to this section in the 2011 NEC has been deleted. The old exception permitted ground-fault protection to be omitted on non-dwelling locations if the equipment grounding conductor was sized at twice the size required by Table Increasing the size of the equipment grounding conductor was found not to make a significant difference in preventing fires. In addition to being listed and capable of detecting ground-fault currents in grounded and ungrounded conductors, ground-fault detection for PV systems must interrupt the flow of fault current and indicate a ground-fault is present. Page 150 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

151 Question 276: Which of the following statements about ground-fault protection for grounded DC PV arrays is correct? A: Devices installed to provide ground-fault protection for grounded DC PV arrays are required to provide both a visible and audible indication that the device has detected a ground-fault. B: Devices installed to provide ground-fault protection for grounded DC PV arrays are required to be listed. C: Ground-fault protection is not required for any PV array system installed for a single-family dwelling unit. D: Ground-fault protection for DC PV arrays is required to protect people from electrical shock hazards. Question 277: (H) Storage Batteries. Disconnects and Overcurrent Protection. Question ID#: In some editions of the 2014 NEC, the text that is in (H) was also included as section 690.7(F). A list of new requirements has been added about providing disconnects and overcurrent protection for energy storage devices (batteries) that are used with PV systems. If the output terminals from the energy storage devices (batteries) are more than 5 ft., from the equipment they supply or when the circuits pass through a wall or partition, disconnects and overcurrent protection must be installed where the batteries are located. If a second disconnect is installed within sight of the equipment that the batteries supply, in addition to the first disconnect, overcurrent protection at the second disconnect is not required. The second disconnect can simply be a nonfused disconnect switch. When PV circuits pass through a wall or partition, disconnects and/or overcurrent Either fused disconnecting means or circuit breakers are permitted. The disconnecting means and overcurrent protection must be installed at the battery end of the circuit (H)(1). protection are required. If fused disconnecting means are used, the line terminals of the disconnecting means must beconnected towards the energy storage device terminals (H)(2). Overcurrent devices or disconnecting means cannot be installed in battery enclosures where explosive gases may exist (H)(3) Where the disconnecting means for the batteries is not within sight of the equipment connected to the batteries, a second disconnect must be connected at the equipment (H)(4). Placards or directories for all disconnecting means must be installed that indicate the location of all other disconnecting means if the batteries are not within sight of the PV system AC and DC disconnecting means. Question 277: In a PV system, the storage batteries and the equipment the batteries supply are separated by a wall. Which of the following statements about the energy output conductors between the batteries and the equipment they supply is correct? A: Energy output conductors between batteries and the equipment they supply are not permitted to be less than 5 feet long. B: A disconnect and overcurrent protective device are required on the battery end of the conductors; only a disconnect is required on the equipment end of the conductors. C: A disconnect and an overcurrent protective device (OCPD) are required on each end of the energy output conductors. D: Energy output conductors between batteries and the equipment they supply are not permitted to be more than 5 feet long. Page 151 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

152 Question 278: Overcurrent Protection. Question ID#: This section was reorganized to bring all requirements about overcurrent protection for PV systems into a single section. For example, the requirement that overcurrent devices must be rated no less than 125% of the maximum calculated current was moved to this section. Also, language requiring the use of overcurrent devices specifically listed for use in PV systems was clarified in the 2014 NEC. PV source circuits, PV output circuits, inverter output circuits, and storage battery circuit conductors all require overcurrent protection if there is potential for backfeeding that could damage PV wiring or components. PV source circuit, PV output circuit, inverter Overcurrent devices, either fuses or circuit breakers, used in the DC portion of a PV power system must be listed. The overcurrent protection for the PV source and output circuits must be listed PV overcurrent devices. They are required to be accessible, but not readily accessible. For example, that means the fuses for the source conductors from the PV modules could be located in a combiner box on the rooftop. output circuit, and storage battery circuit conductors and equipment require overcurrent protection. A single fuse or circuit breaker in a grounded PV source circuit is required in the ungrounded conductor to protect the PV modules and the interconnecting conductors. In an ungrounded system, overcurrent devices must be installed in each ungrounded conductor. Question 278: Ungrounded PV source circuits are: A: Required to have overcurrent protective devices installed in each ungrounded PV source circuit conductors. B: Permitted to be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker listed for use in any AC or DC circuit. C: Permitted to be protected by a single overcurrent protective device in either of the two ungrounded PV source circuit conductors. D: Required to have an overcurrent protective device installed in the PV source circuit conductor that is grounded. Question 279: Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings. Question ID#: When a building is on fire, energized conductors pose an additional risk to firemen and other first responders. Solar photovoltaic systems will continue to generate power as long as the sun is shining. If the PV modules are mounted on the roof, and the manual DC disconnect is mounted at grade level, the conductors from the PV combiner boxes on the roof to the DC disconnect will remain energized, even if the DC disconnect is shut off. A new requirement in requires an automatic rapid shutdown of PV systems installed on or in buildings. The rapid shutdown must reduce the voltage on PV conductors that are more than 5 ft. in length inside the building or more than 10 ft. from a PV array. The voltage on the PV conductors must be reduced to not more than 30 volts within 10 seconds of when the rapid shutdown starts. PV systems installed on buildings will now need to be capable of a rapid shutdown. If the building with the PV modules also has a utility service, a permanent plaque must be posted with the words, PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH RAPID SHUTDOWN. Exactly how the rapid shutdown of the PV system is accomplished is not spelled out. Sensors embedded in the combiner boxes or in the modules themselves are a possibility. Until such systems are commercially available, the authority having jurisdiction may not enforce this requirement. Page 152 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

153 Question 279: Which of the following installations would require a rapid shutdown method be provided for PV system conductors? A: Pole-mounted PV source circuit conductors that have a length of 4 feet. B: Rooftop source circuit conductors that enter the building for 4 feet and have a total length of 10 feet. C: Rooftop PV array conductors that have a length of 20 feet from the array to an inverter. D: Rooftop PV array conductors with a length of 10 feet from the array to an inverter. Question 280: (C) Direct-Current Combiner Disconnects. Question ID#: Disconnects are now required for the outputs of DC combiners that are mounted on the roofs of dwellings or other buildings. The load break disconnecting means must be located in the combiner or within 6 ft. of the combiner. The disconnecting means can be remotely operable but must be capable of being operated manually if the control power is off. A new definition of Direct-Current (DC) Combiner is in A device used in the PV source and PV output circuits to combine two or more DC circuit inputs and provide one DC circuit output. The DC combiner takes multiple inputs from solar PV panels (PV source) and combines them into a single DC output circuit. It is the single DC output that must be capable of being disconnected. Having a disconnecting means for the PV modules on the roof of a building will allow firefighters and first-responders to quickly disconnect the PV system at the source. In an emergency this will disconnect PV wiring in the walls of the structure as well as de-energize PV conductors anywhere downstream from the combiner boxes. This will mean that firefighters on the roof won't come in contact with energized conductors as they fight the fire on the roof or make roof penetrations if the fire has spread to the inside of the structure. DC combiner disconnects must be in the combiner box or within 6 ft. Question 280: Where are direct-current combiner disconnects required? A: For PV systems mounted on wood structures on the ground. B: On the roofs of dwellings. C: For PV systems that use micro-inverters. D: On pole-mounted PV systems. Question 281: (A) Disconnect Type. Manually Operable. Question ID#: Disconnect types for ungrounded solar photovoltaic (PV) conductors can now be manual or power operated. In the 2011 NEC only manually operated switches or circuit breakers were permitted. If a power operated disconnect is used, it must be able to be manually operated in the event of a power-supply failure. Power operated disconnects will allow ungrounded PV conductors to be disconnected from one or more remote locations. Power operated disconnects will give installers the flexibility to satisfy varying requirements, such as a utility wanting the PV disconnect to be located near the revenue meter, a fire department requiring the disconnect to be near the service disconnect, and a maintenance department wanting the disconnect on the roof adjacent to the PV modules. Service disconnects can be manually or power operated, per Now disconnects for ungrounded PV conductors can be also. Disconnects for ungrounded solar photovoltaic (PV) conductors can now be manual or power operated. A disconnecting means marked for use in PV systems can be a manually-operable industrial control switch, a molded case circuit breaker, a molded case switch, an enclosed switch, or an open-type switch. Page 153 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

154 Molded case circuit breakers and switches that are not marked for use on PV systems are permitted if they are not specifically labeled "line" and "load" and are suitable for backfeed operation. Also, enclosed switches, open-type switches, and low voltage power circuit breakers (600 VDC or less without a PV marking) are allowable for use if the circuit breaker or switch is rated for DC. Question 281: Which of the following disconnecting means is NOT allowable for use in a DC PV array? A: A listed, DC-rated molded case circuit breaker with "line" and "load" marking. B: A listed switch marked for use in PV systems. C: A listed PV enclosed switch marked for use in PV systems. D: A listed, DC-rated open-type switch. Question 282: Wiring Methods. Methods Permitted. Question ID#: The methods permitted for PV wiring systems in Section were reorganized and several new permitted wiring methods were added (B) Identification and Grouping: To minimize problems caused by damaged insulation and short-circuits, PV source and output circuits are not permitted to be installed in the same enclosure, raceway or cable with non-pv system conductors or inverter output conductors, unless separated by a partition. PV source, PV output, and inverter output conductors are required to be identified at each termination, connection, and splice. If conductors of two or more PV systems are in the same enclosure, the conductors of different systems are to be identified and grouped separately by cable ties or by spacing unless grouping by cable or raceway makes further grouping unnecessary. All wiring methods, systems, and fittings listed for use for PV arrays and systems are permitted (D) Multiconductor Cables: This section permits Type TC and Type USE-2 multiconductor cables that contain an equipment grounding conductor to be installed outdoors for PV inverter output circuits that are used with utility-interactive inverters installed where they are not readily accessible. The maximum interval for securing these multiconductor cables is 6 feet (G) DC PV Source and DC Output Circuits on or Inside a Building: This section was revised to clarify the requirement for identifying the location of DC PV source and DC output circuit conductors that are embedded within a laminated, built-up roof structure or membrane. In areas of the roof that are not covered by PV equipment or PV modules, the location of DC PV source and DC output circuit conductors is required to be marked by a means of identification approved as suitable for exposure to weather and direct sunlight (I) Bipolar PV Systems: If the sum of the voltages of two monopole sub-arrays exceeds the voltage rating of the output conductors or the equipment they are connected to, the output conductors of each monopole sub-array have to be installed in separate raceways and kept separate from conductors of the other sub-array except where they are connected to an inverter. The monopole sub-arrays themselves are required to be separated physically. Unless installed in switchgear where disconnects are separated by a physical barrier and are listed for the maximum voltage between the sub-arrays, disconnects and overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) are required to be installed in separate enclosures. A permanent notice is required to warn that disconnection of grounded conductors can cause an overvoltage (J) Module Connection Arrangement: This section now requires the connections to panels and modules to be arranged so that the grounded conductor connection to PV source circuits is not interrupted by removal of a module or panel. Page 154 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

155 Question 282: Which of the following multiconductor cables is permitted to be installed in an outdoor location when used for PV inverter output circuits from a utility-interactive inverter installed where it is not readily accessible? A: Type XHHW-2. B: Type THWN-2. C: Type USE-2. D: Type XHHW. Question 283: Grounding. System Grounding. Question ID#: This section has been reorganized into a list format. In the 2014 NEC all grounded and ungrounded PV systems are installed according to this section, regardless of their voltage. The 2014 NEC has removed the requirement for having to solidly ground the system. Removal of this requirement permits impedance grounding of grounded two-wire systems and of bipolar systems that have a grounded center tap. The revision makes reference to Section which requires PV systems to incorporate a ground-fault protection system to reduce fire hazards. Section states that PV systems must comply with ONE of the following: PV Systems may be grounded or ungrounded. - (1) PV systems can be ungrounded as long as they comply with the requirements of which specify the requirements for ungrounded systems. - (2) Grounded, two-wire systems must have one conductor that is either grounded or impedance grounded. - (3) Bipolar grounded systems must have the reference or center-tap conductor grounded or must be impedance grounded. - (4) Other types of PV systems that are neither solidly grounded or impedance grounded must use listed equipment that affords equivalent system protection in accordance with 250.4(A). Question 283: Which of the following statements about the grounding of PV systems is correct? A: Only PV systems operating at less than 300 volts are required to be grounded. B: Impedance grounding of a grounded bipolar PV system is permitted. C: PV systems operating at more than 50 volts are not permitted to be grounded. D: All PV systems are required to be solidly grounded. Page 155 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

156 Question 284: (D) Grounding Electrode System. Additional Auxiliary Electrodes for Array Grounding. Question ID#: Section (D) is a new section in the 2014 NEC. Auxiliary grounding electrodes are now required to be installed at all ground- and pole-mounted PV arrays. If the PV array is mounted on the roof of a structure, the auxiliary grounding electrode must be mounted as close as practicable to the location of the roof-mounted array. The grounding electrode conductor for the auxiliary grounding electrode must connect to the frame of the PV modules or the structure that supports the modules. The DC grounding electrode conductor is sized from section The auxiliary grounding electrode and grounding electrode conductor are not a substitute for the equipment bonding and grounding conductors that are connected to the PV equipment. Auxiliary grounding electrodes are now required to be installed at all ground- and pole-mounted PV arrays. Unlike the DC grounding electrode required in (B) & (C), the auxiliary grounding electrode for the PV array is not required to be bonded to other grounding electrodes. There are two purposes for requiring installation of an additional auxiliary grounding electrode: - It minimizes damage to PV systems in the event lightning strikes the structure on which the arrays are mounted. - It minimizes any voltage difference between the pole, or structure on which PV modules are mounted, and the surface (earth or rooftop) on which arrays are mounted. Local grounding of PV arrays and their supporting structure minimizes shock hazards that may occur by relying on equipment grounding conductors to effectively connect PV arrays and their supporting structure to a grounding electrode system that may be installed a long distance away from the PV array. Question 284: How is an auxiliary grounding electrode for a pole-mounted PV array connected? A: Bonded to the frames of the PV modules. B: Bonded to the AC grounding electrode system. C: Bonded to the inverter. D: Bonded to the DC grounding electrode system. Page 156 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

157 Question 285: 694 Wind Electric Systems. Question ID#: The title and scope of Article 694 was revised to include the requirements for wind electric systems regardless of their rated output. Article 694 now covers Wind Electric Systems both below and above 100 kw. It was recognized that the rated output of a wind turbine electric system did not affect the requirements for installing the turbine. The word "small" has been deleted from the title to Article 694 and at every place it was used in the Article. Now the NEC covers all wind electric system generators regardless of their size. UL standards which cover wind electric systems do not have a dividing line between systems 100kW or less and systems over 100kW, and now the NEC does not make a distinction either. Article 694 is no longer limited to wind electric In addition to changes affecting the size of the systems that the NEC covers, two changes in affect the installations of these systems. systems 100 kw or less. Section 694.7(E) which permits the installation of a receptacle supplied by the wind electrical system for maintenance and data acquisition was revised; now, all 125- volt single-phase, 15- and 20- amp receptacles have to be provided with GFCI protection. Section 694.7(F) was revised to permit the towers that support wind generators and alternators to be used as raceways if evaluated for that purpose when listed. Question 285: Which of the following statements about wind electrical systems is correct? A: Wind electrical systems are covered by the NEC regardless of their rated output. B: Wind electrical systems with a rated output in excess of 100 kw are not covered by the NEC. C: Wind electrical systems with a rated output in excess of 10 kw are not covered by the NEC. D: Only interactive wind electrical systems are covered by the NEC. Chapter 6 - Additional Questions Question 286: Article 625 Electric Vehicle Charging System. Question ID#: Question 286: Which of the following statements about electric vehicle charging systems is correct? A: Electric vehicle charging systems can be supplied by permanent wiring methods or can be cord-and plug-connected to the premises wiring system. B: A power-supply cord connects the electric vehicle charging system to the vehicle. C: Receptacle outlets used to supply electric vehicle charging systems must be a minimum of 100 amps. D: Power-supply cords to connect electric vehicle charging systems to receptacle outlets can be up to 20 ft. in length. Question 287: (A)(1)&(2) Receptacles. Required Receptacles, Location. Circulation and Sanitation System, Location. Question ID#: Question 287: Which of the following is permitted to serve as a general purpose receptacle for a permanently installed swimming pool? A: A 20-amp, 125-volt, GFCI protected duplex receptacle that also supplies power for a cord-and-plug connected circulation pump. B: A 15-amp, 125-volt, GFCI protected receptacle connected to a general purpose branch circuit if the receptacle is installed Page 157 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

158 36 inches above the floor in a wall that is 8 feet from the pool's water. C: A 15-amp, 125-volt, GFCI protected duplex receptacle that also supplies power for a cord-and-plug connected pool sanitation system. D: A 20-amp, 125-volt, GFCI protected receptacle connected to a general purpose branch circuit if receptacle is installed 36 inches above the floor in a wall that is 5 feet from the pool's water. Question 288: & System Grounding & Equipment Grounding and Bonding. Question ID#: Question 288: Which of the following is true of an auxiliary ground rod installed for use in an IT room? A: They are permitted to be used as the only reference to ground for branch circuits in the IT room. B: They are permitted if the earth is not used as an effective ground-fault current path. C: They must have a resistance to earth of 25 ohms or less. D: They are required to be bonded to the grounding electrode system. Question 289: 694 Wind Electric Systems. Question ID#: Question 289: When is the installation of a wind generator covered by the NEC? A: Only when it is within the scope of Article 694. B: Only when it is less than 100 kw. C: Only when it is installed on public property. D: Only when it is an interactive system that connects to the utility grid. Question 290: Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings. Question ID#: Question 290: Which of the following PV conductor installations does NOT require rapid shutdown? A: 12 ft. of PV conductors on a rooftop. B: 15 ft. of PV conductors on a rooftop. C: 10 ft. of PV conductors that are inside a building. D: 3 ft. of PV conductors that are inside a building. Question 291: (B) Outdoor Installations. Bonding. Question ID#: Question 291: Which of the following conditions would permit a hot tub to be installed outdoors without an equipotential bonding grid? A: The hot tub is listed for aboveground use. B: The hot tub is installed in the ground flush with the perimeter surface. C: The circulating pump on the hot tub is connected to an equipment grounding conductor. D: The hot tub must be at least 4 ft. from the property line. Question 292: (C) Motors. GFCI Protection. Question ID#: Page 158 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

159 Question 292: If it supplies a pool pump motor, which of the following branch circuits is NOT required to be GFCI protected? A: A 15-amp, 1-phase, 120 VAC branch circuit, cord-and-plug connected. B: A 20-amp, 1-phase, 230 VAC branch circuit, cord-and-plug connected. C: A 25-amp, 1-phase, hardwired, 120 VAC branch circuit. D: A 20-amp, 3-phase, hardwired, 208 VAC branch circuit. Question 293: Article 646 Modular Data Centers. Question ID#: Question 293: What is the maximum overcurrent protection size for a 1/0 THWN cu. feeder tap conductor that supplies a Modular Data Center? A: 200 amps. B: 250 amps. C: 150 amps. D: 225 amps. Question 294: 690.7(F) Maximum Voltage. Disconnects and Overcurrent Protection. Question ID#: Question 294: A PV system uses lead acid batteries for energy storage. If a fused disconnecting means is used, the line terminals of the disconnecting means: A: Are actually considered the load terminals. B: Must be copper. C: Shall be connected toward the energy storage device terminals. D: Must be installed inside the battery storage enclosure. Question 295: 600.6(A)(1) Disconnects. At Point of Entry to a Sign Enclosure. Question ID#: Question 295: Feeder conductors supplying an elevated sign enter the pole at grade level. Where is the disconnect for the sign required? A: At the point where the conductors leave the pole and enter the sign. B: At the point where the conductors leave the sign enclosure. C: At the point where the conductors enter the pole. D: At the point where the conductors leave the panelboard supplying the feeder. Question 296: (D) Grounding Electrode System. Additional Auxiliary Electrodes for Array Grounding. Question ID#: Question 296: Which of the following statements about auxiliary grounding for pole- mounted PV systems is correct? A: The grounding electrode conductor for the auxiliary grounding electrode is sized from Table B: The auxiliary grounding electrode must be bonded to the DC grounding electrode system. C: The auxiliary grounding electrode is connected directly to the array frame(s) or structure. D: Equipment bonding and grounding conductors are not required. Question 297: 690.5(A) Ground-Fault Protection. Ground-Fault Detection and Interruption. Page 159 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

160 Question ID#: Question 297: Where is ground-fault protection required for PV systems? A: On the AC side of the PV inverter. B: Built-in to the PV modules. C: Located to detect ground-fault current in DC conductors. D: Located to sense current flow in the grounding electrode. Question 298: (C) Direct-Current Combiner Disconnects. Question ID#: Question 298: Which of the following statements about direct-current combiner disconnects is true? A: The DC combiner disconnect must be located within 10 ft. of the DC combiner box. B: The DC combiner disconnect must be remotely operated while standing on grade. C: The DC combiner disconnect must be readily accessible while standing on grade. D: The DC combiner disconnect must be located within 6 ft. of the DC combiner box. Chapter 7 Question 299: Surge Protection. Question ID#: A new Section 700.8, Surge Protection, has been added to Article 700, Emergency Systems. It says: A listed SPD shall be installed in or on all emergency systems switchboards and panelboards. An SPD is a Surge Protective Device. The new section expands the required use of listed surge protective devices (SPD) to include all emergency system switchboards and panelboards. The SPD is highly effective in preventing fires and equipment damage caused by a power surge due to utility switching, direct or indirect lightning strikes, or high voltage lines crossing low voltage lines. Any of these can cause the system voltage within a facility to abruptly spike. Although this surge may last for only an instant, it could puncture a conductor's insulation, establishing a permanent conductive path and set the stage for problems to occur in the future. This may take place either in the wiring or within the equipment. Emergency system switchboards and panelboards need a listed surge protective device. The rating of an SPD is critical. Too high a rating will mean that low-level surges are let through, and too low a rating will mean that the surge may destroy the protective device. An effective strategy is to install SPDs with different ratings in cascade with the more robust devices placed upstream in the electrical system. Question 299: Which of the following units would comply with Section 700.8? A: An SPD installed in an office building panelboard that supplies emergency loads. B: An SPD installed in a hospital panelboard that supplies non-essential loads. C: Utility-owned equipment installed on a pole adjacent to the transformer. D: A listed plug-in strip with surge protection. Page 160 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

161 Question 300: (F) Emergency Systems. Unit Equipment. Question ID#: Individual unit equipment for emergency illumination consists of a rechargeable battery, a battery charging means, one or more lamps, and an automatic way to energize the lamps when the supply to the unit equipment fails. The branch circuit feeding the unit equipment must be the same branch circuit as that serving the normal lighting in the area and connected ahead of any local switches. An exception permits a separate branch circuit to be installed as the supply to the unit equipment, if an uninterrupted area is supplied by 3 or more normal branch circuits, the circuits originate from the same panelboard, and the circuit breaker that feeds the emergency lighting has a lock-on feature. The requirements for emergency lighting have changed. The exception has been changed to permit a separate branch circuit to the emergency lighting only if the normal branch circuits that supply lighting to the area are not part of a multiwire branch circuit. Multiwire branch circuits must have identified handle ties, or be wired to a multi-pole circuit breaker, so that there is a way to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors. With individual circuits wired to multi-pole breakers, or with handle ties, it is more likely that a fault on one circuit will cause the other circuits that are part of the multiwire branch circuit to trip. If all the breakers that supply normal lighting to the area trip, the area is left in total darkness, and there is an increased hazard. A separate circuit can still supply emergency lighting if all the conditions of the exception are met, but the separate emergency lighting circuit cannot be part of a multiwire branch circuit. Question 300: Which of the following statements about unit equipment for emergency lighting is true? A: An emergency light is to be controlled by a switch adjacent to the unit. B: Remote heads are not permitted. C: The branch circuit feeding the unit is to be the same branch circuit as that serving the normal lighting in the area. D: An emergency light is to be on a branch circuit that serves no other load. Question 301: Emergency Systems. Multiwire Branch Circuits. Question ID#: The branch circuit serving emergency lighting and power circuits shall not be part of a multiwire branch circuit. This new requirement is meant to increase the reliability of emergency lighting and power circuits. A fault on a single leg of a 3-pole circuit breaker used in a multiwire branch will de-energize all three circuits. Instead of one emergency lighting circuit being disabled, all three lighting circuits will trip. If individual circuits are installed for each branch circuit, rather than a multiwire branch circuit, a fault on a single branch circuit will only affect that circuit. Emergency lighting cannot be part of a multiwire branch circuit. Multiwire branch circuits cannot be used in health care facilities for branch circuits serving receptacles at patient bed locations in general care areas and critical care areas for the same reason. Receptacles at patient bed locations are critical for the care of the patient. If multiwire branch circuits were permitted, a fault on a single piece of equipment could de-energize other equipment that was vital for patient care. Not allowing multiwire branch circuits increases reliability by limiting a fault to a single circuit. Handle ties used in a multiwire branch circuit are meant to provide a way to simultaneously disconnect the circuit. Handle ties do not provide a common trip for overloads or ground faults. A fault on a single circuit might not trip the other circuits Page 161 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

162 of the multiwire branch circuit. However, for emergency lighting and power circuits it doesn't matter. Multiwire branch circuits are never permitted. Question 301: Why are multiwire branch circuits not allowed for emergency lighting or power circuits? A: A fault on one leg of a multiwire branch circuit can de-energize other circuits that are part of the multiwire branch circuit. B: A fault on one leg of a multiwire branch circuit will de-energize other circuits that are connected to the same phase in the panelboard. C: A multiwire branch circuit will over-fill the conduit. D: A multiwire branch circuit will overload the grounded, neutral conductor. Question 302: 702.7(C) Optional Standby Systems. Signs. Power Inlet. Question ID#: A sign is now required at a power inlet used to connect a portable generator to a premises wiring system. The sign must say what type of generator will be connected to the power inlet based on the wiring in the transfer switch. Portable generators can be one of two types: (1) A separately derived system with the neutral bonded to the frame of the generator. (2) A non-separately derived system where the neutral conductor is not bonded to the frame of the generator. When the neutral is bonded to the frame of the generator the sign must say, WARNING: FOR CONNECTION OF A SEPARATELY DERIVED (BONDED NEUTRAL) SYSTEM ONLY. A warning sign is required at the power inlet temporary connection to a portable generator. When the neutral is not bonded to the frame of the generator the sign must say, WARNING: FOR CONNECTION OF A NON-SEPARATELY DERIVED (FLOATING NEUTRAL) SYSTEM ONLY. A transfer switch for a separately derived system where the neutral from the generator is bonded to the frame of the generator has a separate pole for the neutral conductor and transfers the neutral from the generator to the premises wiring system. A transfer switch for a non-separately derived type of generator does not transfer the neutral to the premises wiring system. The neutral connection from the utility is used when the generator is supplying power to the transfer switch. The type of generator must match the type of transfer switch. If, for example, the generator has the neutral bonded to the generator frame making it a separately derived system type of generator, the transfer switch must disconnect the neutral from the utility and reconnect the neutral from the generator. If there is a mismatch, and the grounded conductor from the utility remains connected to the generator neutral, parallel ground currents will circulate on the premises wiring system. Question 302: Where is the warning sign required for a portable generator used for an optional standby system? A: At the power inlet used to connect a portable generator to the premises wiring. B: At the utility meter. C: At the generator. D: At the transfer switch. Page 162 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

163 Question 303: Outdoor Generator Sets. Question ID#: Outdoor generator sets have been divided into two categories: - (A) Permanently Installed Generators and Portable Generators Greater than 15 kw. - (B) Portable Generators 15 kw or Less. If an outdoor generator set rated greater than 15 kw is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means that meets the requirements of Section and is within sight of the building, an additional disconnecting means is not required where the generator circuit conductors enter or pass through the building. A disconnecting means is not required for a portable 15 kw or less cord-and-plug connected generator. In order to qualify under Section , the disconnect in the greater than 15 kw generator must be lockable in the open position unless cetain conditions in that section are met. For a portable generator, the cord and plug can serve as the disconnecting means. If the generator supply conductors terminate at a disconnecting means in or on the building, the disconnecting means shall be suitable for use as service equipment. For portable generators rated 15 kw or less, a flanged inlet and cord-and-plug type connection can serve as the required disconnecting means. No further disconnecting means is required. Question 303: An outdoor generator set is rated 20 kw, has a readily accessible disconnecting means, and is within sight of the building. Which of the following statements is true? A: A flanged inlet and cord-and-plug connection can serve as the disconnecting means. B: Any disconnecting means inside the generator must be suitable for use as service equipment. C: Under certain conditions the disconnecting means in the generator can serve as the only disconnecting means. D: A disconnecting means is always required at the building supplied by the generator. Question 304: Interconnected Electric Power Production Sources. Point of Connection. Question ID#: This section has been reorganized, expanded, and simplified. A new sub-section has been added requiring arc-fault protection for utility-interactive inverters, such as the micro-inverters that attach to a single PV module, rated 240 volts and 30 amperes or less. Arc-fault protection is required if there is exposed cable or a wire harness that is not installed within an enclosed raceway. For feeders that are connected to the output of the inverter, the size of the feeder cannot be less Most of the changes have been made at (D)(2), Bus or Conductor Ampere Rating. There are now 3 subsections: (1) Feeders, (2) Taps, and (3) Busbars. The requirements have become more permissive because for Feeders and Busbars there is now a choice for the designer or installer about how to determine the ampere rating. than the sum of the primary source overcurrent device and 125% of the inverter output circuit current. For feeders that are connected to the output of the inverter, per (D)(2)(1)(a), the size of the feeder cannot be less than the sum of the primary source overcurrent device and 125% of the inverter output circuit current. Or, per (D)(2)(1)(b), the overcurrent device on the load side of the inverter connection must be rated no greater than the ampacity of the feeder. There are also two main ways to determine the rating of the busbar in a panelboard. In the first method, according to (D)(2)(3)(b), the sum of 125% of the inverter output circuit current and the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the busbar Page 163 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

164 cannot exceed 120% of the ampacity of the busbar. For example, the output from an inverter rated 32 amps backfeeds a 40 amp circuit breaker (32 amps x 125% = 40 amps) in a panelboard with 200 amp busbars and a main breaker rated 200 amps. This is acceptable because the 40 amp circuit breaker is 20% of the rating of the busbars. If this method is chosen, a sign must be posted at the panelboard: WARNING: INVERTER OUTPUT CONNECTION; DO NOT RELOCATE THIS OVERCURRENT DEVICE. In the second method, the sum of the ampere ratings of all overcurrent devices in a panelboard cannot exceed the ampacity of the panelboard. Load and supply circuit breakers must be counted, but the main breaker is not counted. If this method is used, a sign must be posted at the panelboard: WARNING: THIS EQUIPMENT FED BY MULTIPLE SOURCES. TOTAL RATING OF ALL OVERCURRENT DEVICES, EXCLUDING MAIN SUPPLY OVERCURRENT DEVICE, SHALL NOT EXCEED AMPACITY OF BUSBAR. Question 304: Which of the following statements about determining the size of a feeder connected to the output of a utility-interactive inverter is true? A: The overcurrent device on the load side of the inverter connection cannot be rated greater than the feeder ampacity. B: The feeder must be rated 100% of the inverter output circuit current. C: The overcurrent device on the load side of the inverter connection can be 125% of the feeder ampacity. D: The feeder must be rated at 150% of the inverter output circuit current. Question 305: Location of Overcurrent Protection. Question ID#: Article 705, Interconnected Electric Power Production Sources, sets the rules for when the electric power to a building is supplied by multiple sources like a utility, generator, solar photovoltaics, or wind generators. When these alternate power sources are connected ahead of the service disconnect, the overcurrent protection for the conductors from the alternate power sources to the service point have been installed remotely. Overcurrent protection needs to be within 10 ft. of where the electric power production source The Code change requires the overcurrent protection that is connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting means to be located within 10 feet of the point where the electric power production source conductors are connected to the service. An Informational Note says that the overcurrent protection protects against short-circuit current supplied from the primary source of electricity, i.e. the utility. conductors are connected to the service. An exception permits the overcurrent protection for the power production sources to be located more than 10 feet from the point of connection to the utility service if cable limiters or current limited circuit breakers are installed at the service in the ungrounded conductors. The reasoning behind this requirement is that when connections are made at some distance ahead of service equipment, these conductors are not adequately protected against overcurrent because the utility overcurrent protection is at a very high level. Requiring overcurrent protection within 10 feet of the service will limit the damage that can be done to these conductors if there is a fault on the utility side. Question 305: Which of the following installations meets the requirements for overcurrent protection for interconnected electric power production sources? A: The overcurrent protection for electric power production source conductors is located remotely from the service disconnecting means. B: The overcurrent protection for electric power production source conductors is located 9 feet from the service disconnecting means. C: The overcurrent protection for electric power production source conductors is located ahead of the service point. D: The overcurrent protection for electric power production source conductors is located 13 feet from the service disconnecting means. Page 164 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

165 Question 306: Article 728 Fire-Resistive Cable Systems. Question ID#: Article 728 is new to the 2014 NEC and covers fire-resistive cable systems. This new article covers the installation of fire-resistive cables, fire-resistive conductors, and other system components used for survivability of critical circuits during a fire. Prior to this new article, only listing information or manufacturer installation instructions for the cable system provided the necessary information to properly install such cables or systems. Now, installers and inspectors have a resource where specific methods of mounting, supporting, splicing, marking, and even types of acceptable pulling lubricants can be referenced. Fire-resistive systems are designed to ensure survivability of critical circuits under fire conditions. Many Code articles have sections that allow the use of "listed electrical circuit protective systems". For example, section 695.6(A)(2) requires that when feeders for fire pumps are run inside of a building, the conductors shall be installed using one of the following methods: - Be encased in a minimum 50 mm (2 in.) of concrete. - Be protected by a fire-rated assembly listed to achieve a minimum fire rating of 2 hours and dedicated to the fire pump circuit(s). - Be a listed electrical circuit protective system with a minimum 2 hour fire rating. Many installers resort to using method 1 or 2 as listed above because they do not understand how to properly apply method 3. Previously, many electrical estimators use the same reasoning during a bid because they might be unsure of additional requirements or restrictions that may apply when using a fire-resistive cable system. Question 306: Which of the following is true of fire-resistive cables? A: Fire-resistive cables shall be tested and listed and shall not be interchangeable between other systems. B: Fire-resistive cables can be installed with non-fire resistive cables. C: The fire-resistive system shall be supported in accordance with the Code article for the type of raceway that is used. D: Fire-resistive cables can be used in any type of cable tray. Question 307: Article 750 Energy Management Systems. Question ID#: Article 750 applies to the installation and operation of energy management systems. An energy management system consists of any of the following: a monitor, communications equipment, a controller, a timer, or other devices that monitor and/or control an electrical load or a power production or storage source. Article 750 covers systems that monitor and/or control electrical loads, power production, or Article 750 specifies the types of electrical loads and systems that Energy Management Systems are NOT permitted to control. Energy Management Systems are permitted to control and monitor electrical loads that are not specifically restricted in accordance with (A) through (C). These sections require that critical building systems, such as fire pumps, emergency systems, and essential electrical systems in health care facilities, and elevators and escalators are not overridden or disconnected by energy management systems. storage sources. An energy management system cannot override an alternate power source, such as a generator, that supplies power to: - Fire pumps - Health care facilities - Emergency systems Page 165 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

166 - Legally required standby systems - Critical operations power systems. An energy management system cannot override the load shedding controls that ensure the minimum electrical capacity for the following: - Fire pumps - Emergency systems - Legally required standby systems - Critical operations power systems. An energy management system cannot cause disconnection of power to the following: - Elevators, escalators, moving walks, or stairway lift chairs - Positive mechanical ventilations for hazardous (classified) locations - Ventilation used to exhaust hazardous gas or reclassify an area - Circuits supplying emergency lighting - Essential electrical systems in health care facilities. Question 307: An Energy Management System is permitted to: A: Disconnect electrical power from escalators and elevators B: Remove electrical power to a fire pump which is supplied by an alternate source. C: Override the load shedding controls which ensure the minimum electrical capacity for Critical Operations Power Systems. D: Monitor and control electrical loads that are not restricted by Article 750. Question 308: Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies for Optical Fiber Cables. Question ID#: Optical fiber cables can be installed in any of the following ways: - In raceways recognized in Chapter 3. - In communications raceways listed as plenum, riser, or general-purpose communication raceways. - In cable routing assemblies. Optical fiber cables are permitted in listed The definition of a cable routing assembly is in Article 100 and describes it as a structural system used to support communications wires and cables, optical fiber cables, data cables, Class 2 and Class 3 cables, and power-limited fire alarm cables. communications raceways when installed to Code. Like communications raceways, cable routing assembles are used to support optical fiber cables in plenums, risers, or in general-purpose applications. Cable routing assemblies must be selected according to Section and Table (c). These references give the locations and types of cables where cable routing assemblies can be installed, including: - Fabricated Ducts Used for Environmental Air. - Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air. - Risers - Cables and Raceways in Vertical Runs. - Risers - Cables and Raceways in Metal Raceways. - Risers - Cables, Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies in Fireproof Shafts. - Risers - One- and Two-Family Dwellings. - Cable Trays. Page 166 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

167 - Distributing Frames and Cross-Connect Arrays. - Other Building Locations. - Multifamily Dwellings. - One- and Two-Family Dwellings. Cable routing assembles must be supported every 3 ft. and at each end or joint when run horizontally, unless listed for other support distances. In no case can the support distance be greater than 10 ft. When installed vertically, cable routing assemblies must be supported at least every 4 ft., unless listed for other support distances. No more than one joint in the cable routing assembly is permitted between supports. Question 308: A 12 ft. run of a cable routing assembly containing optical fiber cables is installed horizontally between two enclosures; the routing assembly is supported at each end by the fitting attached to the enclosures. If the cable routing assembly is not listed for other support distances, how many additional supports are required? A: 3. B: 5. C: 4. D: 2. Question 309: Grounding Devices. Question ID#: A series of Code change proposals were submitted and accepted to require listed grounding devices to be used when bonding or grounding Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways (Article 770), Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems (Article 820), Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems (Article 830), and Premises-Powered Broadband Communications Systems (Article 840). Devices connecting a shield, sheath, or non-current-carrying cable to a bonding When optical fiber, video, or communications cables contain a shield, sheath, or a non-current-carrying metallic member, it is required to be connected to a bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor with listed devices. In previous Codes there was not a requirement for the devices used for bonding or grounding to be listed. conductor or GEC must be listed. Unlisted devices can use materials that are unsuitable for a low-resistance bonding connection or not sturdy enough to make a solid connection. Requiring a listed connection between a cable sheath and a grounding and bonding conductor would also prevent questionable installation methods like twisting the cable shield and bonding conductor together. An intersystem bonding termination, as described in , is already required to be listed. The methods of grounding and bonding conductor connections to electrodes at Section require ground clamps to be listed. There are a number of requirements for grounding methods in Article 770. There are rules for the types of materials and size and length of the bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor in Section There are also requirements about how to make the connection between the bonding conductor and grounding electrode conductor. There is now a new requirement that the device used to connect the shield, sheath, or non-current-carrying metallic member of optical fiber cable to the bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor be a listed device or part of listed equipment. Page 167 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

168 Question 309: A cable has optical fibers and electrical conductors and a non-current-carrying metallic member. How is the non-current-carrying metallic member connected to the bonding conductor? A: Soldering the bonding conductor and metallic member together. B: Using a listed device to connect the bonding conductor to the metallic member. C: Wrapping the bonding conductor around the cable metallic member. D: Wrapping the metallic member around a screw in the enclosure. Chapter 8 Question 310: Innerduct. Question ID#: Innerduct is defined in Article 800 as a nonmetallic raceway placed within a larger raceway. Listed plenum communications raceway, listed riser communications raceway, and listed general-purpose raceway are permitted to be installed as innerduct in any Chapter 3 raceway if installed according to Table (b). Table (b) has 4 locations where listed communications raceways can be installed in buildings. Within each location are a number of applications where the raceways can be installed. A Y or N in the Table indicates whether or not a particular type of communications raceway can be installed in a certain location or application. The locations where communications raceways can be installed as innerduct, according to Table (b) are: - In specifically fabricated ducts as described in (B). - In other spaces used for environmental air as described in (C). - In risers. - Within buildings in other than air-handling spaces and risers. Listed communications raceways are permitted to be installed as innerduct. Examples of applications where communications raceways can be installed as innerduct are: - For risers: in metal raceways, or in fireproof shafts. For other spaces used for environmental air: supported by solid bottom metal cable trays with solid metal covers, or in metal raceway that complies with (C). Question 310: Which of the following is required if plenum raceways or communications raceways are to be installed as innerduct? A: They must be in vertical risers only. B: They must be listed. C: They must be installed in other spaces used for environmental air. D: They must be metallic. Page 168 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

169 Question 311: Mechanical Execution of Work. Question ID#: There have been problems with installing communications (telephone) cables in a neat and workmanlike manner for a number of years. Most communications cabling is installed above the ceiling, and there have been many jobs where the telephone cables were laid on top of the ceiling tiles without any support. Section clearly requires telephone cables to be supported by the building structure using straps, staples, cable ties, hangers, or fittings that will not damage the cable. A new section now requires the support fittings to be low smoke producing when installed in plenums or other spaces used for environmental air. Nonmetallic cable ties and other non-metallic cable accessories used to secure and support cables in other spaces used for environment air (plenums) shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties. Nonmetallic cable ties and accessories used to secure and support cables in plenums need to be listed as having low smoke and heat release Any material that will burn and produce smoke is limited when installed in plenums or above a dropped ceiling that is used as an air return. When the space above a ceiling is used for environmental air, the air gets distributed to other areas in the building. If there is a fire above the ceiling, the smoke produced by the fire can be deadly to building occupants throughout the building. Even material as small as a cable tie, when installed in other space used for environmental air, must have low smoke and heat release properties. properties. A similar requirement has been added at , for Optical Fiber and Raceways; , for Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems; and for Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems. Question 311: Which of the following statements about installing communications circuits is correct? A: Communications circuits cannot be bundled or installed in hangers as long as they are listed as having low smoke properties. B: Communications cabling and support accessories shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties when installed in the space above a ceiling that is used for environmental air. C: Communications circuits cannot be installed in other space used for environmental air. D: Nonmetallic cable ties are not permitted to be installed above a ceiling that is used as an air return. Question 312: Communications Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies. Question ID#: Three informational notes have been deleted from this section within the NEC. All three informational notes referred to a UL Standard about the flammability of Optical Fiber Cable Raceway or Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies. One single informational note now takes their place in the 2014 NEC, and it references ANSI/UL standard , "Signaling, Optical Fiber and Communications Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies." Communications raceways in plenums and cable routing assemblies in plenums must both be listed as "fire-resistant" as well as "low-smoke producing." UL tests communications raceways for plenums and cable routing assemblies for plenums, for a maximum flame spread distance of 5 ft. UL also tests the smoke producing capabilities of these materials by measuring the peak and the average optical density of the smoke, when a flame is applied. Communication raceways as well as cable routing assemblies in plenums, must be listed as fire-resistant and low-smoke producing. Riser communications raceways and riser cable routing assemblies must be listed as having "adequate fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing fire from spreading from floor to floor." UL has a flame propagation test that it uses for this product listing that determines how well the raceways and cable routing assemblies can resist the spread of fire from floor to floor. Page 169 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

170 General-purpose communications raceways and general-purpose cable routing assemblies must be listed as "resistant to the spread of fire." Notice how the riser raceway must "prevent" the spread of fire, while the general-purpose raceway must only "resist" it. UL uses a Vertical-Tray Flame Test (general use) to test for fire-resistant characteristics in the general-purpose communication raceways. Question 312: Which of the following is a test for the resistance to the spread of fire for the listing of general-purpose communications raceways and general-purpose cable routing assemblies? A: Resistance to the spread of fire from floor to floor test. B: Vertical-Tray Flame Test. C: Peak Optical Density of Smoke. D: Flame Propagation Test. Question 313: Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems. Other Articles. Question ID#: Two subsections have been added to 820.3, Other Articles: (B) Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal (C) Equipment in Other Space Used for Environmental Air. Including these two sections will make Article 820 on CATV systems similar to Article 800, Communications Circuits, Article 830, Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems, and Article 840, Premises-Powered Communications Systems. Section says that CATV circuits and equipment must comply with the references to other articles listed in 820.3(A)-(J). The reference for Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor Removal is (A). The reference for Equipment in Other Space Used for Environmental Air is (C)(3). CATV wiring needs to comply with other articles such as Articles 770, 830, and 840. No wiring of any sort is permitted in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapors. No wiring is ever permitted in ducts used for vapor removal or ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment. CATV equipment within a metal enclosure is permitted to be installed in other space used for environmental air. Equipment in nonmetallic enclosures must have adequate fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics and be listed for installation in other space used for environmental air. According to (C), the phrase, "other space used for environmental air" means spaces not specifically fabricated for environmental air-handling purposes but used for air-handling purposes as a plenum. An example of "other space used for environmental air" is the space above a suspended ceiling if return air is being pulled through it instead of through separate HVAC ductwork. Question 313: Which of the following statements about community antenna television and radio distribution systems installed in an above ceiling area being used as a return air plenum is true? A: CATV cables of any type can be installed above a suspended ceiling in a return air plenum. B: CATV equipment can be installed above a suspended ceiling being used as an environmental air return if listed for the purpose. C: CATV equipment can be installed inside a ventilation duct for a spray booth. D: CATV wiring can be installed inside a duct used to vent steam. Page 170 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC

171 Chapter 9 Question 314: Chapter 9, Table 1. Question ID#: We still calculate conduit fill in the same way in the 2014 NEC by using Table 1 in Chapter 9. But the column headings and title to the table have changed, and a new note has been added. The title and the left hand column heading have changed to include cables as well as conductors. The reason given for the change was because fiber optic cables are not considered conductors, but the fill requirements of Table 1 apply to fiber optic cables as well as conductors. The right hand column heading of Table 1 has changed from "All Conductor Types" to "Cross-Sectional Area (%)." The change should help clarify how to use the table: For one conductor or cable in the conduit or tubing, the conduit or tubing cannot be filled greater than 53% of the cross-sectional area. The fill percent for 2 conductors or cables is 31%, and the fill percent for over 2 conductors or cables is 40%. Changes to Table 1 include the title and the "All Conductor Types" column has been renamed "Cross-Sectional Area (%)". A new note 10 has been added that provides helpful information about Table 5. Table 5 is used to look up the approximate area and approximate diameter when round, stranded, concentric-lay conductors are used. Table 5A is used when round, compact-stranded conductors are used. Question 314: Two inch EMT has an total internal area of sq. in. How many sq. in. can be filled by 4 conductors? A: sq. in. B: sq. in. C: sq. in. D: sq. in. Question 315: Chapter 9, Table 4 & 5. Question ID#: The column headings for both Table 4 and Table 5 in Chapter 9 have been re-arranged to make the tables easier to use. Table 4 lists the area in square inches and the internal diameter for 12 different types of conduit or tubing. Table 4 is used to select the size of conduit, based on the square inch area permitted for 1 wire, 2 wires, or over 2 wires in the conduit or tubing. The most common column used to select the proper size conduit is "Over 2 Wires 40%." In the 2011 NEC, this was the far right column. It was easy to make a mistake reading all the way across the table. In the 2014 NEC, the "Over 2 Wires 40%" column has been moved to the first column on the left, after the column for the standard trade sizes of conduit. Table 5 gives the approximate area and approximate diameter of different wire types and gauges. The approximate area of a conductor is used to calculate how many conductors can fit inside conduit or tubing. In the 2011 NEC, the approximate area of a conductor was located on the far right side of the table. In the 2014 NEC, the approximate area of a conductor has been moved to the first column on the left after the size of the conductor in AWG or kcmil. This change will make Table 5 easier to use. Tables 4 and 5 have been reorganized to make them easier to use. Page 171 (c)2019 JADE Learning, LLC